711551
282
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/288
Pagina verder
Operating Instructions
High Definition Video Camera 4K Video Camera
Model No.
HC-V800
Model No.
HC-WXF1
HC-V808 HC-WXF1M
HC-VXF1
HC-VXF11
HC-VX1
HC-VX11
Please read these instructions carefully before using this product, and save this manual for future
use.
DVQP1585ZA
F0218SQ0
until
2018/03/30
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 1 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 2 -
About the recording format for recording motion pictures
(For the series/ series/ series)
You can select from AVCHD
*1
, 4K MP4
*2
, MP4
*2
or 24p
*2
recording formats to record motion
pictures using this unit. (l 102)
(For the series)
You can select from AVCHD
*1
, MP4
*2
or 24p
*2
recording formats to record motion pictures using
this unit.
*1 It is compatible with the AVCHD Progressive (1080/50p).
*2 It is not compatible with motion pictures recorded in AVCHD format.
AVCHD:
It is suitable for viewing on a high-definition TV or for saving to disc
*3
.
*3 Images recorded in 1080/50p can be saved using the following methods:
j Copying to a disc using the HD Writer AE 5.4.
j Copying to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder that supports AVCHD Progressive.
4K MP4 (For the series/ series/ series):
This is a recording format suitable for editing images.
This format can record 4K motion pictures (3840k2160/25p), which deliver a resolution four times
higher than that of full high-definition motion pictures.
MP4:
This is a recording format suitable for playing back or editing on a PC.
24p:
This allows you to record images similar to those shot on a roll of cinema film.
(For the series/ series/ series)
Images can be recorded as 4K motion pictures (3840k2160/24p) or in high-definition picture quality
(1920k1080/24p).
(For the series)
Images can be recorded as high-definition picture quality (1920k1080/24p).
Indemnity about recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of
problems that result in loss of recording or edited content, and does not guarantee any content if
recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a case where any
type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-built-in memory related component).
Read this first
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 2 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 3 -
Handling of built-in memory ()
This unit is equipped with the built-in memory. When using this component, pay attention to the
following points.
Back up data periodically.
The built-in memory is temporary storage. In order to avoid erasing data due to static electricity,
electromagnetic waves, breakage, and failures, back up the data to a PC or DVD disc. (l 249)
Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 11) illuminates while the SD card or built-in memory is being
accessed (initialisation, recording, playback, deleting etc.). Do not perform the following
operations when the lamp illuminates. It may damage the built-in memory or cause a malfunction
in the unit.
j Turn the unit off (remove the battery)
j Insert and remove the USB cable
j Expose the unit to vibrations or shock
About disposing of or giving away this unit. (l 274)
About Condensation
(When the lens, the viewfinder
*
or LCD Monitor is fogged up)
Condensation occurs when there is a change in temperature or humidity, such as when the unit is
taken from outside or a cold room to a warm room. Please be careful, as it may cause the lens, the
viewfinder or LCD monitor to become soiled, moldy, or damaged.
When taking the unit to a place which has a different temperature, if the unit is accustomed to the
room temperature of the destination for about one hour, condensation can be prevented. (When the
difference in temperature is severe, place the unit in a plastic bag or the like, remove air from the
bag, and seal the bag.)
When condensation has occurred, remove the battery and/or the AC adapter and leave the unit like
that for about one hour. When the unit becomes accustomed to the surrounding temperature,
fogginess will disappear naturally.
* For the series/ series
Cards that you can use with this unit
SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card
4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory Cards
that do not have the SDXC logo are not based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
Refer to page 17 for more details on SD cards.
Caution regarding the lens and the viewfinder
*
Do not aim the lens or the viewfinder at the sun or strong light. Doing so may cause the unit to
malfunction.
* For the series/ series
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 3 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 4 -
For the purposes of these operating instructions
SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are referred to as the “SD card”.
The smartphone and tablet are indicated as “smartphone”.
Function that can be used for Motion Picture Recording Mode:
Function that can be used for Still Picture Recording Mode:
Function that can be used for the Playback Mode:
Function that can be used for the Playback Mode (motion pictures only):
Function that can be used for the Playback Mode (still pictures only):
Scene(s) recorded in the recording format [AVCHD]: “AVCHD scene(s)”
(For the series/ series/ series)
Scene(s) recorded in the recording format [4K MP4] and scene(s) recorded in 4K Photo mode:
“4K MP4 scene(s)”
Scene(s) recorded in the recording format [MP4], scene(s) saved in MP4 (1920k1080/25p),
MP4 (1280k720/25p) or MP4 (640k360/25p): “MP4 scene(s)”
Scene(s) recorded in the recording format [24p]: “24p scene(s)”
Scene(s) containing only the Main Camera’s image that was recorded separately from a
simultaneously recorded normal scene when [Backup for Twin Camera] was set to [ON]:
“Scene(s) recorded as Backup for Twin Camera”
(For the series/ series)
Fn buttons set as follows in [FN BUTTON SETTING]
j Fn button set as [ (Wi-Fi)]: “Wi-Fi button
j Fn button set as [ (HDR Movie)]: “HDR button”
j Fn button set as [ (PHOTOSHOT)]: “Photoshot button”
j Fn button set as [ (REC MODE CHANGE)]: “Recording Mode selector button”
Pages for reference are indicated by an arrow, for example: l 00
Model numbers are abbreviated as follows in these operating instructions:
Model number Abbreviation used in these operating instructions
HC-WXF1 [WXF1]
series/
[WXF1] series
HC-WXF1M [WXF1M]
HC-VXF1 [VXF1]
series/
[VXF1] series
HC-VXF11 [VXF11]
HC-VX1 [VX1]
series/
[VX1] series
HC-VX11 [VX11]
HC-V800 [V800]
series/
[V800] series
HC-V808 [V808]
These operating instructions are designed for use with models series, series,
series and series. Pictures may be slightly different from the original.
The illustrations used in these operating instructions show model , however, parts of the
explanation refer to different models.
Depending on the model, some functions are not available.
Features may vary, so please read carefully.
Not all models may be available depending on the region of purchase.
VXF1
VX1
VXF1
WXF1
WXF1
WXF1M
VXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX1
VX11
V800
V800
V808
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 4 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 5 -
Read this first ................................................2
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts ...........8
Power supply ............................................... 12
Inserting/removing the battery ............... 12
Charging the battery .............................. 13
Charging and recording time ................. 14
Recording to a card .................................... 17
Cards that you can use with this unit ..... 17
Inserting/removing an SD card .............. 18
Turning the unit on/off ................................ 19
Selecting a mode ........................................ 21
Switching this unit between Recording
Mode and Playback Mode ..................... 21
Switching this unit between
Motion Picture Recording Mode and
Still Picture Recording Mode ................. 22
LCD monitor/viewfinder ............................. 24
Setting the display for the
LCD monitor/Viewfinder
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series ................. 24
How to use the touch screen ................. 25
Viewfinder adjustment
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series ................. 25
About the Touch Menu .......................... 26
Setting date and time .................................. 28
Basic
Before recording ......................................... 29
Selecting a media to record [WXF1M] ....... 32
Recording motion pictures ........................ 33
Recording still pictures .............................. 35
Recording still pictures in
Motion Picture Recording Mode ............ 36
Registering your favourite scenes
while recording 4K motion picture
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/
[VX1] series ........................................... 37
Motion picture/Still picture playback ........ 38
Using the menu screen .............................. 41
Using the Setup Menu ................................ 42
Advanced (Recording)
Using the zoom ...........................................52
Zoom ratio during the Still Picture
Recording Mode .....................................53
HDR Movie Mode .........................................54
Recording with the Sub Camera
(Twin Camera) [WXF1] series ....................56
Changing and adjusting the settings of
the Sub Camera and the Sub Window
......59
Recording with the Backup for
Twin Camera Function ................................62
Changing the Recording Mode ..................64
Intelligent Auto .......................................66
Intelligent Auto Plus ...............................68
Creative Control .....................................68
HDR Movie Mode ...................................71
Scene Mode ...........................................72
Cinema Like Effect
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/
[VX1] series ............................................73
FULL HD Slow Motion Video
[V800] series ..........................................78
4K Photo Mode
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/
[VX1] series ............................................78
Stop Motion Animation Assist ................79
Manual recording ........................................80
White Balance ........................................82
Manual shutter speed adjustment ..........84
Iris adjustment ........................................85
Manual Focus adjustment ......................86
Recording with the Touch Function ..........90
Touch function icons ..............................90
Recording functions of operation icons ...94
Operation icons ......................................94
Recording functions of menus ................100
Using the Fn buttons
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series .....................115
Changing the Fn button settings ..........116
Functions of the Fn button ...................117
Contents
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 5 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 6 -
Advanced (Playback)
Playback Operations ................................ 120
Motion picture playback using
operation icon ...................................... 120
Creating still picture from
motion picture ...................................... 121
Time Frame Index ............................... 122
Repeat Playback ................................. 123
Resuming the previous playback ......... 123
Setting the playback speed of
FULL HD Slow Motion Video ............... 123
Zooming in on a still picture during
playback (Playback zoom) ................... 124
Various playback functions ..................... 125
Playing back motion pictures/
still pictures by date ............................. 125
4K Cropping
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/
[VX1] series ......................................... 126
Highlight Playback ............................... 133
Manual Edit .......................................... 139
Baby Calendar ..................................... 143
Tagging Favorite Scene
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/
[VX1] series ......................................... 145
Changing the playback settings and
playing back the slide show ................. 146
Playing back still pictures recorded in
Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode
as a slide show .................................... 148
Deleting scenes/still pictures .................. 149
Deleting part of a scene
(AVCHD/Backup for Twin Camera) ..... 151
Dividing a scene
(AVCHD/Backup for Twin Camera) ..... 152
Dividing a scene to partially delete
(4K MP4, MP4) .................................... 153
Protecting scenes/still pictures ............ 154
Convert to MP4 .......................................... 155
Slow speed conversion ............................ 157
Relay scene combining [WXF1M] ........... 158
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV ...... 160
Connecting with an
HDMI micro cable ................................ 162
Listening in 5.1 channel sound
(AVCHD) .............................................. 163
Playback using VIERA Link ..................... 164
Copy/Dubbing
Copying between SD card and
Built-in Memory [WXF1M] ........................166
Copying/playing back with a USB HDD
......169
Preparing for copying/playing back ......169
Simple copy .........................................172
Copy selected files ...............................172
Playing back the USB HDD .................173
Dubbing with a Blu-ray disc recorder,
etc. ..............................................................174
Using the Eye-Fi
card .............................177
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
®
function ..........................................180
[Remote Ctrl] .............................................182
Preparations before using
[Remote Ctrl] ........................................183
Using [Remote Ctrl] with a
direct connection ..................................184
Using [Remote Ctrl] with a
wireless access point connection .........185
About [Remote Ctrl] .............................186
[Baby Monitor] ...........................................189
Preparations before using
[Baby Monitor] ......................................189
Using [Baby Monitor] ............................190
[Hom.Monitor] ............................................192
Preparations before using
[Hom.Monitor] ......................................192
Using [Hom.Monitor] ............................193
[DLNA Play] ...............................................197
Preparations before using
[DLNA Play] .........................................197
Playing back on a TV ...........................198
[Copy] .........................................................199
Preparations before using [Copy] ........199
Copying to a PC ...................................201
[Live Cast] ..................................................203
Preparations before using
[Live Cast] ............................................204
Broadcasting live ..................................205
Install the “Image App” ............................209
Setting Up a Wi-Fi Connection .................210
Using the [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard] to
set up a connection ..............................211
Connecting to a wireless access point
....212
Setting up a direct connection to a
smartphone ..........................................215
Connecting from the history .................217
If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be
established ...........................................218
How to Use the [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu .........220
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 6 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 7 -
Wireless Twin/
Multi-Camera
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function ..... 226
Notes on the Wireless Twin/
Multi-Camera function ......................... 228
Using a Smartphone as a
Wireless Sub Camera ............................... 229
When connecting a smartphone to this
unit as a Wireless Sub Camera for the
first time (To use the Wireless Twin
Camera function) ................................. 229
When connecting a smartphone to this
unit as a Wireless Sub Camera for the
first time (To use the Wireless
Multi-Camera function) ........................ 233
When connecting for the second time
or later ................................................. 237
Terminating the connection ................. 239
Recording with a Wireless Sub Camera
(Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera) .................. 240
Screen display when using a
Wireless Sub Camera .......................... 240
Changing the Wireless Twin Camera
settings ................................................ 243
Changing the Wireless Multi-Camera
settings ................................................ 244
If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be
established (Wireless Twin/
Multi-Camera) ............................................ 247
With a PC
What you can do with a PC ...................... 249
Before Installing HD Writer AE 5.4 ...... 251
Operating environment ............................ 253
Installation ................................................. 255
Connecting to a PC ................................... 256
About the PC display ........................... 258
Starting HD Writer AE 5.4 ......................... 259
Reading the operating instructions
of the software applications ................. 259
If using Mac ............................................... 260
Others
Indications .................................................261
Messages ...................................................265
About recovery .....................................266
Troubleshooting ........................................267
Cautions for use ........................................273
About copyright ........................................277
Recording modes/
approximate recordable time ...................278
Approximate number of
recordable pictures ...................................279
Optional accessories ................................281
About the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle .......281
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 7 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 8 -
1 Lens (LEICA DICOMAR)
For information on how to attach the supplied lens hood, refer to page 31.
2 Lens cover
The lens cover opens in Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode. (l 21)
3 Internal microphones
(For the series/ series)
4 Infrared light (l 97)
5 Manual ring (l 80)
6 Camera function button [CAMERA FUNCTION] (l 80)
7 AUTO/MANUAL button [AUTO/MANUAL] (l 80)
8 Grip belt (l 30)
9 Wi-Fi Transmitter (l 181)
10 Headphone terminal [ ] (l 99)
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss.
Listening at full volume for long periods may damage the user’s ears.
11 DC input terminal [DC IN] (l 13)
Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
Preparation
Names and Functions of Main Parts
series/ series series/ series
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
32 32
1
4
5
6
7
1
WXF1
VXF1
8 9
10
11
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 8 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 9 -
12 Recording/playback button [ / ] (l 21)
13 (For the series/ series)
Recording mode selector button [ / / ] (l 22)/Fn4 button (l 115)
14 Power button [ ] (l 19)
15 Battery release lever [BATT] (l 12)
16 HDR button [ ] (l 54)/Fn2 button (l 115)
*1
17 Wi-Fi button [Wi-Fi] (l 182, 189, 192, 197, 199, 203, 217, 220, 229, 233)/
Fn1 button (l 115)
*1
*1 When using series/ series, this can be used as an Fn button. (l 115)
18 USB terminal
[] (l 169, 175, 256)
19 Micro HDMI connector [HDMI] (l 160)
20 (For the series/ series)
MIC/LINE IN input terminal [MIC/LINE IN]
(For the series/ series)
Microphone terminal [MIC]
A compatible plug-in powered microphone can be used as an external microphone.
When the unit is connected with the AC adaptor, sometimes noise may be heard depending on
the microphone type. In this case, please switch to the battery for the power supply and the noise
will stop.
(For the series/ series)
If you connect an external microphone or audio device
*2
when a setting other than [AUTO] is
selected for [AUDIO LEVEL] (l 111), (audio input level meter) will be displayed. Set
[AUDIO INPUT SELECT] before connecting. (l 107)
*2 The audio from the audio device is recorded when shooting.
(For the series/ series)
If you connect an external microphone when a setting other than [AUTO] is selected for
[MIC LEVEL] (l 111), (audio input level meter) will be displayed.
series/ series series/ series
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
13
15
16
17
12 14 14
15
16
17
12
18 1918 19
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1
VXF1
20
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 9 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30
- 10 -
21 LCD monitor (Touch screen) (l 25)
22 Battery holder (l 12)
23 Speaker
24 Shoulder strap fixture
25 Recording start/stop button (l 33)
26 Status indicator (l 19, 210)
series only
31 Sub Camera (l 57)
32 Sub Camera dial (l 57)
series/ series series/ series
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
242221242221
27
25 262523 2326
It can open up to 90o. It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens or 90o
B towards the opposite direction.
(For the series/ series)
27 Viewfinder (l 24)
28 Eyecup (l 31)
Keep the Eyecup out of reach of children to
prevent swallowing.
29 Eyecup mount (l 31)
30 Diopter adjustment dial (l 25)
WXF1
VXF1
30
29
28
WXF1
32
31
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 10 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 11 -
33 Tripod receptacle
Attaching a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm or more may damage the unit.
34 SD card cover (l 18)
35 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l 18)
36 Card slot (l 18)
37 Photoshot button [ ] (l 35)/Fn3 button (l 115)
*
* When using series/ series, this can be used as an Fn button. (l 115)
38 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode)
(l 52)/Thumbnail display switch [ / ] (l 39)/Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback
Mode) (l 40)
39 Accessory shoe cover
Close this cover when not using the accessory shoe.
40 Accessory shoe
You can attach a variety of optional accessories to the shoe adaptor. For information on how to
attach and use those accessories, refer to their manuals.
33
34
35
38 3937
36
WXF1
VXF1
40
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 11 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 12 -
About batteries that you can use with this unit
The battery that can be used with this unit is VW-VBT190/VW-VBT380.
The unit has a function for distinguishing batteries which can be used safely.
The dedicated battery (VW-VBT190/VW-VBT380) supports this function. The only batteries
suitable for use with this unit are genuine Panasonic products and batteries manufactured
by other companies and certified by Panasonic. Panasonic cannot in any way guarantee
the quality, performance or safety of batteries which have been manufactured by other
companies and are not genuine Panasonic products.
Inserting/removing the battery
Press the power button to turn off the unit. (l 19)
Install the battery by inserting it in the direction shown in the figure.
Preparation
Power supply
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the genuine
product are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these battery packs
are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the requirements of
appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these battery packs may lead to
fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure
occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are
used we would recommend that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.
Removing the battery
Be sure to hold down the power button until the
status indicator goes off. Then remove the battery
while supporting the unit to prevent it from dropping.
Move the battery release lever in the direction
indicated by the arrow and remove the battery
when unlocked.
Insert the battery until it clicks and
locks.
ャモヵ
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 12 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 13 -
Charging the battery
The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is always
“live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet.
Important:
Do not use the AC adaptor/DC cable with any other equipment as it is designed only for
this unit. Also, do not use the AC adaptor/DC cable from other equipment with this unit.
The battery will not be charged if the unit is turned on.
It is recommended to charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC and 30 oC.
(The battery temperature should also be the same.)
A DC input terminal
1 Connect the DC cable to the AC adaptor and to the DC input terminal of this
unit.
Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
2 Insert the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
The status indicator (l 10) will flash red at an interval of approximately 2 seconds (approximately
1 second on, approximately 1 second off), indicating that charging has begun.
It will turn off when the charging is completed.
Connecting to the AC outlet
It is possible to use this unit with power supplied from the AC outlet by turning on the unit with the
AC adaptor connected.
Even when you use the AC adaptor for recording images, keep the battery connected.
This allows you to continue the recording even if a power failure occurs or the AC adaptor is
unplugged from the AC outlet by accident.
To charge by connecting to other device
It is possible to charge by connecting to other device with the USB cable (supplied).
Please refer to page 257.
If the status indicator flashes at a particularly fast or slow rate, refer to page 275.
We recommend using Panasonic batteries (l 14).
If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
Do not heat or expose to flame.
Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time with
doors and windows closed.
When this unit is purchased, the battery is not charged. Charge the battery fully before
using this unit for the first time.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 13 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 14 -
Charging and recording time
Charging/Recording time
Temperature: 25 oC/humidity: 60%RH
When using the LCD monitor
The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
Charging time and recordable time vary depending on the usage conditions such as high/
low temperature.
Charging times in parentheses are when charging from the USB terminal.
Maximum continuous recordable times and actual recordable times in round parentheses are the
values when the viewfinder is used.
(For the series)
Maximum continuous recordable times and actual recordable times in square parentheses are
the values when recording is performed with the Sub Camera in combination with the LCD
monitor
*
.
* These include times when is displayed on the screen.
For the series/ series
Battery model
number
[Voltage/Capacity
(minimum)]
Charging
time
Recording
format
Recording
mode
Maximum
continuous
recordable
time
Actual
recordable
time
Supplied battery/
VW-VBT190
(optional)
[3.6 V/1940 mAh]
2h20min
(5h20min)
[4K MP4] [2160]
1h35min
(1h40min)
[1h15min]
45 min
(50 min)
[35 min]
[MP4]
[1080/50M]
1h45min
(1h55min)
[1h20min]
55 min
(55 min)
[40 min]
[1080/28M]
1h45min
(1h55min)
[1h25min]
55 min
(1 h)
[40 min]
[720]
2h5min
(2h15min)
[1h35min]
1h5min
(1h10min)
[50 min]
[AVCHD]
[1080/50p]
1h45min
(1h55min)
[1h25min]
55 min
(1 h)
[40 min]
[PH]
1h50min
(1h55min)
[1h25min]
55 min
(1 h)
[45 min]
[HA], [HG],
[HE]
1h50min
(2 h)
[1h25min]
[24p]
[2160/24p]
1h35min
(1h40min)
50 min
(50 min)
[1080/24p]
1h45min
(1h50min)
55 min
(55 min)
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 14 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 15 -
VW-VBT380
(optional)
[3.6 V/3880 mAh]
3h45min
(9h45min)
[4K MP4] [2160]
3h20min
(3h30min)
[2h40min]
1h40min
(1h50min)
[1h20min]
[MP4]
[1080/50M]
3h45min
(4 h)
[2h55min]
1h55min
(2 h 5 min)
[1h30min]
[1080/28M]
3h50min
(4h5min)
[3 h]
[720]
4h30min
(4h50min)
[3h25min]
2h20min
(2h30min)
[1h45min]
[AVCHD]
[1080/50p]
3h50min
(4h5min)
[3 h]
2h
(2 h 5 min)
[1h30min]
[PH]
3h50min
(4h10min)
[3 h]
2h
(2h10min)
[1h35min]
[HA], [HG]
3h55min
(4h10min)
[3 h]
[HE]
3h55min
(4h15min)
[3h5min]
[24p]
[2160/24p]
3h20min
(3h35min)
1h45min
(1h50min)
[1080/24p]
3h40min
(4h40min)
1h55min
(2 h 5 min)
Battery model
number
[Voltage/Capacity
(minimum)]
Charging
time
Recording
format
Recording
mode
Maximum
continuous
recordable
time
Actual
recordable
time
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 15 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 16 -
* series only
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.
These times are approximations.
The actual recordable time refers to the recordable time when repeatedly starting/stopping
recording, turning the unit on/off, moving the zoom lever etc.
The batteries heat up after use or charging. This is not a malfunction.
For the series/ series
Battery model
number
[Voltage/Capacity
(minimum)]
Charging
time
Recording
format
Recording
mode
Maximum
continuous
recordable
time
Actual
recordable
time
Supplied battery/
VW-VBT190
(optional)
[3.6 V/1940 mAh]
2h20min
(5h20min)
[4K MP4]
*
[2160] 1 h 35 min 45 min
[MP4]
[1080/50M]
1h45min 55min
[1080/28M]
[720] 2h5min 1h5min
[AVCHD]
[1080/50p] 1 h 45 min
55 min
[PH], [HA],
[HG], [HE]
1h50min
[24p]
[2160/24p]
*
1h35min 50min
[1080/24p] 1 h 45 min 55 min
VW-VBT380
(optional)
[3.6 V/3880 mAh]
3h45min
(9h45min)
[4K MP4]
*
[2160] 3 h 20 min 1 h 40 min
[MP4]
[1080/50M] 3 h 45 min
1h55min
[1080/28M] 3 h 50 min
[720] 4h30min 2h20min
[AVCHD]
[1080/50p],
[PH]
3h50min
2h
[HA], [HG],
[HE]
3h55min
[24p]
[2160/24p]
*
3h20min 1h45min
[1080/24p] 3 h 40 min 1 h 55 min
Battery capacity indication
The display changes as the battery capacity reduces. ####
If there is less than 3 minutes remaining, then will become red. If the battery
discharges, then will flash.
Screen display will disappear when no touch operation is performed for a specific period of
time. However, it will be constantly displayed when the remaining battery time becomes less
than 30 minutes.
The remaining battery capacity is displayed when using the Panasonic battery that you can
use for this unit. The actual time can vary depending on your actual use.
When using the AC adaptor or batteries made by other companies, the remaining battery
capacity will not be shown.
VX1
V800
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 16 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 17 -
The unit can record still pictures or motion pictures to an SD card or built-in memory
*
. To record to
an SD card, read the following.
* only
Cards that you can use with this unit
About the Speed Class ratings for recording motion pictures
Depending on [REC MODE] and [REC FORMAT], the required card differs. (l 103)
Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed Class. Use of a non-compatible
card may cause recording to stop suddenly.
SD Speed Class is the speed standards regarding continuous writing. To check the class, see the
labelled side, etc. of the card.
* For the series/ series/ series
Preparation
Recording to a card
Card type Capacity
SD Memory Card 512 MB to 2 GB
SDHC Memory Card 4GB to 32GB
SDXC Memory Card 48 GB to 128 GB
Please check the latest information on the support website below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This website is in English only.)
When using an SDHC Memory Card/SDXC Memory Card with other equipment, check the
equipment is compatible with these Memory Cards.
An Eye-Fi X2 series SD card is required to use functions related to Eye-Fi. (l 177)
We do not guarantee the operation of SD cards other than the ones above. Further, SD cards
with a capacity of less than 32 MB cannot be used for motion picture recording.
Operation is not guaranteed for all SD cards.
4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory Cards
that do not have the SDXC logo are not based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
When the write-protect switch A on SD card is locked, no recording,
deletion or editing will be possible on the card.
Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Recording formats Recording modes Speed Class ratings Label examples
4K MP4
*
[2160]
Class10
24p All
MP4
[1080/50M]
[1080/28M], [720]
Class4 or more
AVCHD All
WXF1M
32
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 17 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 18 -
In the following situations, you need an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed
Class Rating to record motion pictures.
Use of a non-compatible card may cause recording to stop suddenly.
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode (l 74, 78)
j When [Backup for Twin Camera] is set to [ON] (l 62)
(For the series/ series/ series)
j 4K Photo Mode (l 78)
j Slow & Quick Video Mode
Inserting/removing an SD card
Caution:
Check that the access lamp has gone off.
1 Open the SD card cover and insert (remove) the SD card into (from) the card
slot B.
Face the label side C in the direction shown in the illustration and press it straight in as far as it
will go.
Press the centre of the SD card and then pull it straight out.
2 Securely close the SD card cover.
Securely close it until it clicks.
Do not touch the terminals on the back of the SD card.
Do not apply strong shocks, bend, or drop the SD card.
Electrical noise, static electricity or the failure of this unit or the SD card may damage or erase the
data stored on the SD card.
When the card access lamp is lit, do not:
j Remove the SD card
j Turn the unit off
j Insert and remove the USB cable
j Expose the unit to vibrations or shock
Performing the above while the lamp is on may result in damage to data/SD card or this unit.
Do not expose the terminals of the SD card to water, dirt or dust.
When using an SD card not from Panasonic, or one previously used on other equipment, for the
first time on this unit, format the SD card. (l 49) When the SD card is formatted, all of the
recorded data is deleted. Once the data is deleted, it cannot be restored.
Access lamp [ACCESS] A
When this unit is accessing the SD card or built-in memory, the access lamp lights up.
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 18 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 19 -
Do not place SD cards in the following areas:
j In direct sunlight
j In very dusty or humid areas
j Near a heater
j Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature (condensation can occur.)
j Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur
To protect SD cards, return them to their cases when you are not using them.
About disposing of or giving away the SD card. (l 275)
You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD monitor.
(For the series/ series)
You can also turn the unit on and off using the viewfinder.
Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.
A The status indicator lights on.
Preparation
Turning the unit on/off
Turning the unit on and off with the power button
To turn off the unit
Hold down the power button until the status
indicator goes off.
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 19 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 20 -
The unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is closed.
During normal use, opening and closing of the LCD monitor can be conveniently used to
turn the unit on/off.
The unit will not turn off while recording motion pictures or connecting to Wi-Fi even if the LCD
monitor is closed.
In the following cases, opening the LCD monitor does not turn on the unit. Press the power button
to turn on the unit.
j When the unit is originally purchased
j When you have turned off the unit using the power button
Opening the LCD monitor or extending the viewfinder turns on the unit. Closing the LCD monitor/
viewfinder turns off the unit.
During normal use, you may find it convenient to turn the unit on/off using the LCD monitor
or viewfinder.
The unit will not turn off unless the LCD monitor is closed and the viewfinder is retracted.
The unit will not turn off while recording motion pictures or connecting to Wi-Fi even if the LCD
monitor is closed and the viewfinder is retracted.
In the following cases, opening the LCD monitor or extending the viewfinder does not turn on the
unit. Press the power button to turn on the unit.
j When the unit is originally purchased
j When you have turned off the unit using the power button
When the viewfinder is extended, opening the LCD monitor turns off the viewfinder and turns on
the LCD monitor.
The viewfinder may turn on depending on the settings for the [LCD/EVF CHANGE] in the Fn
button function. (l 24)
If you use the Fn button with [ (LCD/EVF CHANGE)] (l 24) set, the LCD monitor or
viewfinder may not light, even if the unit is on.
Press the Fn button set with [ (LCD/EVF CHANGE)] (l 24) to turn the LCD monitor or
viewfinder on.
Overheat detection
When the internal temperature of the unit rises during use, a message will be displayed. When this
happens, the unit will turn off automatically a few minutes later.
Wait until the temperature has dropped before resuming use.
If you try to use the Wi-Fi function while the internal temperature of this unit is high, a message will
be displayed. When this happens, the Wi-Fi function is disabled.
Wait until the temperature has dropped before resuming use.
series/ series
Turning the unit on and off with the LCD monitor
series/ series
Turning the unit on and off with the LCD monitor/viewfinder
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 20 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 21 -
You can switch this unit between Recording Mode (Motion Picture Recording Mode/Still Picture
Recording Mode) and Playback Mode by pressing the recording/playback button.
If you touch the recording mode switching icon in Recording Mode, this unit can be switched
between Motion Picture Recording Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode.
(For the series/ series)
In Recording Mode, pressing the recording mode selector button allows you to switch between
Motion Picture Recording Mode, 4K Photo Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode. (l 22)
Switching this unit between Recording Mode and
Playback Mode
Preparation
Selecting a mode
Motion Picture Recording Mode (l 33) Recording motion pictures.
Still Picture Recording Mode (l 35) Recording still pictures.
Playback Mode (l 38, 120) Motion picture/Still picture playback.
VXF1
Recording/playback button
Press the button to switch this unit
between Recording Mode and Playback
Mode.
When you turn on this unit, it starts up in
Recording Mode.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 21 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 22 -
Switching this unit between Motion Picture Recording
Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode
You can also change the [FN BUTTON SETTING] so you can use the desired Fn button as a
Recording Mode selector button. (l 115)
series/ series
Pressing a button to switch between Motion Picture Recording Mode
and Still Picture Recording Mode
Recording mode selector button
Each time you press this button, the Recording Mode switches in the following order:
Motion Picture Recording Mode # 4K Photo Mode
*
# Still Picture Recording Mode
* The unit does not switch to 4K Photo Mode in the following cases:
j When the Wireless Twin Camera function is in use (l 226)
j Night Mode (l 97)
For information on 4K Photo Mode, refer to page 78.
: [SETUP] # [FN BUTTON SETTING] # [Fn1] to [Fn4] # [ ]
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 22 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 23 -
Touch the recording mode switching icon displayed on the LCD monitor (touch screen) to switch this
unit between Motion Picture Recording Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode.
2 Touch the recording mode switching icon.
Refer to page 25 for touch screen operation.
To display the recording mode switching icon
Display of the recording mode switching icon will disappear when no touch operation is performed
for a specific period of time. To display it again, touch the screen.
The recording mode selector button and the recording mode switching icon are disabled when
the Wireless Multi-Camera function is enabled.
If the recording start/stop button is pressed in Still Picture Recording Mode or Playback Mode,
this unit will be switched to Motion Picture Recording Mode. During motion picture/still picture
playback or in other conditions, even if the recording start/stop button is pressed, the recording
mode may not be switched.
When you switch between Motion Picture Recording Mode, 4K Photo Mode
*
and Still Picture
Recording Mode, settings used in the original recording mode may not be maintained. (l 64)
You cannot switch to Still Picture Recording Mode when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].
* For the series/ series/ series
Touching an icon to switch between Motion Picture Recording Mode
and Still Picture Recording Mode
(Motion Picture Recording Mode)
1 Press the recording/playback button to
switch this unit to Recording Mode.
The recording mode switching icon A is displayed on
the screen.
Motion Picture Recording Mode
Still Picture Recording Mode
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 23 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 24 -
Setting the display for the LCD monitor/Viewfinder
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series
When the Fn button set with [ (LCD/EVF CHANGE)] is pressed, you can change the way that
the LCD monitor and viewfinder display.
1 Select the menu. (l 41)
2 In the recording screen, press the Fn button set with [ (LCD/EVF
CHANGE)].
The setting switches between “LCD monitor” and “Viewfinder” each time you press the Fn button.
In the default setting state:
When set to “Viewfinder”:
When set to “LCD monitor”:
Even if you press the Fn button, the setting may not switch between “LCD monitor” and
“Viewfinder” in some situations. (When the copy function is being used, for example)
When the Fn button currently set as [ ] is allocated to a different Fn button function with
[FN BUTTON SETTING], the display of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder returns to the default
settings.
Preparation
LCD monitor/viewfinder
: [SETUP] # [FN BUTTON SETTING] # [Fn1] to [Fn4] # [ ]
Condition of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder
LCD monitor display Viewfinder display
LCD monitor Viewfinder
Open
Take out
On Off
Store
Close Take out Off On
Condition of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder
LCD monitor display Viewfinder display
LCD monitor Viewfinder
Open
Take out
Off
On
Store Off
Close Take out On
Condition of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder
LCD monitor display Viewfinder display
LCD monitor Viewfinder
Open
Take out
On
OffStore
Close Take out Off
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 24 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 25 -
How to use the touch screen
You can operate by directly touching the LCD monitor (touch screen) with your finger.
Touch
Touch and release the touch screen to select icon or picture.
Touch the centre of the icon.
Touching the touch screen will not operate while you are
touching another part of the touch screen.
Slide while touching
Move your finger while pressing on the touch screen.
About the operation icons
///:
Touch when changing a page or performing settings.
:
Touch to return to the previous screen.
(For the series/ series)
When the viewfinder is in use, on-screen icons will be displayed but disabled.
Open the LCD monitor to touch them.
Viewfinder adjustment [WXF1] series/[VXF1] series
Diopter adjustment
Adjust to make the image clear by
rotating the diopter adjustment dial.
Extend the viewfinder and close the LCD
monitor to turn on the viewfinder.
The viewfinder can be raised up to
approximately 50 o A.
When moving the viewfinder, be careful not to
catch your fingers.
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 25 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 26 -
About the Touch Menu
Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to switch the
operation icons.
It is also possible to switch the operation icons by sliding the Touch Menu right or left while
touching it.
B You can change the operation icons to display. (l 46)
C Displayed only in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (l 68) and [Miniature Effect]/[8mm movie]/
[Silent movie] of the Creative Control Mode (l 68).
Displayed in the following situations:
j Displayed only in [Time Lapse Rec] of the Creative Control Mode (l 68), HDR Movie Mode
(l 54), Scene Mode (l 72), Manual Mode (l 80), FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode (l 74,
78), 4K Photo Mode
*
(l 78), Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode (l 79)
j (For the series/ series/ series)
When Slow & Quick Video Mode or Slow Zoom Mode in Cinema Like Effect Mode is in use
(l 73, 75)
F (For the series/ series/ series)
Displayed in the thumbnail view of 4K MP4 scenes. (l 38)
* For the series/ series/ series
A Touch Menu
Recording Mode Playback Mode
D (For the series/ series) / E (For the series/ series)
T
W
MENU
T
W
WB
SHTR
FOCUS
WB
SHTR
IRIS
MENU
ALL
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 26 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 27 -
To display the Touch Menu
Do not touch on the LCD monitor with hard pointed tips, such as ball point pens.
Display of the Touch Menu will disappear when no
touch operation is performed for a specific period of
time during recording of motion picture/still picture.
To display it again, touch .
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 27 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 28 -
The clock is not set at the time of purchase. Make sure to set the clock.
When you turn on this unit, the message “Set home region and date/time.” may be
displayed. Select [YES], and follow the steps below to make these settings:
j Step 3 in [SET WORLD TIME] (l 42)
j Steps 2–3 of “Setting date and time”
1 Select the menu. (l 41)
2 Touch the date or time to be set, then set the desired value using /.
A Displaying the World Time setting (l 42):
[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]
The year can be set between 2000 and 2039.
3 Touch [ENTER].
Touch [EXIT] to complete the setting.
The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.
If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To recharge the
built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this unit. The battery is still
being recharged even if the unit is off. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery
will maintain the date and time for approx. 4 months.
Preparation
Setting date and time
: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 28 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 29 -
Basic camera positioning
1 Hold the unit with both hands.
2 Put your hand through the grip belt.
3 It is convenient to use the Recording button icon A when holding the unit at waist level.
When recording, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another
person or object.
When you are outdoors, record pictures with the sunlight behind you. If the subject is backlit, it will
become dark in the recording.
Keep your arms near your body and separate your legs for better balance.
Do not cover the microphones with your hand etc.
Basic motion picture recording
The unit should normally be held steady when recording.
If you move the unit when recording, do so slowly, maintaining a constant speed.
The zoom operation is useful for recording subjects you cannot get close to, but overuse of zoom
in and zoom out can make the resulting motion picture less enjoyable to watch.
Recording Yourself
Rotate the LCD monitor towards the lens side.
The image is horizontally flipped as if you see a mirror
image. (However the image recorded is the same as a
normal recording.)
Only some indications will appear on the screen. When
appears, return the direction of the LCD monitor to
normal position and check the warning/alarm indication.
(l 265)
Basic
Before recording

HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 29 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 30 -
Screen displays when recording yourself
The following icons are displayed on the screen when you are recording yourself. Touch the icons
to operate.
*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only
*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode, it focuses and then records the still picture after touching.
When using the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle (l 281), etc., icons may not be displayed, depending on
the settings of this unit.
Adjusting the grip belt
Adjust the grip belt to suit the size of your hand.
1 Open the buckle
2 Pull the end of the belt
3 Pass the belt through the holder
You can make the grip belt tighter by pulling the belt towards the buckle and then pulling it forward
again.
Zooming out: wide angle (l 52)
Zooming in: close-up (l 52)
/
Switching between Motion Picture Recording
Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode (l 21)
Starting/pausing motion picture recording
*1
(l 33)
Recording still pictures
*2
(l 35, 36, 37)
A Buckle
B Holder
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 30 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 31 -
Attaching/Removing the lens hood
This will reduce the extra light entering the lens in bright sunlight or backlight etc., making it possible
to take clearer pictures.
How to attach the lens hood
How to remove the lens hood
(For the series/ series)
Remove the lens hood when you use Night Mode ([Infrared]). (l 97)
Attaching/Removing the eyecup ( series/ series)
If you remove the eyecup, rotate it anti-clockwise by 180o and re-attach it, you can also use it with
your left eye. The eyecup is attached in the orientation for right eye use at the time of purchase.
1 While holding the viewfinder, pull the eyecup in the direction of arrow to
remove it.
2 Attach the eyecup by aligning the groove A on the eyecup mount with the
inner ridge B of the eyecup.
VXF1
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 31 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 32 -
The card and built-in memory can be selected separately to record motion pictures or still pictures.
1 Set this unit to Recording Mode. (l 21)
2 Select the menu. (l 41)
3 Touch the media to record motion pictures
or still pictures.
The media selected separately for motion pictures or
still pictures is highlighted in yellow.
4 Touch [ENTER].
Basic
Selecting a media to record [WXF1M]
: [MEDIA SELECT]
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 32 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 33 -
1 Open the LCD monitor or extend the
viewfinder to switch to Motion
Picture Recording Mode. (
l 22)
2 Press the recording start/stop button
to start recording.
A Recording button icon
B When you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.
When you press the recording start/stop button, the REC icon/PAUSE icon is displayed large on
the screen. These disappear if you touch the screen or do not perform a touch operation for about
2 seconds.
3 Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.
Recording can also be started/stopped by touching the recording button icon.
Screen indications in the Motion Picture Recording Mode
Screen display will disappear when no touch operation is performed for a specific period of time.
To display it again, touch the screen. (l 42)
It will be constantly displayed when the remaining recordable time becomes less than 30 minutes.
Basic
Recording motion pictures
(When starting recording) (When pausing recording)
C REC icon D PAUSE icon
Recording mode
R1h20m
Approximate remaining recordable time
When the remaining time is less than
1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.
0h00m00s
Recording time elapsed
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for
minute and “s” for second.
Each time the unit is put into recording
pause, the counter display will be
reset to 0h00m00s.
T
W
REC
PAUSE
0h00m00s
0h00m00s
0h00m00s
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
R 1h20m
ヮヱフ
ビヒプパ
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 33 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 34 -
If the recording/playback button is pressed during motion picture recording, the recording
will stop and this unit will be switched to Playback Mode.
To change the recording format, change the [REC FORMAT] or [REC MODE]. (l 102, 103)
Still pictures can be recorded while recording the motion picture. (l 36)
The images recorded between pressing the recording start/stop button to start recording and
pressing it again to pause recording become one scene.
If the file size or recording time of a scene recorded with [REC FORMAT] set to [4K MP4]
*1
, [MP4]
or [24p] exceeds any of the values below, the scene will be divided automatically. (Recording will
continue.)
j When using an SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card: Approximately 4 GB or 30 minutes
j When using the built-in memory
*2
/an SDXC Memory Card:
Varies depending on the setting of [REC FORMAT] and [REC MODE].
While recording is in progress, the recording will not stop even if the LCD monitor or viewfinder is
closed.
(For the series/ series)
When connecting or disconnecting the connector of an external microphone or audio device to
the MIC/LINE IN terminal, do so while paused.
(For the series/ series)
Put the unit in Pause mode when connecting or disconnecting an external microphone with the
MIC terminal.
Please refer to page 278 for details about approximate recordable time.
The maximum remaining recordable time that can be displayed for motion picture recording is
99 hours and 59 minutes. Any remaining recordable time exceeding 99 hours and 59 minutes will
be displayed as “R99h59m+”. This display remains unchanged until the remaining recordable
time drops to 99 hours and 59 minutes or less.
The REC icon/PAUSE icon is not displayed if [REC/PAUSE ALERT] is set to [OFF]. (l 46)
Recording format Recording mode File size and recording time
[4K MP4]
*1
[2160] Approx. 3 h
[MP4]
[1080/50M] Approx. 3 h
Other than
[1080/50M]
Approx. 4 GB or 30 min
[24p] All Approx. 3 h
(Maximum recordable scenes of a single SD card or built-in memory
*2
)
Recording format [AVCHD] [4K MP4]
*1
/[MP4]/[24p]
Recordable scenes Approx. 3900 Approx. 89100
Different dates (l 125) Approx. 900 Approx. 900
When the SD card or built-in memory
*2
contains 4K MP4 scenes
*1
, MP4 scenes, 24p scenes and
still pictures, the maximum number of recordable scenes and the maximum number of different
dates will be smaller than indicated in the table above.
*1 For the series/ series/ series
*2 only
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 34 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 35 -
1 Open the LCD monitor or extend the
viewfinder to switch to Still Picture
Recording Mode. (
l 22)
2 Press the button halfway. (For
Auto Focus only)
Focus indication:
3 Press the button fully.
If you set the Optical Image Stabilizer function (l 91) to ([MODE1]), then the Image
Stabilizer function will be more effective. ( (MEGA Optical Image Stabilizer) will be
displayed when the button is pressed halfway.)
Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the shutter
speed becomes slow.
You can also take a picture just by touching the subject to focus. (Touch Shutter: l 93)
The focus indication and the focus area may not be displayed depending on the recording
conditions or the menu settings.
To set the desired Fn button as the Photoshot button
( series/ series)
You can also change the [FN BUTTON SETTING] so you can use the desired Fn button as a
Photoshot button. (l 115)
The function where Auto Focus works when the Photoshot button is pressed halfway in step 2 is
enabled when [ ] is set in the [Fn3] (Fn3 button).
Basic
Recording still pictures
A Focus indication:
± (The white lamp flashes.): Focusing
¥ (The green lamp lights up.): When in focus
No mark: When focusing is unsuccessful.
B Focus area (area inside brackets)
: [SETUP] # [FN BUTTON SETTING] # [Fn1] to [Fn4] # [ ]
MEGA
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 35 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 36 -
About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording Mode
About the focusing area
When there is a contrasting object ahead or behind the subject in the focus area, the subject may
not be focused. If so, move the contrasting object out of the focus area.
Recording still pictures in Motion Picture Recording
Mode
¬ Set this unit to Motion Picture Recording Mode (l 22)
Press the button fully (press to the bottom) to take the picture.
In the following situations, you can record still pictures even while recording a
motion picture (Simultaneous recording):
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD] or [MP4]
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p]
While still pictures are being recorded, turns red and the remaining number of recordable
pictures is displayed.
No shutter sound is emitted when recording still pictures.
Self-timer (l 96) does not work.
When simultaneous recording is performed during motion picture recording or PRE-REC is in
progress, image quality is different from ordinary still pictures so that motion picture recording
takes preference over still picture recording.
(For the series/ series/ series)
In the following situations, you cannot perform simultaneous recording during motion picture
recording or still picture recording during PRE-REC:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [2160/24p]
j When the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode
If simultaneous recording is performed during motion picture recording, the remaining recordable
time will be shortened. If this unit is turned off or the recording/playback button is pressed, the
remaining recordable time may be lengthened.
The still picture recording time may be long depending on the picture size.
Still picture operation indicator (l 261)
Screen display will disappear when no
touch operation is performed for a
specific period of time. To display it
again, touch the screen.
It will be constantly displayed when the
remaining number of still pictures that
can be recorded becomes 200 or less.
R3000
Remaining number of still pictures
Flashes in red when [0] appears.
Size of still pictures (l 113)
MEGA Optical Image Stabilizer (l 35)
Optical Image Stabilizer (l 91)
MEGA
R3000
R3000
R3000
25.9M
25.9M
MEGA
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 36 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 37 -
Maximum number of recordable pictures that can be displayed is 9999. If the number of
recordable pictures exceeds 9999, R 9999+ is displayed. The number will not change when the
picture is taken until the number of recordable pictures is 9999 or less.
The recording time may be long depending on the recording condition.
Registering your favourite scenes while recording
4K motion picture [WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/[VX1] series
Setting [REC FORMAT] to [4K MP4] or switching the Recording Mode to 4K Photo allows you to
register the part for which you press the photoshot button as a favourite scene.
After registering your favourite scenes, you can create still pictures of them by following the steps
described in “Tagging Favorite Scene” in Playback Mode. (l 145)
Set [REC FORMAT] to [4K MP4], or set the Recording Mode to 4K Photo. (l 64, 102)
Press the photoshot button fully (all the way down) while recording motion
picture.
The part will be registered as a favourite scene, and the favourite scene icon A and the
remaining number of favourite scenes B will be displayed.
The remaining number of favourite scenes flashes in red when it reaches 0.
Between the time you start recording a motion picture and the time you stop recording it, up to
10 scenes can be registered.
It takes approximately 4 seconds to register a favourite scene.
You cannot register favourite scenes in the following situations:
j During PRE-REC
j During Fade operation
j While the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is in automatic operation ([Party Scene]/[Moving Object]/
[Preset Positions])
Registered scenes are not recognised as favourite scenes for [FAVOURITE SCENE SETUP] of
Highlight Playback. (l 136)
9
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 37 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 38 -
1 Set this unit to Playback Mode. (l 21)
2 Touch the media selection icon A to select the
media you want to play. (
l 26)
(For the //////)
Proceed to step 3 if a USB HDD is not connected.
*1 only
*2 Only displayed when a USB HDD is connected. (l 169)
3 Touch the motion picture/still picture tab B.
If there are recorded scenes/still pictures, the letters and icons on the motion picture/still picture
tabs are displayed in green.
The following icons are displayed on thumbnails when [MP4] is touched:
The following icons are displayed on thumbnails when [AVCHD] is touched:
Basic
Motion picture/Still picture playback
[Built-inMemory]
*1
/[SD CARD]/[HDD]
*2
[MP4]: 4K MP4
*3
and MP4 scenes are displayed as thumbnails.
[AVCHD]: AVCHD scenes and scenes recorded with the Backup for Twin Camera function
are displayed as thumbnails.
[24p]: 2160/24p
*3
and 1080/24p scenes are displayed as thumbnails.
[]: Still pictures are displayed as thumbnails.
*3 For the series/ series/ series
j MP4 [2160/25p] scene: (For the series/ series/ series)
j MP4 [1080/50p] scene: (Blue) (Recording mode [1080/50M])
(Recording mode [1080/28M])
j MP4 [1080/25p] scene:
j MP4 [720/25p] scene:
j MP4 [360/25p] scene:
j AVCHD [1080/50p] scene:
j AVCHD [PH] scene:
j AVCHD [HA] scene:
j AVCHD [HG] scene:
j AVCHD [HE] scene:
j Scenes recorded with the
Backup for Twin Camera
function:
ALL
VXF1
VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
50p
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 38 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 39 -
The following icons are displayed on thumbnails when [24p] is touched:
4 Touch the scene or the still picture to be played back.
To display the next (previous) page:
j Slide the thumbnail display upward (downward) while touching it.
j Switch the Touch Menu, and then touch (up) / (down) on the thumbnail scroll
lever.
* When touched two times, the fast rewind/fast forward speed increases. (The screen display
changes to / .)
Change the thumbnail display
While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the following
order if the zoom lever is operated to side or side.
6 scenes () 1 scene () Time Frame Index
*
(l 122)
* Time Frame Index can only set in Motion Picture Playback Mode.
If you set this unit to Recording Mode or Playback Mode by pressing the
recording/playback button, you will return to the 6 scenes display.
The recording date is displayed under the thumbnail during 6 scenes display.
By displaying in 1 scene or touching and holding the thumbnail in the 6 scenes display, recording
date and time are displayed when playing back motion pictures, and recording date and file
number when playing back still pictures.
j MP4 [2160/24p] scene: (For the series/ series/ series)
j MP4 [1080/24p] scene:
5 Select the playback operation by touching the
operation icon.
Operation icons and screen display will disappear when no
touch operation is performed for a specific period of time.
To display them again, touch the screen.
Operation icon
Motion picture playback Still picture playback
1/;: Playback/Pause
6: Fast rewind playback*
5: Fast forward playback*
: Stops the playback and shows the
thumbnails.
1/;: Slide show (playback of the still
pictures in numerical order) start/
pause.
2;: Plays back the previous picture.
;1: Plays back the next picture.
: Stops the playback and shows the
thumbnails.
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
0h01m30s0h01m30s0h01m30s
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 39 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 40 -
Speaker/Headphone volume
adjustment
Operate the volume lever to adjust the speaker/
headphone volume during Motion Picture
Playback Mode.
You can also select the media for playback through menu settings.
[VIDEO SETUP] or [PHOTO SETUP]
#
[PLAY MEDIA SELECT] (l 41)
Sound will be heard only during normal playback.
If pause play is continued for approx. 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.
The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s each scene.
The elapsed playback time is not displayed for scenes recorded in the following recording modes:
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Slow & Quick Video Mode and Dolly Zoom Mode
(For the series/ series/ series)
The screen may turn black for an instant when changing scenes during motion picture playback.
(For the series)
When played back with [MP4] or [AVCHD] selected, the screen may become black momentarily
at the time the scene switches.
The unit will restart if you switch to a different motion picture/still picture tab as below.
j Switching from [24p]
*1
to [MP4] or [AVCHD]
j Switching from [MP4] or [AVCHD] to [24p]
*2
*1 Including when you switched from [24p] to (still picture) first.
*2 Including when you switched from [MP4] or [AVCHD] to (still picture) first.
Towards r”: Increases the volume
Towards s”: Decreases the volume
Motion picture compatibility
This unit is based on AVCHD Progressive/AVCHD format/MPEG-4 AVC file format.
Motion pictures recorded with the unit may not be played back correctly or at all on another
device, even if it supports their format. (Check the operating instructions of your device for
compatibility.)
Motion pictures recorded with other devices are not supported by this unit.
Still picture compatibility
This unit is compliant with the unified standard DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).
This unit may degrade or not play back still pictures recorded or created on other products
and other products may degrade or not play back still pictures recorded on this unit.
Depending on the playback device, still pictures may be played back with picture sizes
different from the ones with which they were recorded.
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
VXF1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 40 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 41 -
Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to display . (l 26)
1 Touch .
2 Touch the top menu A.
3 Touch the submenu B.
Next (previous) page is displayed by touching
/.
4 Touch the desired item to enter the
setting.
5 Touch [EXIT] to exit the menu
setting.
About guide display
After touching , touching the submenus
and items will cause function descriptions and
settings confirmation messages to appear.
After the messages have been displayed, the
guide display is cancelled.
Basic
Using the menu screen
MENU
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 41 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 42 -
Please refer to page 115.
Set the display method for the screen information display.
Please refer to page 28.
It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home region
and the travel destination.
1 Select the menu.
When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Touch [ENTER] and
proceed to Step 3.
2 (Only when setting your home region)
Touch [HOME].
Touch [ENTER].
Basic
Using the Setup Menu
series/ series
[FN BUTTON SETTING]
[DISPLAY]
: [SETUP] # [DISPLAY] # desired setting
[5 SEC.]: Information is displayed on the screen for 5 seconds after starting the
Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode, starting
to playback, or touching the screen.
[ON]: Constantly displayed.
[CLOCK SET]
[SET WORLD TIME]
: [SETUP] # [SET WORLD TIME]
3 (Only when setting your home region)
Touch / to select your home region
and touch [ENTER].
Touch [SUMMER TIME SET] to set daylight saving time.
is displayed and the summer time setting is
turned on, the time difference between the current time
and GMT will be set forward by 1 hour. Touch [SUMMER
TIME SET] again to return to the normal time setting.
If you set [Link Clock to Summertime] to [ON], the current
time will also be set forward by 1 hour. (l 43)
A The current time
B The time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time)
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 42 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 43 -
4 (Only when setting the region of your travel destination)
Touch [DESTINATION].
Touch [ENTER].
When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel destination
appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has already been set
once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.
To return the display to the home setting
Set the home region using Steps 1 to 3, and close the setting by touching [EXIT].
If you cannot find your travel destination in the area shown on the screen, set it by using the time
difference from your home region.
If you set this function to [ON] and turn on the summer time setting in [SET WORLD TIME], the
following times will be set forward by 1 hour:
j When setting your home region: The current time
j When setting the region of your travel destination: The time at the travel destination
5 (Only when setting the region of your travel
destination)
Touch / to select your travel
destination and touch [ENTER].
Touch [SUMMER TIME SET] to set daylight saving time.
is displayed and the summer time setting is
turned on, the time difference between the travel
destination and the home region will be set forward by 1
hour. Touch [SUMMER TIME SET] again to return to the
normal time setting.
If you set [Link Clock to Summertime] to [ON], the time at
the travel destination will also be set forward by 1 hour.
Close the setting by touching [EXIT]. appears and
the time of the travel destination is indicated.
C The local time at the selected
travel destination
D The time difference between
the travel destination and the
home region
[Link Clock to Summertime]
: [SETUP] # [Link Clock to Summertime] # desired display
[ON]: The times are adjusted when the summer time setting is turned on.
[OFF]: The times are not adjusted when the summer time setting is turned on.
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 43 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 44 -
It is possible to change the date and time display mode.
The date and time are not displayed while the recording mode switching icon is displayed. (l 22)
When the Touch Shutter is enabled, the recording mode switching icon is constantly displayed.
This causes the date and time to disappear from the screen.
It is possible to change the date format.
You can set the display method of the zoom button icons ( / ) and recording button icon
().
Please refer to page 93.
Please refer to page 161.
[DATE/TIME]
: [SETUP] # [DATE/TIME] # desired display
[DATE]/[D/T]/[OFF]
[DATE FORMAT]
: [SETUP] # [DATE FORMAT] # desired setting
[Y/M/D]/[M/D/Y]/[D/M/Y]
[ZOOM/REC DISPLAY]
: [SETUP] # [ZOOM/REC DISPLAY] # desired setting
[ON]: Constantly displayed.
[OFF]: Icons will disappear after approx. 5 seconds without any touch operation.
[O.I.S. LOCK DISPLAY]
[EXT. DISPLAY]
MENU
MENU
T
W
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 44 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 45 -
When about 5 minutes have passed without any operation, this unit automatically turns off to save
battery life.
This unit will not automatically turn off even if [ECONOMY (BATT)] is set to [ON] in following
cases:
j Using the AC adaptor
*
j Using the USB cable for PC etc.
j PRE-REC is used
j During slide show playback
j Using the Wi-Fi function
* When [ECONOMY (AC)] is activated, this unit automatically turns off.
When about 15 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor with this
unit, this unit automatically turns off.
This unit will not automatically turn off even if [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in following cases:
j Using the USB cable for PC etc.
j PRE-REC is used
j During slide show playback
j Using the Wi-Fi function
The unit is put into recording pause approx. 1.6 seconds when the unit is turned on.
Depending on the recording conditions, start time may be longer than 1.6 seconds.
In the Quick Power On Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.
[ECONOMY (BATT)]
: [SETUP] # [ECONOMY (BATT)] # [ON]
[ECONOMY (AC)]
: [SETUP] # [ECONOMY (AC)] # [ON]
[QUICK POWER ON]
: [SETUP] # [QUICK POWER ON] # [ON]
MENU
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 45 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 46 -
Touch screen operation, starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this
sound.
When [OFF] is selected, the sound is not output at the start/end of recording, etc.
2 Beeps for 4 times
When an error occurs, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. (l 265)
Refer to page 114 when changing the shutter sound setting.
When this is set to [ON], the REC icon/PAUSE icon (l 33) is displayed when recording is started or
paused.
You can change the operation icons (l 94) to display in the Touch Menu.
Register 3 favourite operation icons.
The default settings are as follows:
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch the operation icon you would like to change to cancel the setting.
3 Touch the operation icon to be set.
Name of the function is displayed by touching and holding on the operation icon.
To cancel, touch the operation icon again.
4 Touch [ENTER].
[ALERT SOUND]
: [SETUP] # [ALERT SOUND] # desired setting
(Volume low)/ (Volume high)/[OFF]
[REC/PAUSE ALERT]
: [SETUP] # [REC/PAUSE ALERT] # [ON]
[SELECT OPERATION ICONS]
Motion Picture Recording Mode Still Picture Recording Mode
series/
series
(PRE-REC)
(Night Mode)
(Level Shot Function)
(Self-timer)
(Intelligent Exposure)
(Backlight Compensation)
series/
series
(Fade)
(PRE-REC)
(Level Shot Function)
: [SETUP] # [SELECT OPERATION ICONS]
MENU
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 46 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 47 -
This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.
These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.
Recordable time with the battery is shortened when the LCD monitor is made brighter.
It adjusts brightness and colour density on the LCD monitor.
These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch / to adjust settings.
3 Touch [ENTER].
Touch [EXIT] to exit the menu screen.
It adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder.
These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.
Select the menu.
These can be set with the LCD monitor. Close the LCD monitor and extend the viewfinder after
setting, and confirm the brightness by turning on the viewfinder.
Please refer to page 162.
Please refer to page 164.
[POWER LCD]
: [SETUP] # [POWER LCD] # desired setting
(Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)
[LCD SET]
: [SETUP] # [LCD SET] # desired setting
[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor
[COLOUR]: Colour level of the LCD monitor
series/ series
[EVF SET]
: [SETUP] # [EVF SET] # desired setting
[BRIGHT]/[NORMAL]/[DARK]
[HDMI RESOLUTION]
[VIERA Link]
MENU
+1
0
-
1
+1
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 47 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 48 -
Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.
Settings for [MEDIA SELECT]
*
, [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.
* For users who have / / / / / / , this menu is not
displayed.
If you restore the default settings, this unit will switch to the Motion Picture Recording Mode.
(In Recording Mode)
When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p], executing [INITIAL SET] will restart this unit.
(In Playback Mode)
When the motion picture/still picture tab is set to [24p]
*1
, performing [INITIAL SET] will restart the
unit.
*1 Including when you switched from [24p] to (still picture) first.
Set to [YES] for changing the Wi-Fi settings back to the default condition.
The “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Wi-Fi Password are also deleted.
Information on wireless access points, smartphones, and Wireless Sub Cameras registered to
this unit is also deleted.
You can delete the music (l 134, 141, 147) stored on this unit as [USER BGM].
The entered character is confirmed in approx. 1 second after character input, and the cursor is
moved to the right.
It makes the input easy without moving the cursor when characters on the same key are to be
entered again.
Character input screen is displayed in following conditions:
j When setting [TITLE SETUP] for the Highlight Playback (l 137)
j When entering a name in the Baby Calendar (l 143)
j When you configure the Wi-Fi function (l 201, 213, 222, 223, 224)
[INITIAL SET]
: [SETUP] # [INITIAL SET]
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]
: [SETUP] # [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]
[DELETE USER BGM]
: [SETUP] # [DELETE USER BGM]
[Auto Cursor Position]
: [SETUP] # [Auto Cursor Position] # [ON]
MENU
WXF1 VXF1 VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
MENU
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 48 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 49 -
Please refer to page 52.
Set the file number of the next 4K MP4 scene
*1
, MP4 scene, 24p scene and still picture to be
recorded to 0001.
Folder number is updated and file number will start from 0001. (l 258)
To reset the folder number, format the SD card and built-in memory
*2
, and then perform
[NUMBER RESET].
*1 For the series/ series/ series
*2 only
The file numbers of still pictures you record in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode are not reset.
Please be aware that if a medium is formatted, then all the data recorded on the medium will be
erased and cannot be restored. Back up important data on a PC, DVD disc etc. (l 249)
*1 only
*2 Displayed when connecting a USB HDD. (l 171)
(For the //////)
Media selection screen is not displayed when the USB HDD is not connected. Touch [YES].
When formatting is complete, touch [EXIT] to exit the message screen.
Perform a physical formatting of the SD card when the SD card is to be disposed/ transferred.
(l 275)
(For the )
Perform a physical formatting of the built-in memory when this unit is to be disposed/ transferred.
(l 274)
Do not turn this unit off or remove the SD card, while formatting. Do not expose the unit to
vibrations or shock.
series/ series
[ZOOM RING SET]
[NUMBER RESET]
: [SETUP] # [NUMBER RESET]
[FORMAT MEDIA]
: [SETUP] # [FORMAT MEDIA] # desired media
[Built-inMemory]
*1
/[SD CARD]/[HDD]
*2
Use this unit to format media.
Formatting built-in memory is only available with this unit.
Do not format an SD card using any other equipment such as a PC. The card may not be
used on this unit.
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1M
MENU
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 49 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 50 -
The used space and remaining recordable time of the SD card and built-in memory can be checked.
(For the )
Touching [CHANGE MEDIA] switches the unit between the display for the SD card and the
display for the built-in memory.
The remaining recordable time in the currently set Recording Mode is displayed only in the
Motion Picture Recording Mode.
Any remaining recordable time exceeding 99 hours and 59 minutes will be displayed as
“99h59m+”.
Touch [EXIT] to close the indication.
The SD card or built-in memory requires some space to store information and manage system
files, so the actual usable space is slightly less than the indicated value. The usable SD card/built-
in memory space is generally calculated as 1 GB=1,000,000,000 bytes. The capacities of this
unit, PCs and software are expressed as 1 GB=1,024k1,024k1,024=1,073,741,824 bytes.
Therefore, the indicated value of the capacity appears to be smaller.
The model number and the firmware version of the unit are displayed.
You can update the firmware version of this unit.
This item is displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted.
Please refer to page 177.
This item is displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted.
Please refer to page 178.
[MEDIA STATUS]
: [SETUP] # [MEDIA STATUS]
[Version Disp.]
: [SETUP] # [Version Disp.]
[Version Up]
: [SETUP] # [Version Up]
For the latest update information, check the support website below. (As of January 2018)
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This Site is English only)
[Eye-Fi TRANSFER]
[Eye-Fi DIRECT]
MENU
WXF1M
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 50 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 51 -
You can connect this unit and a PC with the USB cable and check software information (License) on
the PC.
1 Select the menu.
2 Connect this unit to a PC.
A message will be displayed when the connection is complete. On the PC, confirm
[LICENSE.TXT].
When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn
the LCD monitor on.
Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any
other USB cables.)
You can check how to access the website where you can download the Operating Instructions (PDF
format).
You can select the language on the screen display and the menu screen.
[SOFTWARE INFO]
: [SETUP] # [SOFTWARE INFO]
[ONLINE MANUAL]
: [SETUP] # [ONLINE MANUAL] # desired access method
[URL display]: Displays the URL of the website on the LCD monitor of this unit.
[USB connect]: Displays the website on a PC connected to this unit with the USB
cable.
[QR code]: Displays the QR code of the website on the LCD monitor of this unit.
[LANGUAGE]
: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE] # desired language
MENU
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 51 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 52 -
A Zoom bar
Maximum zoom ratio for recording motion pictures can be set with [ZOOM MODE]. (l 101)
Zoom operations with the Manual ring ( series/ series)
You can also perform zoom operations by rotating the Manual ring.
In Manual Mode, change the Manual ring setting to [ZOOM]. (l 80)
You can set the desired zoom direction in [ZOOM RING SET] in the Setup menu.
This function’s default setting is [ T].
About the zoom bar
The zoom bar is displayed during the zoom operation.
About the zoom speed
The zoom speed varies depending on the range over which the zoom lever is moved.
The zoom operation using the zoom button icons will be performed at a constant speed
respectively.
Advanced (Recording)
Using the zoom
Zoom lever/Zoom button icons
T side:
Close-up recording (zoom in)
W side:
Wide-angle recording (zoom out)
T
W
6
W
T
6
W
T
T
W
[ZOOM RING SET]
Direction manual ring is
rotated
[T] [T]
A
side
Wide-angle recording
(zoom out)
Close-up recording
(zoom in)
B
side
Close-up recording
(zoom in)
Wide-angle recording
(zoom out)
B Optical Zoom
C Motion Picture Recording Mode: i.Zoom/Digital zoom (Blue)
Still Picture Recording Mode: Extra Optical Zoom (Blue)
WXF1
VXF1
A
B

T
W
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 52 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 53 -
Zoom ratio during the Still Picture Recording Mode
The zoom ratio can be expanded up to 60k without degrading the picture quality for the Still Picture
Recording Mode. (Extra Optical Zoom)
Maximum zoom ratio in Still Picture Recording Mode varies depending on the setting of
[PICTURE SIZE] and [ASPECT RATIO]. (l 113, 114)
If you take your finger off the zoom lever during zoom operation, the operation sound may be
recorded. When returning the zoom lever to the original position, move it quietly.
When the zoom magnification is at its maximum, the subjects are focused at about 1.2 m or more.
When the zoom magnification is 1k, this unit can focus on a subject approx. 10 cm away from the
lens.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 53 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 54 -
You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example,
the contrast between the background and the subject is large.
This unit will be set to Intelligent Auto Mode if you turn it off and on.
This function is not available in the following cases:
j During motion picture recording
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]
*
or [24p].
j When the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode
*
j When the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function is in use
* For the series/ series/ series
[REC MODE] is set to [1080/28M] in the following cases:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [MP4] and [REC MODE] is set to [720]
The following settings are cancelled:
You cannot record still pictures.
The shutter speed and brightness (iris/gain) are adjusted automatically. If you set them manually
in advance, the settings will not be maintained.
Depending on recording conditions, the screen may flicker or you may see horizontal bars in the
image.
If you record a moving subject or move this unit quickly while recording, the image may be
distorted.
To set the desired Fn button as the HDR button
( series/ series)
You can also change the [FN BUTTON SETTING] so you can use the desired Fn button as an HDR
button. (l 115)
Advanced (Recording)
HDR Movie Mode
HDR button
You can switch from Recording mode to HDR Movie
Mode by pressing this button.
Press it once more to switch from HDR Movie Mode to
Intelligent Auto Mode.
It is also possible to switch to HDR Movie Mode by
touching the Recording Mode button icon. (l 64)
j [FACE FRAMING]
j Auto Slow Shutter
j Backlight Compensation
j Intelligent Contrast Control
j Night Mode
j Digital Cinema Colour
j [PICTURE ADJUST]
j [HYBRID O.I.S.]
j [ACTIVE CONTRAST]
(For the series/ series)
j [CUSTOM AF]
(For the series)
j Twin Camera
: [SETUP] # [FN BUTTON SETTING] # [Fn1] to [Fn4] # [ ]
ラュン
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1
WXF1 VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 54 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 55 -
To change the level of image contrast correction
[HDR EFFECT] allows you to change the contrast correction level in HDR Movie Mode.
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch [ENTER].
Touch [EXIT] to complete the settings.
You can also change this setting by touching its operation icon. (l 94)
You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
: [RECORD SETUP] # [HDR EFFECT] # desired setting
: Sets the correction level to high.
: Sets the correction level to low.
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 55 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 56 -
Using the Sub Camera and the Main Camera, you can record two
images simultaneously. (Twin Camera)
Use the Sub Camera to enjoy recording yourself, a family member
next to you or scenery different from that seen from the Main
Camera.
A Sub Camera
B Sub Window
The image of the Sub Camera is displayed on the Sub Window.
1 Rotate the Sub Camera.
When you rotate the Sub camera from a position in the
range C (0e to approximately 30e) to a position in the
range D (approximately 30e to 270e), the Sub Window is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
If the Sub Window does not appear, touch to
display it.
When the Sub Camera is in use, you cannot start up the
Wireless Twin Camera function with (startup icon
for Wireless Twin Camera/disconnect icon for Wireless
Twin/Multi-Camera).
Advanced (Recording)
Recording with the Sub Camera
(Twin Camera)
[WXF1] series
Recording a family
member next to you
Recording scenery Recording yourself
Recording only with the Sub Camera is not possible.
An image recorded with the Main Camera and the Sub Camera’s image displayed on the
Sub Window are recorded as a single scene or still picture. When you play back such a
scene or still picture, it is not possible to delete only the Sub Window image or hide it.
The minimum focus distance of the Sub Camera is approximately 30cm.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 56 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 57 -
2 Rotate the Sub Camera dial to adjust its up/
down angle.
You can adjust the angle up or down to approximately 20e
from the position F.
E Sub Camera dial
3 Start recording.
Rotate the Sub Camera to the desired position.
The Sub Camera works in Auto Focus, which adjusts
focus automatically.
Normally, hold this unit as shown in the illustration
when recording.
Rotating the Sub Camera dial to the left :
The Sub Camera points down.
Rotating the Sub Camera dial to the right :
The Sub Camera points up.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 57 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 58 -
Displaying or hiding the Sub Window
Touch .
Each time you touch the icon, you can display or hide the
Sub Window.
When the Sub Window is hidden, the image of the Sub
Camera will not be recorded.
To exit the Twin Camera function
Rotate the Sub Camera to a position in the range
C
(0e to approximately 30e).
It takes some time until the Sub Window appears.
If the Sub Window does not appear, touch or return the Sub Camera to a position in the
range C (0e to approximately 30e) and then rotate it to a position in the range D (approximately
30e to 270e).
The Sub Camera is turned on as long as is displayed.
Depending on recording conditions, the colour balance, brightness and other settings may differ
between the Main Camera and the Sub Camera.
The following button icons may not be displayed when the Sub Window is displayed. To display
them, touch the Main Camera’s image on the screen.
j (Touch Menu)
j / (Zoom button icons)
j (Recording button icon)
j Recording Mode button icon (l 64)
The following functions do not work when the Sub Window is displayed:
j Recording format [24p]
j Touch Shutter
j Creative Control Mode
j [FACE FRAMING]
j AF/AE tracking
j Optical Image Stabilizer Lock
j Night Mode ([Infrared])
j Cinema Like Effect Mode
Recording menu items, operation icons, and functions such as Image Stabilizer, Level Shot
Function and [QUICK POWER ON] work only for the Main Camera. For information on the
settings for the Sub Camera, refer to page 59.
When you record still pictures by using the Twin Camera function, it may take longer than usual to
achieve focus. (l 35)
The Sub Camera does not work when you are using the following functions:
j HDR Movie Mode
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
j Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode
When the LCD monitor is either closed or closed with the screen facing outward, the Sub Camera
does not work. The Sub Window will be displayed if you open the LCD monitor again.
The Fade function’s image effects do not affect the Sub Window.
T
W
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 58 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 59 -
Changing and adjusting the settings of the Sub
Camera and the Sub Window
1 Touch Sub Window.
2 Touch to select the size you want to use.
If you do not touch the Sub Window or perform any touch operation for a while, the Sub Window
size will change.
The available sub window sizes differ as shown below.
j In Motion Picture Recording Mode or when [ASPECT RATIO] in Still Picture Recording Mode is
set to [16:9]
j When [ASPECT RATIO] in Still Picture Recording Mode is set to [4:3]
With the normal (1k) display setting, the zoom icon is displayed; with the 2k display setting,
the zoom icon is displayed.
The Sub Window cannot be zoomed in/out when [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4] or this unit is
in 4K Photo Mode.
Changing the size of the Sub Window
Aspect ratio 16:9 1:1 16:9
Size
Aspect ratio 4:3 1:1
Size
Zooming in/out the Sub Window
1 Touch the Sub Window.
The zoom icon will be displayed for approximately
2 seconds
*
.
* It will be displayed for approximately 3 seconds when the
Wireless Multi-Camera function is enabled. (l 244)
2 Touch the Zoom icon.
Each touch of the Sub Window switches the magnification
level between the normal display (1k) and 2k display
setting.
Zoom icon
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 59 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 60 -
1 Touch Sub Window.
2 Touch the display position you want to change.
Depending on the display position of the Sub Window, the
positions of the icons displayed on the screen may change.
1 Touch Sub Window.
2 Touch .
3 Touch the icon you want to set or adjust.
*1 This icon is displayed only in Motion Picture Recording Mode.
*2 This cannot be set when you have connected an external microphone or audio device.
4 (When [WB] is touched)
Touch / to select White Balance Mode.
(When is touched)
Touch / to adjust settings.
(When [FOCUS] is touched)
Touch [AF] or [AFS].
The centre of the Sub Window will be focused.
If you select [AFS], will be constantly displayed on the recording screen.
Changing the display position of the Sub Window
Setting and adjusting the Sub Camera and the Sub Window
[WB] : Adjusts the colour balance.
: Adjusts the brightness.
[FOCUS]
*1
: Adjusts the focus.
*1, 2
: Allows you to enable Narration Mode.
Rejects ambient sound, allowing your voice to be recorded clearly.
: Changes the colour of the Sub Window frame.
(Automatic White Balance adjustment)/ (Sunny mode)/ (Cloudy mode)/
(Indoor mode 1)/ (Indoor mode 2)
[AF] (Auto Focus): Auto Focus works continuously.
[AFS] (Auto Focus Single): Auto Focus works each time you touch [AFS].
FOCUS
AWB
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 60 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 61 -
(When is touched)
Touch or .
(When is touched)
Touch the desired frame.
When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4] or this unit is in 4K Photo Mode, no frame is displayed
and the frame setting cannot be changed.
If you set the Recording Mode to Intelligent Auto Mode/Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the following
settings will be used:
j [WB] : (Auto)
j : The value will be set to [0].
j [FOCUS] : AF (Auto Focus)
: Enables Narration Mode.
A [Narration Mode]
B [ON]
C [OFF]
: Disables Narration Mode.
Touching the screen returns you to the recording screen.
When Narration Mode is enabled, its icon will be
constantly displayed on the screen.
You can enable or disable Narration Mode by touching
on the recording screen.
In Narration Mode, the settings for [5.1ch/2ch] and [MIC
SETUP] are set as follows and cannot be changed:
j [SURROUND] in [MIC SETUP], if [5.1ch/2ch] is set to
[5.1ch]
j [STEREO MIC] in [MIC SETUP], if [5.1ch/2ch] is set to
[2ch]
[Sound Scene Select] is not available in Narration Mode.
If you hide the Sub Window, Narration Mode will not work.
1 : Pink
D [FRAMING]
2 : Green
3 : Orange
4 : Grey
5 : Drop shadow
*
6 : No frame
* This adds a drop shadow on the right and bottom sides.
AWB
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 61 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 62 -
When simultaneously recording two images with the Main Camera and Sub Camera, you can also
record the Main Camera’s image as a separate scene. (Backup for Twin Camera)
Even when using the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function, you can save the image being
recorded with the Main Camera as a separate scene. (l 226)
Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD] and [REC MODE] to [PH]/[HA]/[HG]/[HE]. (l 102, 103)
will be displayed on the screen.
When Twin Camera recording starts, this unit also starts recording the Main Camera’s image
without the Sub Window image as a separate scene.
To play back a scene recorded with the Backup for Twin Camera function, touch [AVCHD] in the
motion picture/still picture tab on a Playback Mode thumbnail screen, and select a thumbnail
indicated with . (l 38)
When recording with [Backup for Twin Camera], use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of
the SD Speed Class Rating.
Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera and scenes that show the Sub Window’s image will
be saved on the same media. This causes the remaining recordable time to be halved.
When [ON] is selected, two separate dates are used to record scenes simultaneously. As a result,
compared to when [OFF] is selected, recording can be performed on fewer days.
Backup for Twin Camera operates when it is set to [ON], even if you hide the Sub Window.
You cannot record still pictures while recording with the Backup for Twin Camera function.
(For the )
[RELAY SCENE COMBINE] is not available for scenes that were relay-recorded while Backup for
Twin Camera was in operation.
Advanced (Recording)
Recording with the Backup for Twin
Camera Function
A Twin Camera
B Backup for Twin Camera
C (For the //////)
SD card
(For the )
SD card or Built-in Memory
: [RECORD SETUP] # [Backup for Twin Camera] # [ON]
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
MENU
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 62 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 63 -
Backup for Twin Camera is not available when any of the following functions is being used:
j Creative Control Mode
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
j HDR Movie Mode
j Home monitoring
j Live Cast Mode
(For the series/ series/ series)
j 4K Photo Mode
j Cinema Like Effect Mode
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 63 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 64 -
1 Touch the Recording Mode button icon.
2 Touch the desired Recording Mode button icon.
Advanced (Recording)
Changing the Recording Mode
series/ series/ series series
Mode Effect
*1
*2
Intelligent Auto
You can switch the mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode,
which optimises settings to the recording environment
you are in. (l 66)
*1
*2
Intelligent Auto Plus
You can add manually-adjusted brightness and colour
balance settings to the Intelligent Auto Mode, and
record. (l 68)
*1
Creative Control
You can record motion pictures with added effects.
(l 68)
*1
HDR Movie
You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas
and dark areas when, for example, the contrast
between the background and the subject is large.
(l 71)
Scene Mode
This option allows this unit to automatically adjust the
shutter speed and aperture, etc. according to the scene
you want to record. (l 72)
Manual
You can set the shutter speed, focus, White Balance,
and brightness (iris/gain). (l 80)
*1, 3
Cinema Like Effect You can record images with cinematic effects. (l 73)
*1, 4
FULL HD Slow
Motion Video
You can record slow motion pictures. (l 78)
*1, 3
4K Photo
You can record motion pictures optimised for capturing
still pictures from 4K motion pictures. (l 78)
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
MNL
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 64 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 65 -
*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only
*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only
*3 For the series/ series/ series
*4 series only
*2
Stop Motion
Animation Assist
You can set a recorded still picture as the background,
and record the next picture while looking at that
recorded picture as the background. (l 79)
Mode Effect
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 65 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 66 -
Intelligent Auto
The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what you want
to record.
*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only
*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only
Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.
In the Portrait, Spotlight, or Low Light Mode, the face will be surrounded by a white frame when
detected. In the Portrait Mode, a subject that is bigger and close to centre of the screen will be
surrounded by an orange frame. (l 104)
Using a tripod is recommended in Night Scenery Mode.
Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are of
certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.
Intelligent Auto Mode
When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, the Automatic White Balance and Auto Focus operate and
automatically adjust the colour balance and focusing.
Depending on the brightness of the subject etc., the aperture and shutter speed are automatically
adjusted for an optimum brightness.
The information on this page applies only to the Main Camera.
Colour balance and focus may not be adjusted automatically depending on light sources or
scenes. If so, manually adjust these settings. (l 82, 86)
Mode Effect
Portrait
Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the brightness is
adjusted so it is recorded clearly.
Scenery
The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting out the
background sky, which may be very bright.
*1
Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.
*1
Low Light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.
*2
Night Scenery You can record night scenery vividly by slowing the shutter speed.
*2
Macro This allows recording at very close proximity to the object of recording.
*1
*2
Normal
Normal
In modes other than those described above, the contrast is adjusted to
give a clear picture.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 66 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 67 -
Automatic White Balance
The illustration shows the range over which Automatic White Balance functions.
1) The effective range of Automatic White Balance adjustment
on this unit
2) Blue sky
3) Cloudy sky (rain)
4) Sunlight
5) White fluorescent lamp
6) Halogen light bulb
7) Incandescent light bulb
8) Sunrise or sunset
9) Candlelight
If the Automatic White Balance is not functioning normally, adjust
the White Balance manually. (l 83)
Auto Focus
The unit focuses automatically.
Auto Focus does not work correctly in the following situations.
Record pictures in the Manual Focus Mode. (l 86)
j Recording distant and close-up objects at the same time
j Recording a subject behind dirty or dusty window
j Recording a subject that is surrounded by objects with glossy surfaces or by highly reflective
objects
With [CUSTOM AF], you can set the focusing behaviour of Auto Focus.
Switch to Auto Focus. (l 86)
Select the menu.
This function is not available in the following cases:
j Still Picture Recording Mode
j When using Manual Focus
This is [Normal] when using the following functions and the setting cannot be changed.
j HDR Movie Mode
j Slow & Quick Video Mode
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
series/ series
Setting the focusing behaviour of Auto Focus
: [RECORD SETUP] # [CUSTOM AF] # desired setting
[Normal]: This is the standard setting.
[Sensitive]: It is easier for focus to follow, so it is easier for focus to switch between subjects
that are at different distances. This is recommended for focusing on subjects
that move quickly.
[Stable]: As it is easier to stabilise focus, the focus remains on the subject you are aiming
at even if an obstacle passes in front or if you lose the subject. This is
recommended when you don’t want to focus on obstacles or the background.
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
10 000K
9 000K
8 000K
7 000K
6 000K
5 000K
4 000K
3 000K
2 000K
2)
1)
3)
9)
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 67 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 68 -
Intelligent Auto Plus
Please refer to page 66 for details about the effect of each mode.
(Portrait)/ (Scenery)/ (Spotlight)
*1
/ (Low Light)
*1
/
(Night Scenery)
*2
/ (Macro)
*2
/ (Normal)
*1
/ (Normal)
*2
*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only
*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only
Change the Recording Mode to / . (l 64)
1 (When adjusting the brightness)
Touch .
(When adjusting the colour balance)
Touch .
R side: Sets the balance to a reddish tone.
B side: Sets the balance to a bluish tone.
Except for when adjusting the brightness or colour balance, if you do not touch the screen for a
while, the Touch Menu will disappear. To display it again, touch .
2 Touch / to adjust settings.
Touch while adjusting the brightness, or touch while adjusting the colour balance to
make the display of the adjustment bar disappear.
3 Start recording.
Creative Control
Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l 102)
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
Select the desired Creative Control Mode, then touch [Enter].
Still pictures cannot be taken.
Mode Effect
[Miniature Effect]
You can record motion pictures with a diorama effect like recording a
miniature by intentionally creating focused area and out of focused
area in the peripheral of the image and recording motion picture with
an interval. (l 69)
Motion pictures recorded with this function will look as if the frame
rate is low.
[8mm movie] You can record motion pictures with a faded retro effect. (l 70)
[Silent movie]
You can record motion pictures that are similar to black-and-white
silent films by lowering the amount of incoming light. (l 70)
[Time Lapse Rec]
You can record a scene that moves slowly over a long period of time
as a short time motion picture by recording one frame at each set
time lapse. (l 71)
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 68 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 69 -
1 Touch to adjust the horizontal position of
the in-focus portion.
If you touch the screen, you can adjust the horizontal
position of the in-focus portion.
When no touch operations are performed for approximately
1 second, [Reset], [SIZE], and [ENTER] are displayed. If
you touch the screen, you can readjust the horizontal
position of the in-focus portion.
Position of the in-focus portion will return to original position when you touch [Reset].
2 Touch [SIZE].
The size of the in-focus portion is switched every time you touch [SIZE].
Medium size # Large size # Small size
If you touch the screen, you can adjust the horizontal position of the in-focus portion.
If you touch [Reset], the in-focus portion is reset to the original position and [SIZE] is reset to the
medium size.
3 Touch [ENTER].
4
(When adjusting the brightness)
Touch .
The level of brightness is switched every time you touch the icon.
(Standard) # (Bright) # (Dark)
5 (When adjusting the vividness)
Touch .
The level of vividness is switched every time you touch the icon.
(Standard) # (Vivid) # (Most vivid)
6 Start recording.
It will record with an interval. 1 second will be recorded for approximately every 5 seconds of
recording.
To make the Miniature Effect easier to gain, record objects incorporating a distant view or those
that can provide depth or a skewed perspective. Also, use a tripod and avoid zooming.
You may see a lot of noise in the in-focus portion when recording dark subjects such as night
scenes.
Audio cannot be recorded.
[REC MODE] is set to [HA].
The maximum recordable time is 12 hours.
Motion pictures recorded with this function will look as if the frame rate is low.
(For the )
Setting Miniature Effect will set [RELAY REC] to [OFF]. (l 104)
[Miniature Effect]
MINI
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 69 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 70 -
1 (When adjusting the brightness)
Touch .
The level of brightness is switched every time you touch the icon.
(Standard) # (Bright) # (Dark)
2 (When adjusting the colour balance)
Touch .
The level of colour balance is switched every time you touch the icon.
(Blue) # (Red) # (Yellow)
3 Start recording.
The sound is monaural.
1 (When adjusting the brightness)
Touch .
The level of brightness is switched every time you touch the icon.
(Standard) # (Bright) # (Dark)
2 Start recording.
Audio cannot be recorded.
[8mm movie]
[Silent movie]
8mm
SILN
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 70 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 71 -
Touch the desired setup time.
Touch [ENTER].
A frame is recorded with a set recording interval. 25 frames will make up a motion picture of
1 second.
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.
These times are approximations.
Maximum recordable time is 12 hours.
Audio cannot be recorded.
[REC MODE] is set to [HA].
The shortest motion picture recording time is 1 second.
The colour balance and focus may not be adjusted automatically depending on the light source or
scene. If so, manually adjust those settings. (l 82, 86)
(For the )
Setting Time Lapse Recording will set [RELAY REC] to [OFF]. (l 104)
When recording for a long time, we recommend recording with the AC adaptor connected.
HDR Movie Mode
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
You can also press the HDR button to switch to this mode. Refer to page 54 for details.
[Time Lapse Rec]
[1 SEC.]/[10 SEC.]/[30 SEC.]/[1 MINUTE]/[2 MINUTES]
Setup example
Setup time
(recording interval)
Recording time Recorded time
Sunset 1s 1h 2min20s
Blooming 30 s 3 h 14 s
INTV
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 71 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 72 -
Scene Mode
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
Select the desired Scene Mode, then touch [ENTER].
(Sports/Portrait/Soft Skin/Spotlight/Snow/Beach/Sunset/Scenery)
j The shutter speed is 1/6 or more in Still Picture Recording Mode.
(Sunset/Low Light)
j The shutter speed is 1/25 or more in Motion Picture Recording Mode. (1/24 or more when
[REC FORMAT] is set to [24p])
(Sunset/Scenery/Fireworks/Night Scenery)
j Image may get blurry when close object is recorded.
(Sports)
j During normal playback, the image movement may not look smooth.
j Colour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
j If the brightness is insufficient, the Sports Mode does not function. The display flashes.
(Portrait)
j Colour and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.
(Soft Skin)
j If the background or anything else in the scene has colours similar to the skin colour, they will
also be smoothed.
j If the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.
j If you record a person in the distance, the face may not be recorded clearly. In this case, cancel
Soft Skin Mode or zoom in on the face (close-up) to record.
(Fireworks)
j The shutter speed is 1/25. (1/30 or more when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p])
j Image may get washed out when recorded in bright surrounding.
(Night Scenery)
j The shutter speed is 1/2 or more in Still Picture Recording Mode.
j Using a tripod is recommended.
Mode Effect
5 Sports:
To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback and
pause of playback
Portrait: To make people stand out against the background
Soft Skin:
To makes skin colours appear softer for a more attractive
appearance
Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.
Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.
Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant
Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant
Scenery: For spatial scenery
Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully
Night Scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully
Low Light:
For dark scenes, such as at dusk
(In Motion Picture Recording Mode only)
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 72 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 73 -
Cinema Like Effect
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/[VX1] series
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
Select the desired Cinema Like Effect Mode, and touch [ENTER].
1 Touch [OK].
2 Start recording.
The image will be recorded in slow motion.
3 Touch and hold at the scene where you
want to switch to quick motion.
The image will be recorded in quick motion while you are
touching and holding the icon.
The image will be recorded in slow motion when you
release the finger.
You can switch to quick motion repeatedly.
When recording with Slow & Quick Video Mode, use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of
the SD Speed Class Rating.
Recordable time with the battery will be shortened with the use of Slow & Quick Video recording.
This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].
The following settings will be selected:
j [ZOOM MODE]: [Opt.Zoom 24k]
j [REC FORMAT]: [MP4]
*
j [REC MODE]: [1080/28M]
*
j [HYBRID O.I.S.]: [OFF]
j [LEVEL SHOT]: [OFF]
j [AUTO SLOW SHTR]: [OFF]
* (After switching to Slow & Quick Video Mode with [REC FORMAT] set to [4K MP4])
If you switch to a different Recording Mode, [REC FORMAT] will not be reset to [4K MP4]. A [REC
FORMAT] setting of [MP4] and a [REC MODE] setting of [1080/28M] will be maintained.
The shutter speed is 1/100 or more.
Mode Effect
Slow & Quick Video Mode
Allows you to switch images between slow and quick motion
during recording.
FULL HD Slow Motion Video
Mode
Allows you to record slow motion images. (l 74)
Slow Zoom Mode Allows you to record images that slowly zoom in/out. (l 75)
Dolly Zoom Mode
Allows you to record images that only change the angle of view
in the background while keeping the size of the subject (person)
constant. The images are played back with a quick motion effect
of k2. (l 76)
Slow & Quick Video Mode
QUICK
QUICK
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 73 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 74 -
The following limitations apply:
j Audio is not recorded. ( is displayed.)
j Still pictures cannot be recorded.
j The size of the image displayed on the screen will change.
j Images and sound are not output from this unit to another device.
The following settings are cancelled:
j AF/AE tracking
j PRE-REC
j Fade
The following operations are not available while is touched.
j Switching the Image Stabilizer Function on/off
j (For the series/ series)
Camera function button, AUTO/MANUAL button
When you switch to Slow & Quick Video Mode, the screen may become black momentarily.
Scenes recorded in Slow & Quick Video Mode are displayed with the indication on the
thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and played back in 1920k1080/50p.
1 Touch [OK].
2 Select the menu.
3 Start recording.
4
(When [Interval] is selected)
Touch and hold when you want to use
FULL HD Slow Motion Video recording.
As long as you touch and hold the icon, FULL HD Slow
Motion Video recording will continue.
Once you release your finger, normal recording will start.
For each recording you make, FULL HD Slow Motion Video
recording is possible up to 3 times.
To check how many more times you can use FULL HD Slow
Motion Video recording, see the number of the yellow lights
A.
To record the scene into an SD card, use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD
Speed Class Rating.
Recordable time with the battery will be shortened with the use of FULL HD Slow Motion Video
recording.
This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].
FULL HD Slow Motion Video recording uses the following settings:
j [ZOOM MODE]: [Opt.Zoom 24k]
j [REC FORMAT]: [MP4]
*
j [REC MODE]: [1080/28M]
*
j [HYBRID O.I.S.]: [OFF]
j [LEVEL SHOT]: [OFF]
j [AUTO SLOW SHTR]: [OFF]
FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
: [RECORD SETUP] # [SLOW MOTION SETUP] # desired setting
[Interval]: Allows you to switch between normal recording and FULL HD Slow Motion
Video recording while recording.
[Always]: Records the entire scene as FULL HD Slow Motion Video.
QUICK
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 74 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 75 -
* (After switching to FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode with [REC FORMAT] set to [4K MP4])
If you switch to a different Recording Mode, [REC FORMAT] will not be reset to [4K MP4].
The [REC FORMAT] setting of [MP4] and the [REC MODE] setting of [1080/28M] will be
maintained.
The shutter speed is 1/100 or more.
The following limitations apply:
j The sound of the parts will not be recorded. ( will be displayed during the recording)
j Still pictures cannot be recorded.
j The size of the image displayed on the screen will change.
j Images and sound are not output from this unit to another device.
The following settings are cancelled:
j AF/AE tracking
j PRE-REC
j Fade
The following operations are not available while is touched.
j Switching the Image Stabilizer Function on/off
j (For the series/ series)
Camera function button, AUTO/MANUAL button
When you switch to FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode, the screen may become black
momentarily.
Scenes recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode are displayed with the indication on
the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and played back in 1920k1080/50p.
You can set the playback speed on this unit in [SLOW PLAY SPEED] (l 123). In addition, you
can set the playback speed on another device to 1/4 normal speed in [Slow Speed Conversion]
(l 157).
1 Touch [OK].
2 Start recording.
To set the zoom speed
1 Before starting Slow Zoom, touch .
2 Touch (Normal) or (Slow).
Slow Zoom Mode
3 Touch the Slow Zoom button icon ( / ) to
start Slow Zoom.
The lens will be zoomed at a constant speed to the tele
or wide end.
If you touch the same Slow Zoom button icon again
during Slow Zoom, the operation will stop.
If you touch the other Slow Zoom button icon during
Slow Zoom, Slow Zoom will start in the opposite
direction.
Slow Zoom button icon
WXF1
VXF1
SLOW
SLOW
SLOW
SLOW
NORM
SLOW
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 75 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 76 -
AF/AE tracking or digital zoom is not available.
PRE-REC will be cancelled.
You cannot operate Slow Zoom or adjust the zoom speed when using manual settings. (l 80)
You cannot perform zoom operations with the following during Slow Zoom.
j Zoom lever and zoom button icons
j (For the series/ series)
Manual ring
On the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, scenes recorded with Slow Zoom Mode are
displayed with the indication.
Please note that this indication is not displayed for relay-recorded
*
scenes.
* For the only
Adjust while moving the recording position backward or forward.
Performing Auto Zoom while adjusting the position of this unit allows you to create a Dolly
Zoom effect.
If you have touched , record the subject while moving away from it; if you have touched
, record the subject while moving closer to it.
Adjust the position of this unit so that the subject fits into the centre frame.
Dolly Zoom Mode
1 Touch [OK].
2 Align the subject’s position with the centre
frame B.
The face detection frame A will be displayed around the
subject’s face.
Adjust so that the face detection frame and centre frame
appear in the same size. When they appear in the same
size, the colour of the centre frame changes from red to
green.
3 Start recording.
The image will be recorded in quick motion.
4 Touch the Auto Zoom button icon C ( / )
to start Auto Zoom.
The lens will be zoomed at a constant speed to the tele
or wide end.
If you touch the same Auto Zoom button icon again
during Auto Zoom, the operation will stop.
If you touch the other Auto Zoom button icon during Auto
Zoom, Auto Zoom will start in the opposite direction.
5 Adjust the position of this unit while keeping
the subject’s size constant.
A The face detection frame
B The subject’s position with
the centre frame
C The Auto Zoom button icon
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1M
AUTO
AUTO
T
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO

AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 76 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 77 -
This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].
The following settings will be selected:
j [ZOOM MODE]: [Opt.Zoom 24k]
j [REC FORMAT]: [MP4]
j [REC MODE]: [1080/28M]
j [FACE FRAMING]: [PRIMARY]
The following limitations apply:
j Audio is not recorded. ( is displayed.)
j Still pictures cannot be recorded.
The following settings are cancelled:
j AF/AE tracking
j PRE-REC
j Fade
j [LEVEL GAUGE]
j [PICTURE ADJUST]
(For the series/ series)
Camera function button and AUTO/MANUAL button do not work. (l 80)
You cannot perform zoom operations with the following during Auto Zoom.
j Zoom lever and zoom button icons
j (For the series/ series)
Manual ring
Scenes recorded in Dolly Zoom Mode are displayed with the indication on the thumbnail
screen in Playback Mode, and played back in 1920k1080/50p.
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 77 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 78 -
FULL HD Slow Motion Video [V800] series
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
For information on how to use this mode, refer to “FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode” on
page 74.
4K Photo Mode [WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/[VX1] series
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
1 Record a motion picture.
2 Switch this unit to Playback Mode, and create still pictures from the motion
picture. (
l 121)
Scenes recorded with the 4K Photo Mode function are displayed with the indication on the
thumbnail screen.
Use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed Class when you want to record 4K
Photo Mode scenes to the SD card.
This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].
[REC FORMAT] is fixed to [4K MP4].
[AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [OFF].
If the Level Shot Function is set to (Strong), it will be reset to (Normal). (l 98)
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 78 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 79 -
Stop Motion Animation Assist
Change the Recording Mode to . (l 64)
1 Press the button to record the still pictures. (l 35)
2 Touch [Enter].
A still picture will be recorded, and it will be displayed in a semi-transparent state on the recording
screen. Look at the picture to estimate how far you should move the subject for the next
recording.
If you have already recorded still pictures in the recording group, the last still picture will be
displayed in a semi-transparent state on the recording screen.
To record again, touch and record again.
3 Move the subject and determine the composition of the picture.
Repeat Steps 1-3 to continue recording.
You can save still pictures in the same recording group until you use [Create Stop Motion].
Creating a new recording group
If you touch [YES], a new recording group will be created and the recording screen will be
displayed.
Once you create a recording group, you cannot save still pictures in any of the older recording
groups.
[PICTURE SIZE] is set to (1920k1080).
(For the //////)
When you want to record still pictures in a separate recording group, use a different SD card.
(For the )
When you want to record still pictures in a separate recording group, change the recording media
or use a different SD card.
For details on playback of the Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode, refer to page 148.
Before recording in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode
You can create a slideshow that appears to be moving by recording the subject while moved a
little at a time.
Each recording group can store up to 999 still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation
Assist Mode.
(For the )
Recording groups for the SD card and the built-in memory are created separately.
: [PICTURE] # [Create Stop Motion]
WXF1M
MENU
2.1M
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 79 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 80 -
The Manual Focus, White Balance, Shutter Speed, Brightness (Iris and gain) settings are
retained when you change between Motion Picture Recording Mode and Still Picture
Recording Mode.
You can adjust zoom, focus, and brightness (iris and gain) by operating the Manual ring.
1 Press the camera function button to change the manual ring setting.
The setting changes each time you press the button.
ZOOM
#
FOCUS
#
IRIS
2 Rotate the Manual ring to adjust.
For details about focus and brightness (iris and gain), refer to the following
pages.
j Focus (l 86)
j Iris Adjustment (l 85)
To adjust the White Balance and shutter speed, touch the Manual icon. (l 81)
Some functions are disabled depending on settings such as the recording mode.
In the following Recording Modes, the mode will automatically switch to the Manual Mode when
the camera function button is pressed. (l 64)
j Intelligent Auto Mode/Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
j Creative Control Mode
To cancel the manual settings, change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode.
The Manual ring setting switches to ZOOM when the unit is turned off and then on again.
Advanced (Recording)
Manual recording
series/ series
Adjust by operating the Manual ring
D Manual icon
E Manual ring setting
A Manual ring
B AUTO/MANUAL button
C Camera function button
WXF1
VXF1
ヤモヮユンモ
ョヶワヤヵリヰワ
モヶヵヰバ
ヮモワヶモロ
WB
SHTR
MNL
ンリワヨ
・ヰヰヮ・ヰヰヮ
ンリワヨ
ンリワヨ
ンリワヨ
ンリワヨ
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 80 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 81 -
(For the series/ series)
You can adjust White Balance and shutter speed by touching the Manual icon.
(For the series/ series)
You can adjust focus, White Balance, shutter speed, and brightness (iris and gain) by touching the
Manual icon.
Touch to change to Manual Mode.
Some functions are disabled depending on settings such as the recording mode.
To cancel the manual settings, change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode. (l 64)
Adjust by touching the Manual icon
series/ series
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
MNL
WXF1
VXF1
A Manual icon
White Balance (l 82)
Manual Shutter Speed (l 84)
FOCUS
WB
SHTR
IRIS
WB
SHTR
MNL
WB
SHTR
series/ series
VX1
V800
series
series
VX1
V800
A Manual icon
Focus (l 86)
White Balance (l 82)
Manual Shutter Speed (l 84)
Iris Adjustment (l 85)
FOCUS
WB
SHTR
IRIS
FOCUS
WB
SHTR
IRIS
MNL
FOCUS
WB
SHTR
IRIS
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 81 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 82 -
White Balance
Automatic White Balance function may not reproduce natural colours depending on the scenes or
lighting conditions. If so, you can adjust the White Balance manually.
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
1 Touch [WB].
2 Touch / to select White Balance Mode.
Touch [WB] to select the mode.
* [VAR] can be set when you are using series/ series.
You can make fine adjustments to the White Balance to suit the recording conditions when you
set to [VAR].
To return to auto setting, set to or change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto
Mode. (l 64)
To make fine adjustments to the white balance
( series/ series)
When you set the White Balance Mode to [VAR], you can adjust the white balance in a range
between 2000K and 15000K.
The set value is not guaranteed to be an exact value. Use it only as a guide.
Icon Mode/Recording conditions
Automatic White Balance adjustment
VAR
*
Sunny mode:
Outdoors, under a clear sky
Cloudy mode:
Outdoors, under cloudy sky
Indoor mode 1:
Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.
Indoor mode 2:
Colour fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.
Manual adjustment mode:
Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights
Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters
Sunrise, sunset, etc.
1 Select [VAR] and touch [SET].
2 Touch / to adjust the colour.
Touch [ENTER] to end the settings.
A [SET]
FOCUS
SHTR
IRIS
WB
MNL
AWB
WXF1
VXF1
AWB
WXF1
VXF1
WB
SHTR
MNL
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 82 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 83 -
To set the White Balance manually
1 Select , fill the screen with a white subject.
2 Touch and set the blinking .
When the screen turns black instantly and the display stops
flashing and then lights constantly, the setting is complete.
If the display continues flashing, the White Balance cannot be
set. In this case, use other White Balance Modes.
When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.
Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.
is not displayed on the screen when is being set.
FOCUS
SHTR
IRIS
WB
MNL
AWB
AWB
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 83 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 84 -
Manual shutter speed adjustment
Adjust it when recording fast-moving subjects.
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
1 Touch [SHTR].
2 (For the series/ series)
Touch to switch to manual shutter.
The shutter speed value (1/50 etc.) is displayed on-screen.
3 Touch / to adjust settings.
Touch [SHTR] to end the adjustment.
: Shutter speed:
1/50 to 1/8000
If [AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [ON], the shutter speed will be set between 1/25 and 1/8000.
If [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p], the shutter speed will be set between 1/48 and 1/8000 (between
1/24 and 1/8000 when [AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [ON]).
The shutter speed closer to 1/8000 is faster.
The shutter speed will be set between 1/2 and 1/2000 in Still Picture Recording Mode.
To return to the automatic setting, do one of the following:
j Change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode (l 64)
j (For the series/ series)
Touch to switch to auto shutter
(For the series/ series)
When setting both the shutter speed and the iris/gain value, set the shutter speed and then set
the iris/gain value.
When the shutter speed is set lower than 1/12 in the Still Picture Recording Mode, using a tripod
is recommended. The shutter speed will be set to 1/25 when the unit is turned on again.
You may see a band of light around an object that is shining very bright, or highly reflective.
During normal playback, image movement may not look smooth.
If you record an extremely bright object or record under indoor lighting, colour and screen
brightness may change or a horizontal line may appear on the screen. In this case, record in the
Intelligent Auto Mode or Manually adjust the shutter speed as follows:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]: 1/50 or 1/60.
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [24p]: 1/100 or 1/125.
Brightness of the image displayed on the LCD monitor may be different from brightness of the
image actually recorded during the Still Picture Recording Mode. Confirm the image on the
playback screen after recording.
WXF1
VXF1
SHTR
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 84 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 85 -
Iris adjustment
Adjust it when the screen is too bright or too dark.
When using series/ series
1 Press the camera function button to change the manual ring setting to [IRIS].
(
l 80)
2 Press the AUTO/MANUAL button to change to manual iris.
The aperture (OPEN, F2.0, etc.) and gain (0dB, etc.) are displayed on the screen.
3 Rotate the Manual ring to adjust.
When using series/ series
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
1 Touch [IRIS].
2 Touch / to adjust settings.
Touch [IRIS] to end the adjustment.
: Iris/Gain value:
CLOSE
!#
(F16 to F2.0)
!#
OPEN
!#
(0dB to 18dB)
Value closer to CLOSE darken the image.
Value closer to 18dB brighten the image.
When the iris value is adjusted to brighter than OPEN, it changes to the gain value.
To return to auto setting, change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode. (l 64)
(For the series/ series)
When setting both the shutter speed and the iris/gain value, set the shutter speed and then set
the iris/gain value.
If the gain value is increased, the noise on the screen increases.
Depending on the zoom magnification, there are iris values that are not displayed.
When turned in direction A:
When turned in direction B:
Brightness increased
Brightness decreased
WXF1
A
B
VX1
V800
IRIS
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 85 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 86 -
Manual Focus adjustment
If auto focusing is difficult due to the conditions, then use Manual Focus.
Change these menu settings to use MF assist.
When using series/ series
1 Press the camera function button to change the manual ring setting to
[FOCUS]. (
l 80)
2 Press the AUTO/MANUAL button to change to manual focus.
MF appears on the screen.
3 Rotate the Manual ring to adjust the focus.
When using series/ series
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
1 Touch [FOCUS].
2 Touch [MF] to change to Manual Focus.
MF appears on the screen.
3 Touch / to adjust the focus.
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MF ASSIST] # [ON]
When turned in
direction A:
To focus on nearby subjects
When turned in
direction B:
To focus on far away subjects
The parts that are focused are coloured. (Peaking display)
The normal screen returns approximately 2 seconds after
you finish bringing the subject into focus.
To return to auto setting, press the AUTO/MANUAL
button or change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent
Auto Mode. (l 64)
A Peaking display
:
To focus on nearby subjects
:
To focus on far away subjects
MENU
WXF1
A
B
MNL
VX1
V800
MF
MF
MF
MF
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 86 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 87 -
The peaking display is not displayed if [MF ASSIST] is [OFF].
The peaking display does not get displayed in the images that are actually recorded.
(For the series/ series)
The amount that focus moves when you rotate the Manual ring can be changed by setting
[FOCUS RING SETTING]. (l 112)
To change the peaking display colour ( series/ series)
Select the menu.
When recording with a [REC FORMAT] setting of [4K MP4] or [24p] (and with a [REC MODE]
setting of [2160/24p]), you can magnify the screen to adjust the focus.
It is also possible to change the magnification window’s magnification level and position.
If [MF ASSIST] is [ON], the peaking display is displayed on the part focused.
The screens below are examples when using series.
Set [REC FORMAT] and [REC MODE] as follows, or set the Recording Mode to 4K Photo
Mode.
s Set [REC FORMAT] to [4K MP4].
s Set [REC FORMAT] to [24p], and [REC MODE] to [2160/24p].
Change to Manual Focus. (l 86)
The in-focus area is displayed in blue. (Peaking display)
The normal screen returns approximately 2 seconds after
you finish bringing the subject into focus.
To restore Auto Focus, touch [AF] in Step 2 or change
the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode. (l 64)
A Peaking display
: [RECORD SETUP] # [PEAKING COLOUR] # desired setting
[Red]/[Blue]/[Yellow]/[White]
series/ series/ series
Using the Focus Expand function
(Between 3k and 5k) (Between 5.5k and 10k)
A Magnification window
B [EXIT]
C Zoom position window
D [EXIT]
FOCUS
WB
SHTR
IRIS
MNL
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
VX1
3.0X3.0X3.0 X
5.5X5.5X5.5 X
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 87 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 88 -
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch and hold the LCD monitor while in the recording screen, or adjust the
focus.
For information on how to adjust the focus, refer to “Manual Focus adjustment”. (l 86)
A portion of the screen will be magnified.
3 (To change the magnification level)
Touch /.
You can adjust the magnification from 3k to 10k.
When the magnification is set between 5.5k and 10k, the magnification window is maximised
and the zoom position window is displayed.
(Moving the magnified area)
Touch / / / or slide the screen while touching it to move the magnified
area.
4 Adjust the focus.
5 Touch [EXIT] to cancel the magnification window.
(For the series/ series)
You can also exit the magnification window by pressing the AUTO/MANUAL button.
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FOCUS EXPAND] # [ON]
: Increases the magnification level by 0.5k.
: Decreases the magnification level by 0.5k.
To adjust the magnification window’s magnification level or position
with the Manual ring
( series/ series)
1 Rotate the Manual ring to adjust the focus.
A portion of the screen will be magnified.
A [EXIT]
2 Press the camera function button.
/ will be selected and highlighted in yellow.
The icon selected changes each time you press the camera
function button.
/ # / # / # No selection
If you touch the screen, the icon selection will be cancelled.
3 Rotate the Manual ring to make adjustments.
Focus is not adjusted.
B [EXIT]
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1
VXF1
3.0X3.0X3.0 X
ASSISTASSISTASSIST
x5.5x5.5x5.5
3.0X3.0X3.0 X
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 88 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 89 -
Some information on the screen disappears when the screen is magnified.
The magnification window is not displayed on the actual recorded images.
The magnification window is not displayed on TVs.
(For the series)
The Sub Window is not displayed when the magnification window is displayed.
The magnification window disappears in the following cases:
j When you start recording a motion picture
j When you continue to zoom in until you enter the digital zoom range
The magnification window is not displayed in the following cases:
j When recording a motion picture or during PRE-REC
j During digital zoom
j When recording yourself
If you rotate the LCD monitor to face forward to record yourself while the magnification window is
displayed, the operations below cannot be performed. Return the direction of the LCD monitor to
normal position and before performing these operations:
j Changing the magnification window’s magnification level or position
j Exiting the magnification window
[FOCUS EXPAND] is [OFF] when using the following functions and the setting cannot be
changed.
j Creative Control Mode
j HDR Movie Mode
j Cinema Like Effect Mode (except when Slow Zoom is set)
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 89 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 90 -
You can record using convenient functions just by the easy operation of touching the screen.
1 Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to display
Touch Function icons. (
l 26)
2 Touch the Touch Function icon.
(e.g. AF/AE tracking)
To cancel, touch the Touch Function icon again. (Optical
Image Stabilizer Lock is cancelled by releasing the finger
touching .)
Touch function icons
*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only
*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only
Advanced (Recording)
Recording with the Touch Function
Image Stabilizer Function
AF/AE tracking
Optical Image Stabilizer Lock
*1
Touch Shutter
*2
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 90 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 91 -
Use the Image Stabilizer to reduce the effects of shake during recording.
This unit is equipped with Hybrid Optical Image Stabilizer.
Hybrid Optical Image Stabilizer is a hybrid of Optical and Electrical Image Stabilizer.
Touch to switch the Image Stabilizer on/off.
The icon at position A is switched.
Changing Image Stabilizer Mode
(Motion Picture Recording Mode)
When set to [ON], you can further improve image stabilization for recording while walking, or
holding the unit and recording a distant subject with zoom.
This function’s default setting is [ON].
(Still Picture Recording Mode)
Image Stabilizer Function
(Motion Picture Recording Mode)
/ # (setting cancelled)
When [HYBRID O.I.S.] is [ON], is displayed. When [OFF], is displayed.
When recording with a tripod in Motion Picture Recording Mode, we recommend that you set the
Image Stabilizer (off).
(Still Picture Recording Mode)
/ # (setting cancelled)
When [O.I.S.] is [MODE1], is displayed. When [O.I.S.] is [MODE2], is displayed.
: [RECORD SETUP] # [HYBRID O.I.S.] # [ON] or [OFF]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [O.I.S.] # [MODE1] or [MODE2]
[MODE1]: The function works all the time.
[MODE2]: The function works when the button is pressed. We recommend using
this mode when you are recording yourself or recording with a tripod in Still
Picture Recording Mode.
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 91 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 92 -
It is possible to set the focus and exposure to the subject specified on the touch screen.
The focus and exposure will keep following the subject automatically even if it moves.
1 Touch .
An icon is displayed B.
2 Touch the object and lock the target.
3 Start recording.
About target frame
When target lock fails, the target frame blinks in red and then disappears. Touch a characteristic
part (colour etc.) on the object to lock onto it again.
When the button is pressed halfway in Still Picture Recording Mode, the focus is set to the
object that is locked. The target frame turns green when it focuses, and the target cannot be
changed.
This function can be used in Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode. In Still Picture
Recording Mode, this function can only be used with some settings in Scene Mode.
It may track different objects or may not lock the target depending on the recording conditions
such as the following:
j When the object is too large or too small
j When colour of the object is similar to the background
j When the scene is dark
The screen may darken when you lock a target in the Still Picture Recording Mode.
If you use the Fade function while the target is locked, the target lock will be cancelled. (l 95)
AF/AE tracking will be cancelled in the following cases.
j When the unit is turned off
j Press the recording/playback button
j Touch the recording mode switching icon
j Touch the Recording Mode button icon
j Switch to recording of yourself
AF/AE tracking
When you touch the head of the object, the target frame on
the head gets locked and tracking starts.
Touch the object to be changed again when you want to
change the target.
When the Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus
Mode is selected, the setting becomes / (Normal)
and touched object is tracked. Selection becomes /
(Portrait) when target frame is locked on a face. (It
may turn to / (Normal) even if the target is locked
on the face when a spotlight is shining or with a dark
scene.)
A Target frame
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 92 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 93 -
In Motion Picture Recording Mode, you can further improve optical image stabilization by
touching and holding . With this function, you can further reduce the effects of the
shake that tends to occur when using zoom.
1 Touch to turn the Image Stabilizer on. (l 91)
2 Touch and hold .
Icon is displayed in A while you are touching and holding .
Optical Image Stabilizer Lock is released when you remove your finger from the icon.
To make the display of disappear
Display of will not disappear even when no operation is performed for specific time with the
default setting. To make the display of disappear, change the setting of the [O.I.S. LOCK
DISPLAY].
The Optical Image Stabilizer Lock function is not available in the following situations:
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Slow & Quick Video Mode
Stabilization may not be possible under strong shaking conditions.
To record while moving the unit quickly, release Optical Image Stabilizer Lock.
It is possible to focus and record a still picture of a subject that is touched.
1 Touch .
An icon is displayed A.
2 Touch the subject.
Focus area is displayed at the touched position, and a still
picture is recorded.
Depending on the recording conditions or recognition of the touched position, it may not be
possible to record the intended picture.
This will not operate for recording yourself.
Optical Image Stabilizer Lock
: [SETUP] # [O.I.S. LOCK DISPLAY] # desired setting
[ON]: Constantly display.
[OFF]: The icon will disappear after approx. 5 seconds without any touch operation.
Touch Shutter
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 93 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 94 -
Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.
1 Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to display the
operation icons. (
l 26)
2 Touch an operation icon.
(e.g. PRE-REC)
The operation icons that are displayed in the Touch Menu
can be changed. ([SELECT OPERATION ICONS]: l 46)
Select the operation icon again to cancel the function.
Refer to the respective pages for cancelling the following
functions.
j Self-timer (l 96)
j Guidelines (l 96)
j Night Mode (l 97)
j Level Shot Function (l 98)
The icon is displayed when the operation icon is set.
Operation icons
*1 Not displayed in Still Picture Recording Mode.
*2 Available in Manual Mode.
*3 Not displayed in Motion Picture Recording Mode.
*4 Available in the following recording modes:
j Manual Mode
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Slow Zoom Mode
*5 It is displayed only when you set the Recording Mode to HDR Movie Mode. (l 54, 71)
*6 It is displayed only when headphones are connected to the headphone terminal. When [AUDIO
LEVEL]/[MIC LEVEL] (l 111) is set to anything other than [AUTO], the operation icon
is displayed, indicating that the audio input level can also be adjusted.
(For the series/ series)
Night Mode is not available when [REC MODE] is set to [24p].
If you turn off the unit or press the Recording/Playback button, PRE-REC, Self-timer, Backlight
Compensation and Night Mode functions are cancelled.
If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is cancelled.
It is possible to set from the menu. (Except for the Headphone volume adjustment)
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of operation
icons
PRE-REC
Fade
*1
Intelligent Contrast Control
*1, 2
PRE-REC
*1
Self-timer
*3
Intelligent Exposure
*2, 3
Backlight Compensation
Guidelines
Night Mode
*1, 4
HDR Effect
*1, 5
Level Shot Function
*1
Headphone volume adjustment/
Microphone level adjustment
*6
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 94 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 95 -
The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).
This brightens parts that are in shadow and difficult to see and suppresses white saturation
in bright parts at the same time. Both bright and dark parts can be recorded clearly.
If there are extremely dark or bright parts or the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be
clear.
This allows recording of the pictures and sound to start approximately 3 seconds before the
recording start/stop button is pressed.
appears on the screen.
Aim the unit at the subject beforehand.
There is no beep sound.
PRE-REC is cancelled in the following cases.
j Press the recording/playback button
j Touch the recording mode switching icon
j (For the //////)
If you remove the SD card
j (For the )
If you remove the SD card while [MEDIA SELECT] is set to [VIDEO]/[SD CARD]
j If you touch
j (For the series/ series)
If you press the recording mode selector button
j If you press the HDR button
j If you press the Wi-Fi button
j If you turn the unit off
Fade
When you start recording, the image/audio gradually
appears. (Fade in)
When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually
disappears. (Fade out)
The Fade setting is cancelled when the recording stops.
To select the colour for fade in/out
(Fade in)
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOUR] #
[WHITE] or [BLACK]
(Fade out)
MENU
Intelligent Contrast Control
PRE-REC
This prevents you from missing a shot.
PRE-REC
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800 V808
WXF1M
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 95 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 96 -
j If you start recording
j After 3 hours have passed
After setting PRE-REC, if recording starts in less than 3 seconds, motion pictures taken
3 seconds before pressing the recording start/stop button cannot be recorded.
Images displayed on the thumbnail in Playback Mode will differ from the motion pictures
displayed at the start of playback.
This is for recording still pictures using the timer.
Each time the icon is selected, the indication changes by one setting in the following order:
Æ10 (Records after 10 seconds) # Æ2 (Records after 2 seconds) # setting cancelled
(For the series/ series)
When [ (Self-timer)] is to be set in an Fn button with the [FN BUTTON SETTING], the setting
changes each time you press the Fn button.
When you press the button, Æ10 or Æ2 flashes for the set period before a still picture is
recorded. After recording, the Self-timer is cancelled.
In Auto Focus Mode, if the button is pressed halfway once and then fully, the lens focuses
on the subject when the button is pressed halfway. If the button is pressed fully all at once,
the lens focuses on the subject just before recording.
To stop the timer midway through
Touch [CANCEL].
Setting the Self-timer to Æ2 is a good way to prevent image shake when the button is
pressed while using a tripod etc.
This brightens dark areas so the image can be recorded clearly.
If there are extremely dark parts or the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.
This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.
You can check if the image is level while recording motion pictures and still pictures. The
function can also be used to estimate the balance of the composition.
It will switch every time the icon is touched.
# # # Setting cancelled
(For the series/ series)
When [ (Guidelines)] is to be set in an Fn button with the [FN BUTTON SETTING], the setting
changes each time you press the Fn button.
The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.
Self-timer
Intelligent Exposure
Backlight Compensation
Guidelines
VXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 96 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 97 -
(For the series/ series)
You can record images even in very low light situations (minimum required illumination:
approx. 0.5 lx) or in the dark.
Each time the icon is selected, the indication changes by one setting in the following order:
([COLOUR]) # ([Infrared]) # [OFF]
When [ (Night Mode)] is to be set in an Fn button with the [FN BUTTON SETTING], the
setting changes each time you press the Fn button.
When [REC MODE] is set to [24p], ([COLOUR]) is not displayed.
(For the series)
When a sub window is being displayed during recording with the Twin Camera function,
([Infrared]) is not displayed.
To set ON/OFF of the infrared light for ([Infrared])
When is displayed after you set the item to [ON], you can record images in the dark.
When you are in a dim place or in other situations where it is difficult to focus with Auto Focus, set
the item to [OFF].
If you turn off and on this unit and select ([Infrared]), [INFRARED LIGHT] will be set to [ON].
(For the series/ series)
This function allows you to record colour images in very low light situations. (Minimum
required illumination: approx. 0.5 lx)
It will switch every time the icon is touched.
([COLOUR]) # [OFF]
Using a tripod is recommended.
In darker areas, Auto Focus may focus a bit slower. This is normal.
(For the series/ series)
The Night Mode setting cannot be changed while Slow Zoom is working. (l 75)
Night Mode ([COLOUR])
Recorded scene is seen as if frames were missed.
If set in a bright place, the screen may become washed out for a while.
Bright dots that are usually invisible may be seen, but this is not a malfunction.
Night Mode
([COLOUR]): Allows you to record colour images in very low light situations.
([Infrared]): Allows you to record images in the dark.
OFF: Cancel the setting.
: [RECORD SETUP] # [INFRARED LIGHT] # [ON] or [OFF]
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
VX1
V800
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 97 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 98 -
(For the series/ series)
Night Mode ([Infrared])
Remove the lens hood when you use Night Mode ([Infrared]).
Do not use ([Infrared]) in a bright location. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
When ([Infrared]) is set, observe the following points:
j Do not cover the infrared light with your hand or other object.
The maximum distance that the infrared light can reach is approximately 3 m.
You can record a clear image by positioning the centre area of the screen over the subject.
When the remaining battery charge becomes low while ([Infrared]) is set, you cannot cancel
Night Mode or switch to ([COLOUR]).
You can change the level of image contrast correction in HDR Movie Mode. (l 54, 71)
The icon changes each time you touch it.
(Low) # (High)
(For the series/ series)
When [ (HDR Effect)] is to be set in an Fn button with the [FN BUTTON SETTING], the
setting changes each time you press the Fn button.
You cannot change the level of this effect when recording a motion picture or during PRE-REC.
You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
This function detects the horizontal tilt of the unit, and automatically corrects it to the level
position.
Each touch of this icon switches Level Shot Function.
(Normal) # (Strong) # Off
(For the series/ series)
When [ (Level Shot Function)] is to be set in an Fn button with the [FN BUTTON SETTING],
the setting changes each time you press the Fn button.
The icon changes when the tilt exceeds the correction range.
When the tilt exceeds the correction range, move the unit to the position where / is
displayed.
HDR Effect
(Low): Sets the correction level to low.
(High): Sets the correction level to high.
Level Shot Function
(Normal): Corrects the tilt.
(Strong): Strengthen tilt correction.
Off: Cancel the setting.
/ When the tilt is corrected
/ / / When the tilt is above the correction range
WXF1
VXF1
VXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 98 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 99 -
This function’s default setting is (Normal).
The range that this icon can be displayed correctly the slope is about 45 o to the horizontal
direction.
Level Shot Function is cancelled when [LEVEL GAUGE] is set to [ON]. (l 105)
When recording horizontal images using a tripod, attach the unit on the tripod using [LEVEL
GAUGE], and then set Level Shot Function to (Normal) or (Strong) before use.
When you switch the setting of the Level Shot Function, the screen may become black
momentarily.
If you set the option to (Strong), the angle of view will change.
This function cannot be set when recording a motion picture or during PRE-REC.
(For the series/ series/ series)
In the following cases, you cannot set the Level Shot Function to (Strong)
Even if you set it to (Strong), it will be reset to (Normal).
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]
j Set [REC FORMAT] to [24p], and [REC MODE] to [2160/24p].
j When the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode
Headphone volume adjustment
Adjust the volume of the headphone while recording.
: Increase the volume
: Decrease the volume
Actual volume to be recorded does not change.
A [HEADPHONE LEVEL]
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 99 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 100 -
This function is identical to Scene Mode in Recording Mode. (l 72)
The shutter speed and aperture, etc. are automatically adjusted to match the scene you want to
record.
This item is displayed in the menu only when [Time Lapse Rec] in Creative Control Mode is
set. (l 71)
Please refer to page 72 for details about the effect of each mode.
Advanced (Recording)
Recording functions of menus
[SCENE MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [SCENE MODE] # desired setting
[OFF]: Cancel the setting
5Sports: To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback and
pause of playback
Portrait: To make people stand out against the background
Soft Skin: To makes skin colours appear softer for a more attractive
appearance
Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.
Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.
Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant
Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant
Scenery: For spatial scenery
Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully
Night Scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully
Low Light: For dark scenes, such as at dusk
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 100 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 101 -
Set the maximum zoom ratio for the Motion Picture Recording Mode.
(For the series/ / / )
(For the / / )
*1 Not displayed in the following situations:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD] or [MP4].
j When [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p].
j When using series
*2 (For the series/ series/ series)
Not displayed in the following situations:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]
j When [REC MODE] is set to [2160/24p]
j When the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode
The larger the digital zoom magnification, the more the image quality is degraded.
This function cannot be used in Still Picture Recording Mode.
[ZOOM MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [ZOOM MODE] # desired setting
[Opt.Zoom 24k]: Optical zoom only (Up to 24k)
[i.Zoom 32k]
*1
: This zoom function allows you to maintain 4K picture quality.
(Up to 32k)
[i.Zoom 48k]
*2
: This zoom function allows you to maintain high-definition picture
quality. (Up to 48k)
[D.Zoom 70k]: Digital zoom (Up to 70k)
[D.Zoom 1500k]: Digital zoom (Up to 1500k)
[Opt.Zoom 24k]: Optical zoom only (Up to 24k)
[i.Zoom 32k]
*1
: This zoom function allows you to maintain 4K picture quality.
(Up to 32k)
[i.Zoom 48k]
*2
: This zoom function allows you to maintain high-definition picture
quality. (Up to 48k)
[D.Zoom 70k]: Digital zoom (Up to 70k)
[D.Zoom 250k]: Digital zoom (Up to 250k)
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
VXF11
VX11
V808
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 101 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 102 -
This automatically adjusts the contrast to suit the scene.
is displayed on the screen when this is set to [ON].
This is set to [ON] when you change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode/Intelligent
Auto Plus Mode.
This is [OFF] when using the following functions and the setting cannot be changed.
j HDR Movie Mode
j Creative Control Mode ([Miniature Effect]/[8mm movie]/[Silent movie])
j (For the series/ series)
Night Mode ([Infrared])
Switch the recording format of motion picture.
(For the series/ series/ series)
(For the series)
Use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed Class Rating when you want to
record motion pictures to the SD card using the setting [4K MP4]
*
or [24p].
(For the series/ series/ series)
This function’s default setting is [4K MP4] mode.
(For the series)
This function’s default setting is [AVCHD] mode.
This unit will restart in the following cases:
j Changing the setting to [24p]
j Changing the setting from [24p] to another setting
* For the series/ series/ series
[ACTIVE CONTRAST]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [ACTIVE CONTRAST] # [ON]
[REC FORMAT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC FORMAT] # desired setting
[4K MP4]: Set the recording format to 4K MP4. (l 2)
[MP4]: Set the recording format to MP4. (l 2)
[AVCHD]: Set the recording format to AVCHD. (l 2)
[24p]: Set the recording format to 24p. (l 2)
[AVCHD]: Set the recording format to AVCHD. (l 2)
[MP4]: Set the recording format to MP4. (l 2)
[24p]: Set the recording format to 24p. (l 2)
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 102 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 103 -
Switch the picture quality and recording format of the motion pictures to record. The recording
formats that can be set change according to [REC FORMAT] setting.
(For the series/ series/ series)
When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]
Set the recording format to 2160/25p (72 Mbps).
This is a recording format suitable for editing images.
This format can record 4K motion pictures (3840k2160/25p), which deliver a resolution four
times higher than that of full high-definition motion pictures.
When [REC FORMAT] is set to [MP4]
When [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD]
A Favours image quality
B Favours Recording time
When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]
(For the series/ series/ series)
(For the series)
*1 [1080/50M]/[1080/28M] and [720] are recording modes suitable for playing back or editing on a PC.
*2 You can record motion pictures in 1080/50p (1920k1080/50 progressive), the best AVCHD
picture quality for this unit.
Please refer to page 14 for details about recordable time using the battery.
Use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed Class Rating when you want to
record motion pictures to the SD card using the setting [1080/50M].
Please refer to page 278 for details about approximate recordable time.
When the unit is moved a lot or moved quickly, or when a fast-moving subject is recorded,
mosaic-type noise may appear at playback.
[REC MODE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC MODE] # desired setting
[1080/50M]
*1
: Set the recording format to 1080/50p (50 Mbps).
[1080/28M]
*1
: Set the recording format to 1080/50p (28 Mbps).
[720]
*1
: Set the recording format to 720/25p.
[PH]/[HA]/[HG]/[HE]:
(AB)
Set the recording format to 1080/50i.
[1080/50p]
*2
: Set the recording format to 1080/50p.
[2160/24p]: Set the recording format to 2160/24p (72 Mbps).
[1080/24p]: Set the recording format to 1080/24p (50 Mbps).
Set the recording format to 1080/24p (50 Mbps).
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 103 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 104 -
It is possible to continuously record motion picture to an SD card when there is no space available
in the built-in memory. (It allows you to record only to SD card from built-in memory.)
Set [MEDIA SELECT] to [Built-inMemory].
Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l 102)
Insert an SD card.
is displayed on the screen. will disappear when space in the built-in memory is gone
and the recording to the SD card starts.
Relay Recording can only be performed once.
Combine the scenes that were relay-recorded using the [RELAY SCENE COMBINE] into
the SD card. (l 158, 166)
Once you have performed [RELAY SCENE COMBINE], you can use the Relay Recording
function again. If the [RELAY REC] is set to [ON] without performing the [RELAY SCENE
COMBINE], a message is displayed. You will be able to perform Relay Recording by touching
[YES], but you will not be able to perform the [RELAY SCENE COMBINE] after that.
Still pictures are recorded to the SD card after Relay Recording.
is displayed on the thumbnail display during the playback of the scene that was relay-recorded
on the built-in memory.
Detected faces appear with frames.
Up to 5 frames are indicated. Larger faces and faces nearer to the centre of the screen take
preference over others.
Prioritised face framing
Prioritised face framing is displayed as orange frames. Focus and adjustment of brightness will be
performed against the prioritised face framing.
The prioritised face frame is displayed only with Portrait Mode in Intelligent Auto Mode or
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
The white frame is for face detection only.
Focus will be set to prioritised face framing when the button is pressed halfway when
recording still pictures. Prioritised face framing will turn to green when the focus is set.
Faces are not detected in HDR Movie Mode or Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode. (l 54, 79)
[RELAY REC]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [RELAY REC] # [ON]
[FACE FRAMING]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FACE FRAMING] # desired setting
[PRIMARY]:
Only the prioritised face framing is displayed.
[ALL]:
All face detection framings are displayed.
[OFF]:
Cancel the setting.
WXF1M
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 104 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 105 -
This function displays the horizontal/vertical tilt of the unit with the electronic level.
To correct the tilt
The horizontal tilt display A and vertical tilt display B appear yellow when there is a tilt, and
appear green when there is almost no tilt.
The maximum tilt display angles are approximately 45o in horizontal direction and 10o in vertical
direction.
The electronic level does not affect the actual recorded images.
The electronic level is not displayed when recording yourself or the LCD monitor is closed with
the screen facing outward.
Even when the tilt is in the corrected state, an error of approximately 1o may occur.
In the following cases, the electronic level may not be displayed correctly:
j When moving this unit
j When pointing this unit up or down at an angle closer to perpendicular
If the unit continues to be tilted upside down from the normal horizontal position while recording
motion pictures, it is automatically put into recording pause.
The AGS function may activate and cause the unit to pause the recording if you are recording a
subject right above or right below you.
[LEVEL GAUGE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [LEVEL GAUGE] # [ON]
(Horizontal direction) (Vertical direction)
When correcting the leftward tilt When correcting the downward tilt
[AGS]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AGS] # [ON]
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 105 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 106 -
You can record bright pictures even in dark places by slowing the shutter speed.
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
The shutter speed is set to 1/25 or more (1/24 or more when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p])
depending on the ambient brightness.
This function cannot be used in Still Picture Recording Mode.
When the shutter speed becomes 1/25 or 1/24, the screen may be seen as if frames are missed
and afterimages may appear.
Recording motion pictures with more vivid colours, using x.v.Colour
technology.
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l 102)
For more realistic colours, use an HDMI micro cable (supplied) with a TV that supports the
x.v.Colour
.
When motion pictures recorded while this function is turned [ON] are played back with a
TV not compatible with x.v.Colour
, colours may not be reproduced properly.
When these images are played back with devices other than ones compatible with x.v.Colour
,
it is recommended to record the images after this function is turned [OFF].
x.v.Colour
is a name for devices that are compatible with the xvYCC format, an international
standard for expanded colour in motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.
Message is displayed when this unit is moved rapidly.
When “CAMERA PANNING IS TOO FAST.” appears, move the unit slowly while recording.
In the following cases, message will not appear:
j While pausing the recording
j When [LEVEL GAUGE] is set to [ON]
[AUTO SLOW SHTR]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUTO SLOW SHTR] # [ON]
[Digital Cinema Colour]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [Digital Cinema Colour] # [ON]
[SHOOTING GUIDE]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [SHOOTING GUIDE] # [ON]
MENU
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 106 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 107 -
This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones while maintaining the realism.
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
When [Strong] is set, you can check how effectively the wind noise is reduced with the icon
displayed on the screen. In descending order of the strength of the reduction effect, / /
/ is displayed.
When [Normal] is set, will be displayed on the screen.
This function’s default setting is [Normal].
When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, [Wind Noise Canceller] is
set to [Strong], and the setting cannot be changed.
You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
This cannot be set when you have connected an external microphone or audio device
*
.
* You can connect audio equipment when using the series/ series.
Switch the audio setting for the MIC/LINE IN terminal to suit the input device that is connected.
[Wind Noise Canceller]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [Wind Noise Canceller] # desired setting
[Strong]: When a strong wind is detected, this option effectively reduces the
wind noise by minimising the low-pitched sound.
[Normal]: This option extracts and reduces only the wind noise without
deteriorating the sound quality.
[OFF]: Cancel the setting.
series/ series
[AUDIO INPUT SELECT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUDIO INPUT SELECT] # desired setting
[MIC INPUT]: Select when you connect an external microphone.
[LINE INPUT]: Select when you connect audio equipment, etc., compatible with line
input.
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 107 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 108 -
(For the series/ series)
This function reduces the low-pitched sound when using an external microphone or audio device.
(For the series/ series)
This function reduces the low-pitched sound when using an external microphone.
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
This can be set when you have connected an external microphone or audio device.
You can set the built-in microphone’s sound quality as appropriate for the scene you want to record.
Set [MIC SETUP] to [SURROUND] or [STEREO MIC]. (l 110)
1 Select the menu.
2
(When [Customize] is selected)
Select the desired item.
[LOWCUT]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [LOWCUT] # [ON]
[Sound Scene Select]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [Sound Scene Select] # desired setting
[Auto]: Records sounds with standard settings.
[Music]: For recording scenes in which you need to cover a wide sound
range and a wide volume range, such as music concerts.
[Speech]: For recording speeches, talk sessions, and other events in which
sounds will be coming mostly from the front of this unit.
[Nature]: For recording in serene environments, such as forests and rivers.
[Festival]: For recording festivals, fireworks displays, and other very loud
scenes.
[Customize]: Allows you to adjust [Microphone Gain], [Frequency Response]
and [Directional].
[Microphone Gain]: Select this item when the sound recorded in a loud scene is
distorted.
[Frequency Response]: Adjusts the high frequency range and low frequency range levels.
[Directional]: Select [SURROUND]/[STEREO] or [MONO].
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 108 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 109 -
3 (When [Microphone Gain] is selected in Step 2)
Select an item.
(When [Frequency Response] is selected in Step 2)
Touch / to adjust.
Before recording, check the effect you have selected with a headphone set, etc.
The high frequency range (dB) and low frequency range (dB) can be adjusted.
If noises such as the sound caused by the wind bother you, set the low frequency range to
[LowCut].
To end the adjustment, touch [EXIT].
(When [Directional] is selected in Step 2)
Select an item.
4 Touch [EXIT].
appears on the screen.
Depending on the recording condition or sound quality, the desired effect may not be achieved.
The setting becomes [Auto] when you have connected an external microphone or audio device
*
.
* You can connect audio equipment when using the series/ series.
(When [Music] or [Festival] is set)
The volume of the recorded sounds may be lower than that of the sounds recorded with [Auto].
(When [Speech] or [Nature] is set)
Sounds recorded with these effects are less realistic than those recorded with [SURROUND] or
[STEREO MIC] in [MIC SETUP].
You can switch the channel number setting of the built-in microphone.
Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l 102)
[2ch] will be selected in the following cases:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [AVCHD]
j When you have connected an external microphone or audio device
*
* You can connect audio equipment when using the series/ series.
[Normal]: Adjusts the sound quality automatically.
[Attenuate]: Records sounds of very loud scenes at appropriate volume.
[SURROUND]/[STEREO]: Records sounds with the setting of [MIC SETUP] ([SURROUND] or
[STEREO MIC]).
[MONO]: Records sounds from all directions without setting specific
directivity.
[5.1ch/2ch]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [5.1ch/2ch] # desired setting
[5.1ch]: Records with the 5.1ch.
[2ch]: Records with the 2ch.
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 109 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 110 -
Recording setting of the built-in microphone can be adjusted.
Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l 102)
*1 The option is displayed only when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [5.1ch].
*2 The option is displayed only when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [2ch].
If you wish to record higher quality sound and maintain realism even when zooming in, for
instance, when recording a music recital, we recommend setting [MIC SETUP] to [SURROUND].
[STEREO MIC] will be selected in the following cases:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [AVCHD]
j When you have connected an external microphone or audio device
*3
*3 You can connect audio equipment when using the series/ series.
When [Directional] in [Customize] in [Sound Scene Select] is set to [MONO], [SURROUND] and
[STEREO MIC] cannot be set. (If you set [MONO], [SURROUND] and [STEREO MIC] will be
switched to [ZOOM MIC])
[MIC SETUP]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC SETUP] # desired setting
[SURROUND]
*1
: Records the surrounding sound with added realism.
[ZOOM MIC]: Sound is recorded with changing the directionality in conjunction
with the zoom operation. Sounds near the front of the unit are
recorded more clearly if you zoom in (close-up) and surrounding
sounds are recorded more realistically if you zoom out (wide angle).
[FOCUS MIC]
*1
: The forward sound is recorded more clearly by enhancing the
directionality toward the centre.
[STEREO MIC]
*2
: Records sound from two forward directions.
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 110 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 111 -
(For the series/ series)
Adjust the input level of the built-in microphone and of an external microphone/audio device
connected to this unit when recording.
Change the [AUDIO INPUT SELECT] to suit the input device that is connected.
(For the series/ series)
When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones and the external microphone terminal
can be adjusted.
1 Select the menu.
(For the series/ series)
(For the series/ series)
series/ series
[AUDIO LEVEL]
series/ series
[MIC LEVEL]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUDIO LEVEL] # desired setting
: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting
[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted automatically.
[SET ]: The desired recording level can be set. AGC is activated, and sound
distortions are reduced.
[SET ]: The desired recording level can be set. Sounds are recorded in
natural quality.
2 (When [SET ]/[SET ] is selected)
Touch / to adjust.
The adjustment screen to be displayed depends on the
setting of [5.1ch/2ch]. (l 109)
Adjust the microphone input level so that the last 2 bars of
the gain value are not red. (Otherwise, the sound is
distorted.) Select a lower setting for audio input level.
3 Touch [ENTER].
Touch [EXIT] to complete the setting.
(When set to [5.1ch])
A Centre
B Front left
C Back left
D Front right
E Back right
F Audio input level
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
VX1
V800
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 111 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 112 -
When [MIC SETUP] is [ZOOM MIC], the volume will be different depending on the zoom rate.
(audio input level meter) is displayed on the screen when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [5.1ch], and
(audio input level meter) is displayed when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [2ch] and [AUDIO
LEVEL]/[MIC LEVEL] is set to a setting other than [AUTO].
You cannot record with the audio completely muted.
Adjust the quality of the image while recording.
Adjust by outputting to a TV while adjusting the quality of the image.
This setting is retained when you change between Motion Picture Recording Mode and
Still Picture Recording Mode.
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch the desired setting items.
3 Touch / to adjust settings.
4 Touch [ENTER].
Touch [EXIT] to complete the settings.
appears on the screen.
Set the amount that focus moves when you rotate the Manual ring to adjust the focus.
[PICTURE ADJUST]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [PICTURE ADJUST]
[SHARPNESS]: Sharpness of the edge
[COLOUR]: Depth of the colour of the image
[EXPOSURE]: Brightness of the image
[WB ADJUST]: Picture colour balance
series/ series
[FOCUS RING SETTING]
: [RECORD SETUP] # [FOCUS RING SETTING] # desired setting
[SPEED]: The focus value changes according to the speed that the Manual ring is
rotated.
[COARSE]: The focus value changes according to the rotational position of the
Manual ring. The amount that focus moves when you rotate the Manual
ring is large, so this is suited to rough adjustments.
[FINE]: The focus value changes according to the rotational position of the
Manual ring. The amount that focus moves when you rotate the Manual
ring is small, so this is suited to fine adjustments.
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 112 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 113 -
The higher the number of pixels, the higher the clarity of the picture when printing.
The number of recording pixels that can be set changes depending on selected screen aspect
ratio. (l 114)
Picture size and Maximum zoom ratio in Still Picture Recording
Mode
* Extra Optical Zoom cannot be used. The maximum zoom magnification is 24k.
Picture size in Motion Picture Recording Mode
Set this unit to Motion Picture Recording Mode (l 21)
The available picture sizes vary depending on the [REC FORMAT] and [REC MODE] settings.
(For the series/ series/ series)
[PICTURE SIZE]
: [PICTURE] # [PICTURE SIZE] # desired setting
Picture size Aspect ratio Extra Optical Zoom (l 53)
5216k3912
4:3
*
3808k2856
*
640k480 60k
6784k3816
16:9
*
4992k2808
*
1920k1080 36k
: [PICTURE] # [PICTURE SIZE] # desired setting
Recording format Recording mode
Available
picture size
Aspect ratio
[4K MP4] [2160]
6016k3384
3840k2160
16:9
[24p]
[2160/24p]
[1080/24p]
4992k2808
1920k1080
[MP4]
All
[AVCHD]
MENU
20.4M
10.9M
0.3M
25.9M
14M
2.1M
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
20.4M
8.3M
14M
2.1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 113 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 114 -
(For the series)
(For the series/ series/ series)
The default setting is in Still Picture Recording Mode and in Motion Picture Recording
Mode.
(For the series)
The default setting is in Still Picture Recording Mode and in Motion Picture Recording
Mode.
The recording will become longer depending on the recording pixels.
Please refer to page 279 for details about the number of recordable pictures.
This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback method.
This function’s default setting is [16:9].
When the aspect ratio is set to [4:3], black bands may appear on the left and right of the screen.
The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at printing.
Check the printer or photo studio before printing.
You can add a shutter sound when recording still pictures.
No shutter sound is emitted in Motion Picture Recording Mode.
Recording format Recording mode
Available
picture size
Aspect ratio
[MP4]
All 4992k2808
1920k1080
16:9[AVCHD]
[24p] [1080/24p]
[ASPECT RATIO]
: [PICTURE] # [ASPECT RATIO] # desired setting
[4:3]: Aspect ratio of 4:3 television
[16:9]: Aspect ratio of high-definition television, etc.
[SHTR SOUND]
: [PICTURE] # [SHTR SOUND] # desired setting
: Volume low
: Volume high
[OFF]: Cancel the setting.
V800
14M
2.1M
VXF1
VX1
25.9M
20.4M
V800
25.9M
14M
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 114 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 115 -
The Fn buttons enable you to register 1 function to each button from amongst a choice of
23 functions.
Set in Fn1 to Fn4 buttons.
Using the Fn buttons
Press the Fn button in the recording screen.
Some functions can also be used in the Playback Mode. (l 117)
To cancel, press the same Fn button again.
For information about how to cancel the below Fn button functions and how to use them, refer to
the relevant pages.
j [ (PHOTOSHOT)] (l 35)
j [ (REC MODE CHANGE)] (l 22)
j [ (LCD/EVF CHANGE)] (l 24)
j [ (Guidelines)] (l 96)
j [ (Night Mode)] (l 97)
j [ (HDR Effect)] (l 98)
j [ (Level Shot Function)] (l 98)
j [ (Self-timer)] (l 96)
Advanced (Recording)
Using the Fn buttons
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 115 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 116 -
Changing the Fn button settings
1 Select the menu.
The settings are returned to the default when you touch
[Reset].
2 Touch the item to be allocated.
For information about the Fn button functions that can be allocated, refer to page 117.
3 Touch [ENTER].
Touch [EXIT] to end the settings.
The default settings are as follows:
: [SETUP] # [FN BUTTON SETTING] # [Fn1] to [Fn4]
Fn1 button (Wi-Fi)
Fn2 button (HDR Movie)
Fn3 button (PHOTOSHOT)
Fn4 button (REC MODE CHANGE)
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 116 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 117 -
Functions of the Fn button
List of Fn button functions
±”: Available; “s: Not available
*1 Available in Manual Mode.
Item Setting details
Motion
Picture
Recording
Mode
Still Picture
Recording
Mode
(Wi-Fi)
Functions as a Wi-Fi button.
You can display the Wi-Fi menu and exit
the Wi-Fi function. (l 180)
±±
(HDR Movie)
Functions as an HDR button.
You can switch to the HDR Movie Mode.
(l 54)
±s
(PHOTOSHOT)
Functions as an Photoshot button.
You can take still pictures. (l 35)
±±
(REC MODE
CHANGE)
Functions as a Recording Mode selector
button.
You can switch between the Motion
Picture Recording Mode, 4K Photo
Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode.
(l 22)
±±
(START/STOP)
Functions as a recording start/stop
button.
You can start and stop motion picture
recording. (l 33)
±s
(MENU SETTING)
Functions as a menu button.
You can display and exit menus. (l 41)
±±
(ACTIVE
CONTRAST)
Switches [ACTIVE CONTRAST] on/off.
(l 102)
±s
(WB SETTING :
VAR)
*1
Sets the White Balance mode to [VAR].
(l 119)
±±
(LCD/EVF
CHANGE)
Changes the display settings for the
LCD monitor/Viewfinder (l 24)
±±
(Fade) Switches Fade on/off. (l 95) ±s
(Intelligent Contrast
Control)
*1
Switches Intelligent Contrast Control on/
off. (l 95)
±s
(PRE-REC) Switches PRE-REC on/off. (l 95) ±s
(Backlight
Compensation)
Switches Backlight Compensation on/
off. (l 96)
±±
(Guidelines) Switches the Guidelines setting. (l 96) ±±
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 117 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 118 -
*1 Available in Manual Mode.
*2 Available in the following recording modes:
j Manual Mode
j Slow Zoom Mode
*3 Available when the Recording Mode is set to HDR Movie Mode.
[ (Wi-Fi)], [ (PHOTOSHOT)], [ (MENU SETTING)], and [ (LCD/EVF CHANGE)]
can also be used in Playback Mode.
[ (Image Stabilizer Function)], [ (AF/AE tracking)], and [ (Touch Shutter)] can also be
set with touch functions. (l 90)
You can also set Fn button functions by touching the following operation icons. (l 94)
j Fade
j Intelligent Contrast Control
j PRE-REC
j Backlight Compensation
j Guidelines
j Night Mode
j HDR Effect
j Level Shot Function
j Self-timer
j Intelligent Exposure
You can also set Fn button functions from the following menus.
j [ACTIVE CONTRAST]
j [FADE]
j [INTELLIGENT CONTRAST]
j [PRE-REC]
j [BACKLIGHT COMPENS.]
j [GUIDE LINES]
j [NIGHT MODE]
j [HDR EFFECT]
j [LEVEL SHOT]
j [SELF TIMER]
j [I.EXPOSURE]
j [MF ASSIST]
Item Setting details
Motion
Picture
Recording
Mode
Still Picture
Recording
Mode
(Night Mode)
*2
Switches the Night Mode setting. (l 97) ±s
(HDR Effect)
*3
Switches the HDR Effect setting. (l 98) ±s
(Level Shot
Function)
Switches the Level Shot Function
setting. (l 98)
±s
(Self-timer) Switches the Self-timer setting. (l 96)
(Intelligent
Exposure)
*1
Switches Intelligent Exposure on/off.
(l 96)
(Image Stabilizer
Function)
Switches the Image Stabilizer Function
on/off. (l 91)
±±
(AF/AE tracking) Sets AF/AE tracking. (l 92) ±±
(Touch Shutter) Sets Touch Shutter. (l 93)
(MF ASSIST)
*1
Switches [MF ASSIST] on/off. (l 86) ±±
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 118 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 119 -
Sets the White Balance mode to [VAR].
Set [VAR] in an Fn button. (l 116)
Switch to Manual Mode. (l 81)
Press the Fn button in the recording screen.
The White Balance Mode changes to [VAR].
If you touch an Fn button while setting the White Balance Mode, the screen to adjust [VAR] is
displayed. (l 82)
Pressing the Fn button once again changes the White Balance Mode to .
This function is not available in the following cases:
j In Intelligent Auto Mode/Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
j When [SCENE MODE] is set to (Beach)/ (Sunset)/ (Fireworks)/ (Night
Scenery) (l 72)
WB SETTING : VAR
AWB
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 119 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 120 -
Motion picture playback using operation icon
For details on the basic playback operations, refer to page 38.
Scenes that are large in file size may cause this unit to respond slower to operations performed
by the user or cause certain operations performed by this unit to become slower.
Advanced (Playback)
Playback Operations
Playback operation Playback display Operating steps
Skip Playback
(to the start of a
scene)
During Playback Touch the LCD monitor and slide from right
to left (from left to right) during playback.
Slow-motion
Playback
During Pause
With the playback paused, continue
touching . ( is for slow rewind
playback)
Frame-by-frame Slow-motion Playback is
performed continuously while the display is
touched and held.
Normal playback is restored when you touch
.
For slow rewind playback, the intervals
between frames and the display time per
frame vary depending on the type of the
scene.
Frame-by-frame
Playback
With the playback paused, touch .
(Touch to advance the frames one at a
time in the reverse direction.)
Normal playback is restored when you touch
.
For reverse Frame-by-frame Playback, the
intervals between frames vary depending on
the type of the scene.
Direct Playback
Touch the direct playback bar or slide it
while touching.
The playback pauses temporarily and skips
to the position touched or slid to while
touching.
(When you touch the bar or slide it while
touching during playback)
Playback will start by releasing your touching
or sliding finger.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 120 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 121 -
Creating still picture from motion picture
A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.
The size of pictures to be recorded is determined by their scene type.
* For the series/ series/ series
Press the button fully at the location to be saved as a still picture during
playback.
It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.
Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.
Quality will be different from the normal still picture.
Scene type Picture size
4K MP4 scenes
*
Scene(s) recorded in the recording mode [2160/24p]
*
(3840k2160)
Scenes recorded in the recording format [MP4]
AVCHD scenes
Scene(s) recorded in the recording mode [1080/24p]
Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera
Scenes saved in MP4 (1920k1080/25p)
Scenes saved in MP4 (1280k720/25p)
(1920k1080)
Scenes saved in MP4 (640k360/25p) (640k360)
8.3M
2.1M
0.2M
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 121 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 122 -
Time Frame Index
An image of one scene is displayed as a thumbnail at set search condition. Scene can be played
back from any midway point of the scene you wish to see.
1 Operate the zoom lever to side and change
over the thumbnail display to Time Frame Index.
(
l 39)
The recording mode icon A is displayed with the thumbnails.
j When an MP4 scene is selected
, (Red), (Red), (Red),
(Red)
j When an [AVCHD] scene is selected
, ,
j When an [24p] scene is selected
(Red), (Red)
2 Touch .
To display the next (previous) page:
j Slide the thumbnail display upward (downward) while touching
it.
j Touch (up) / (down) on the thumbnail scroll lever.
(l 39)
3 Touch the desired search condition.
4 (When [MINUTES] is selected)
Touch / to set the time.
It can be set up to a maximum of 60 minutes.
Touch [ENTER].
5 Touch the thumbnail to be played back.
Next (Previous) thumbnail can be displayed by touching / .
[3 SEC.]/[6 SEC.]/[12 SEC.]/[MINUTES]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 122 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 123 -
Repeat Playback
Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.
The indication appears on the full screen views.
All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all the
scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)
Resuming the previous playback
If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was
stopped.
If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped
scene.
The memorised resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or press the recording/playback
button.
(The setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)
Setting the playback speed of FULL HD Slow Motion
Video
You can set the speed at which this unit will play back parts recorded as FULL HD Slow Motion
Video.
Touch [MP4] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
If you play back the parts on another device, they will be played back at 1/2 normal speed. To play
them back at 1/4 normal speed, perform [Slow Speed Conversion] (l 157).
Once you perform [Slow Speed Conversion] on the scenes, the parts will be played back at 1/4
normal speed.
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [SLOW PLAY SPEED] # desired setting
[Super Slow]: Plays back at 1/4 normal speed.
[Slow]: Plays back at 1/2 normal speed.
MENU
MENU
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 123 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 124 -
Zooming in on a still picture during playback
(Playback zoom)
You can zoom in by touching a still picture during playback.
1 Touch and hold the part you wish to zoom in on during still picture playback.
It will display enlarged in order of normal display (k1) # k2 # k4. Touch and hold the screen to
zoom in from the normal display (k1) to k2. Touch the screen to zoom in from k2 to k4.
The still picture is zoomed in on, centring on the part you touched.
You can also perform zoom operations using the zoom lever.
The more picture is enlarged, the more its quality deteriorates.
2 Move to the zoomed in position by touching
/ / / or slide while touching the
screen.
The location of the zoom displays for about 1 second when
zooming in (zooming out) or moving the displayed location.
Zooming out from the zoomed still picture
Touch to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)
Touch to return to normal playback (k1).
A Displayed location of the
zoom
ビヹビヹ
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 124 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 125 -
Playing back motion pictures/still pictures by date
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the same day can be played back in succession.
2 Touch the playback date.
The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the date selected are displayed as thumbnails.
3 Touch the scene or the still picture to be played back.
If you press the recording/playback button to switch between Recording Mode and Playback
Mode, the [VIEW ALL] screen will be displayed again.
In cases such as those described below, scenes and still pictures are grouped separately on the
date list, and –1, –2… may be added after the date:
j When the number of scenes exceeds 99
j When the number of still pictures exceeds 999
j When [REC MODE] in [AVCHD] is changed
j When the microphone input sound (5.1ch/2ch) is changed
j When recorded in Creative Control Mode.
j When the [ON]/[OFF] setting of Backup for Twin Camera is switched (l 62)
j When recorded in Home Monitor function. (l 192)
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Scenes recorded as 4K Cropping (l 126)
j When saved in Manual Edit (l 142)
j When [NUMBER RESET] is performed
Advanced (Playback)
Various playback functions
1 Touch the date select icon. (l 26)
A Date select icon
ALL
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 125 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 126 -
The following scenes and still pictures are grouped separately on the date list, and icons are
displayed according to the category:
*1 For the series/ series/ series
*2 only
4K Cropping [WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/[VX1] series
You can add various effects to 4K MP4 scenes and save them as 1080/25p scenes.
Touch [MP4] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Touch . (l 26)
2 Touch the function you want to apply.
Scene or still picture Icon to be displayed
Scenes recorded with [1080/50p] in [AVCHD]
Scenes saved in 4K MP4
*1
Scenes recorded with [2160/24p]
*1
Scenes recorded with [1080/50M]/[1080/28M] in [MP4]
Scenes recorded with [1080/24p]
Scenes saved in MP4 (1920k1080/25p) (l 155, 166
*2
)
Scenes recorded with [720] in [MP4]
Scenes saved in MP4 (1280k720/25p) (l 155, 166
*2
)
Still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode (l 79)
Still pictures created from motion pictures (l 121)
Still pictures saved in Tagging Favorite Scene (l 145)
Scenes saved in Highlight Playback (l 138)
Scenes saved in MP4 (640k360/25p) (l 155, 166
*2
)
50p
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 126 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 127 -
Touch [ENTER].
3 Set the selected function and start a preview.
4 Perform playback operations. (l 39)
When the preview ends or the playback is stopped, a screen will be displayed, asking you to
select [REPLAY]
*1
, [SAVE] (l 132), [SELECT AGAIN]
*2
or [EXIT]. Touch the desired item.
*1 It cannot be selected when [Auto Tracking Crop] is selected.
*2 It cannot be selected when [Stabilizing Crop] is selected.
You cannot perform fast forward/rewind playback, skip playback, slow playback, frame-by-frame
playback, or direct playback during a preview or [Manual Tracking Crop] playback.
Scenes recorded with other devices and scenes edited with HD Writer AE 5.4 may not work
correctly.
Function Effect
[Auto Tracking
Crop]
Allows you to crop an image that automatically tracks the area
around the touched subject and apply a correction effect
which stabilizes the blur on the subject caused by hand-shake
during recording. The cropped image will be saved in high-
definition picture quality.
[Manual Tracking
Crop]
Allows you to touch the subject you want to track, trace its
movement with your finger, and save a cropped image
showing the area around the traced line in high-definition
picture quality.
[Fixed Crop]
Allows you to specify the area to be cropped from a recorded
image as a close-up scene and save the cropped image in
high-definition picture quality.
[Zooming Crop]
Allows you to save a cropped image that changes its position
and size in high-definition picture quality after setting the
cropping positions and sizes for start and end points.
[Stabilizing Crop]
Allows you to save a cropped image to which a correction
effect that stabilizes the blur on the subject caused by hand-
shake during recording is applied in high-definition picture
quality.
A cropped image that starts from the beginning of the
original scenes will be saved.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 127 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 128 -
1 Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.
To uch [OK ] .
2 Perform playback operations to set a preview start point.
You will find it convenient to use slow playback and frame-by-frame playback. (l 120)
Pause the scene at the desired start point.
3 Switch the image stabilizer button to ON or
OFF.
Subjects in the half-transparent area cannot be locked
as targets when the Image Stabiliser is set to ON.
The default setting is [ON].
4 Touch the subject to lock the target.
A Target frame
B Cropping frame
The cropping frame B will be displayed in a size that
matches the subject.
To touch another subject, touch .
5 Touch .
A preview will start.
6 Touch to end the preview.
A confirmation message appears.
Touch [EXIT] to end the preview.
Notes on the target frame
If the target frame fails to lock the target, it will flash red and then disappear.
Touch a distinct portion of the subject (colour, etc.), or reset the preview start point and then lock
the target again.
When a preview is played back until the end of the scene or the playback time of a preview
exceeds 20 minutes (approx.), the preview will end automatically.
If you save the image, the previewed portion (from the start point to the end point) will be saved.
Depending on the portion you touch, you may not be able to track or lock another subject in
situations such as the following:
j When another subject is too large or small
j When the background and another subject are similar in colour
j When you have touched a dark portion
Applying [Auto Tracking Crop]
ONON
0h00m15s0h00m15s0h00m15s

HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 128 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 129 -
1 Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.
To uch [OK ] .
2 Perform playback operations to set a preview start point.
You will find it convenient to use slow playback and frame-by-frame playback. (l 120)
Pause the scene at the desired start point.
4 Touch .
To uch [OK ] .
5 Touch the playback button or the part you want
to crop to play back the scene.
Playback starts automatically if you touch the screen.
You can move the cropping frame by dragging it with
your finger.
6 Touch to set the end point.
A preview will start.
Playback automatically stops when the scene is played back to the end of the recording or the
playback time exceeds 20 minutes (approx.).
If you save the scene, the portion that has been played back (the section between the start point
and the end point) will be saved.
Applying [Manual Tracking Crop]
3 Adjust the size and position of the cropping
frame for the start point.
Touching will change the cropping frame’s size
and colour. (White # Yellow)
The frame size switches between two settings each
time you touch the icon.
You can move the cropping frame by touching the
screen.
If you leave the screen untouched, the cropping
frame’s size and position will be set automatically.
Cropping frame
0h00m15s0h00m15s0h00m15s
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 129 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 130 -
1 Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.
To uch [OK ] .
2 Perform playback operations to set a preview start point.
You will find it convenient to use slow playback and frame-by-frame playback. (l 120)
Pause the scene at the desired start point.
3 Adjust the size and position of the cropping
frame for the start point.
Touching will change the cropping frame’s size
and colour. (White # Yellow)
The frame size switches between two settings each
time you touch the icon.
You can move the cropping frame by touching the
screen.
If you leave the screen untouched, the cropping frame’s size and position will be set
automatically.
4 Touch .
5 Set the end point.
A preview will start. It can be stopped midway.
(If you have selected [Until stop position])
Touch to set the end point.
Touch [EXIT].
To change the end point, touch [Continue] to resume the preview.
(If you have selected [Until end])
When a preview is played back for 1 hour (approx.), it automatically ends. If you save the scene,
the portion between the start point and the end of the scene will be saved. If the playback time of
the scene from the start point exceeds 1 hour, the 1 hour (approx.) portion starting from the start
point will be saved.
(If you have selected [Until stop position])
When a preview is played back until the end of the scene or the playback time exceeds 1 hour
(approx.), the preview will end automatically. If you save the image, the previewed portion (the
section between the start point and the end point) will be saved.
Applying [Fixed Crop]
[Until stop position]/[Until end]
0h00m15s0h00m15s0h00m15s
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 130 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 131 -
1 Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.
To uch [OK ] .
2 Perform playback operations to set a preview start point.
Set a start point so that the length between the start point and end point will be at least
3 second long (approx.).
You will find it convenient to use slow playback and frame-by-frame playback. (l 120)
Pause the scene at the desired start point.
4 Touch .
5 Touch the desired zoom speed.
The scene will be skipped to the end point. Depending on the set zoom speed, the end point
will vary.
To uch [OK ] .
6 Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame for the end point.
The cropping frame for the end point will be displayed in the same position as the cropping
frame for the start point.
The cropping frame for the start point is indicated in grey, while the cropping frame for the
end point is indicated in white.
To reset the cropping frame for the start point, touch .
Perform the same operations as Step 3 to change the size and position of the cropping
frame.
7 Touch .
A preview will start.
You cannot apply this function to scenes shorter than 3 seconds (approx.).
Applying [Zooming Crop]
3 Adjust the size and position of the cropping
frame for the start point.
Touching will change the cropping frame’s size
and colour. (White # Yellow)
The size will change in the following order each time
you touch the icon:
Large # Medium # Small
You can change the position of the medium- or small-
sized cropping frame by touching the screen.
If you leave the screen untouched, the cropping
frame’s size and position will be set automatically.
Cropping frame
[Fast]/[Slow]
0h00m15s0h00m15s0h00m15s
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 131 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 132 -
1 Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.
To uch [OK ] .
2 Touch .
A preview will start from the beginning of the scene.
When a preview is played back for 1 hour (approx.), it automatically ends. If you save the image,
the entire scene from the beginning to the end will be saved. If the playback time of the scene
exceeds 1 hour, the first 1 hour (approx.) of the scene will be saved.
You can save a previewed scene as one scene.
(For the //////)
The recorded scenes can be saved in the SD card.
(For the )
The recorded scenes can be saved in the built-in memory.
1 End a preview.
2 Touch [SAVE].
3 Touch [YES].
If you are using the battery, a message recommending that you use the AC adaptor will be
displayed. To start the saving operation, touch [START].
4 (For the //////)
Touch [EXIT].
(For the )
Touch [COPY] or [EXIT].
You can copy the saved scene to the SD card. Select [COPY] to copy it to the SD card.
Operate according to the message and touch [EXIT] at the end.
You can save scenes even when using the battery, but we recommend that you use the AC
adaptor.
Scenes will be saved in different ways depending on their 4K Cropping setting.
j [Auto Tracking Crop]: Only the previewed portion is saved.
j [Manual Tracking Crop]: Only the portion that has been played back is saved.
j [Fixed Crop]: If [Until end] is selected, a portion between the start position and the end of the
scene is saved.
If [Until stop position] is selected, only the previewed portion is saved.
j [Zooming Crop]: A portion from the start point to the end point is saved.
j [Stabilizing Crop]: The entire scene from the beginning to the end or the first 1 hour (approx.) of
the scene will be saved.
(When saving a scene to which [Fixed Crop] is applied)
If the length of the cropped scene is long, it may take some time to save it.
A scene exceeding 4 GB (approx.) or 30 minutes (approx.) will be automatically divided.
(When saving a scene to which [Stabilizing Crop] is applied)
It may take time to save a long scene.
A scene exceeding 4 GB (approx.) or 30 minutes (approx.) will be automatically divided.
Applying [Stabilizing Crop]
Saving previews
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800 V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 132 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 133 -
Highlight Playback
Part that was recognised as clearly recorded is extracted from multiple scenes, and it can be played
back or stored in a short time with effects and music added.
It is also possible to create an original Highlight Playback by checking your favourite scenes and
setting up to extract those scenes.
1 Touch . (l 26)
2 (When step 1 is performed on an MP4 scene when thumbnails
are displayed)
Touch the recording format of the scene to be
played back.
(For the series/ series/ series)
(For the series)
3 Touch the desired effect.
The scenes matching the effect will be extracted and displayed in the thumbnail view.
Effects such as fade, slow-motion, still (pause), or digest playback are inserted.
The date at playback is the date that was last recorded in an extracted scene.
To change the settings, refer to page 135.
4 Touch in the thumbnail view.
5 Select the playback operation. (l 39)
When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY], [SAVE] (l 138),
[SELECT AGAIN] or [EXIT] is displayed. Touch the desired item.
Highlight Playback is not available for the following scenes :
s 24p scenes
s Scenes recorded with Creative Control Mode (l 68), HDR Movie Mode (l 54, 71) and
FULL HD Slow Motion Video (l 74, 78)
s Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera
s (For the series/ series/ series)
Scenes recorded as 4K Cropping (l 126)
s Scenes saved as Highlight Playback
s Scenes saved as manually-edited scenes (l 139)
[2160/25p]/[1080/50p]/[1080/25p]/[720/25p]/[360/25p]
[1080/50p]/[720/25p]
[POP]: Recommended for party scene.
[NATURAL]: Recommended for scenery.
[CLASSICAL]: Recommended for slow moving scene.
[DYNAMIC]: Recommended for fast moving scene such as sports scene.
[CUSTOM]: Set the combination of the effect and the music. (l 134)
ALL
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 133 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 134 -
s (For the //////)
Scenes that were converted to MP4 scenes and copied (with the MP4 conversion
function) (l 155)
*
(For the )
Scenes that were converted to MP4 scenes and copied (with the MP4 conversion
function or recording format conversion function) (l 155, 167)
*
s (For the series/ series/ series)
Scenes recorded with Slow & Quick Video Mode (l 73) and Dolly Zoom Mode (l 76)
* Excluding scenes that were converted from 4K MP4 scenes.
(For the series/ series/ series)
Skip Playback, Slow-motion Playback, Frame-by-frame Playback and Direct Playback are not
possible.
Setting up the custom effect
It is possible to enjoy the Highlight Playback with your favourite effect by setting up the combination
of an image effect and music.
1 Touch [CUSTOM].
2 Touch [EFFECT SETUP] or [MUSIC SELECT].
3
(When [EFFECT SETUP] is selected)
Touch the desired effect.
When [EFFECT SETUP] is changed, [MUSIC SELECT] will be
set the same as [EFFECT SETUP]. (To set [EFFECT SETUP]
and [MUSIC SELECT] to different settings, change
[MUSIC SELECT] after setting [EFFECT SETUP].)
(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)
Touch the desired sound.
[USER BGM] lets you use the music stored on your smartphone. To set [USER BGM], use the
Wi-Fi function [Remote Ctrl] and create Highlight Playback from the smartphone app “Image
App”. The music data will be saved in this unit as [USER BGM].
Only one track can be saved in this unit as music data for [USER BGM]. Each time you create
Highlight Playback using the “Image App”, music data will be replaced.
For information on the file format and playback time of music data that can be used as [USER
BGM], refer to the “Image App”.
To delete the music data saved as [USER BGM] in this unit, perform [DELETE USER BGM].
(l 48)
When [EFFECT SETUP] is set to [NONE], you will be able to select [NO MUSIC].
When [NO MUSIC] is selected, the audio recorded at the time of shooting is played back.
(To test the music audio)
Touch [START].
Touch the other music option to change the music to be tested.
When you touch [STOP], the music playback stops.
4 Touch [ENTER].
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 134 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 135 -
Touch [SET] to select the item to change.
*1 If you touch [SET] of Highlight Playback when the Baby Calendar is displayed, [SELECT DATE]
and [SELECT SCENES] will not be available. (l 143)
*2 If you touch [SET] of Highlight Playback when the Baby Calendar is displayed, these items will
not be displayed. (l 143)
When you have finished changing the settings, touch [EXIT].
Scene setting
1 (When Highlight Playback is started while displaying AVCHD scene thumbnails)
Touch the recording format of the scene to be played back.
2 Touch [SELECT DATE] or [SELECT SCENES].
3
(When [SELECT DATE] is selected)
Touch the date to be played back.
A maximum of 7 days can be selected.
When touched, the date is selected and surrounded by red. Touch the date again to cancel the
operation.
(When [SELECT SCENES] is selected)
Touch the scenes to be played back.
Up to 99 scenes can be selected in succession.
When touched, the scene is selected and is displayed. Touch the scene again to cancel the
operation.
4 Touch [Enter]/[ENTER].
Playing back with the settings changed
[SCENE SETUP]
*1
:
Select the scene or date to be played back.
[FAVOURITE SCENE SETUP]
*2
:
Set up the favourite scenes. (l 136)
[FAVOURITE SCENE PLAY]
*2
:
Set up if the favourite scenes are to be included in the Highlight
Playback or not. (l 136)
[PRIORITY SETUP]:
Select the target to give priority to play back. (l 136)
[PLAYBACK TIME]:
Select the time to play back. (l 137)
[TITLE SETUP]:
Select the title sheet to be displayed at the beginning, and enter
the title. (l 137)
[1080/50p]/[1080/50i]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 135 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 136 -
Checking the favourite scenes
1 Touch the scenes to be played back.
2 Touch [Add] and add the favourite part.
Approximately 4 seconds before and after touching [Add] will be
added as favourite.
Number of favourite scenes that can be added are 1 to 14.
(Number of scenes that can be added differs depending on the
scenes selected.)
Favourite check display (A) is displayed in orange, and
favourite check display B is displayed on the slide bar.
To cancel the favourite, play back to the position checked as
favourite, and touch [Cancel].
It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-
frame Playback. (l 120)
3 Touch and stop the playback.
It will return to the thumbnail display screen and ¡ is displayed
on the scenes added as favourite scenes.
4 Touch [Return].
All the scenes checked as favourite may not be played back depending on the playback time
setting. (l 137)
Parts added as favourite scenes are not recognised as registered scenes for “Tagging Favorite
Scene” (l 145).
To clear the favourite scenes from the thumbnail display
1 Touch [Reset].
2 Touch [RESET ALL] or [RESET SELECTED].
The check on all the favourite scenes will be cleared when
[RESET ALL] is selected.
3 (When [RESET SELECTED] is selected in Step 2)
Touch the scene to be cleared.
Playing back the favourite scenes
Touch [ON] or [OFF].
Priority settings
Touch [NONE] or [FACE].
If you touch [FACE], priority is given to the part detected as a face.
[ON]: Include the scenes added in the [FAVOURITE SCENE SETUP] into the Highlight
Playback.
[OFF]: Do not include the scenes added in the [FAVOURITE SCENE SETUP] into the
Highlight Playback.
0h01m30s
0h01m30s
0h01m30s
0h01m30s0h01m30s0h01m30s
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 136 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 137 -
Playback time setting
Touch the playback time.
The playback time of [AUTO] is a maximum of approx. 5 minutes.
Playback time may become shorter than the setting, or it may not even be played back if the part
recognised as clearly recorded is short.
Setting up the title
1 Touch / to select your favourite title sheet.
Title and date will not be displayed when [NONE] is selected.
Entering text
The characters can be conveniently input without moving the cursor when the [Auto Cursor
Position] is set to [ON]. (l 48)
A maximum of 18 characters can be entered.
4 Touch [ENTER] to end registration.
The date of the first scene of the Highlight Playback will be displayed as the date.
The entered title will be cleared when the unit is turned off or the Highlight Playback is finished.
[APPROX 90 SEC.]/[APPROX 3 MIN.]/[AUTO]
[NONE]/[PICTURE 1]/[PICTURE 2]/[PICTURE 3]/[PICTURE 4]
2 Touch [TITLE].
3 Enter the title.
Touch the text entry icon in the centre of the screen and enter
the title.
After entering the title, touch [Enter].
A Text entry icon
Icon Description of operation
[A] etc. Enters a character.
/ Moves the cursor to left or right.
[A/a/1] Switches between [A]/[a] (alphabet) and [&/1] (symbols/numbers).
Enters a space.
[Delete]
Deletes a character.
Deletes the previous character if the cursor is in an empty space.
[Enter] Ends text entry.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 137 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 138 -
The scenes put together as a Highlight Playback can be saved as a single scene.
(For the //////)
The recorded scenes can be saved in the SD card.
(For the )
The recorded scenes can be saved in the built-in memory.
1 Stop the playback of the Highlight Playback or wait until the Highlight
Playback is finished.
2 Touch [SAVE].
3 Select the format to save.
*1 This format is displayed only when an AVCHD scene is selected.
*2 This format is not displayed when an AVCHD scene is selected.
*3 [MP4 1920k1080/25p] cannot be selected when an MP4 [720/25p] scene is selected.
*4 [MP4 1920k1080/25p] and [MP4 1280k720/25p] cannot be selected when an MP4 [360/25p]
scene is selected.
(When [AVCHD 1920k1080/50i] is selected)
Scenes recorded in 1080/50p are converted to 1080/50i (picture quality [HA] of [REC MODE])
and saved.
Scenes recorded in 1080/50i are recorded in [HA] regardless of [REC MODE] ([PH]/[HA]/[HG]/
[HE]) of a scene.
4 Touch [YES].
5
(For the //////)
Touch [EXIT].
(For the )
Touch [COPY] or [EXIT].
The Highlight Playback saved in the built-in memory can be copied to the SD card. To copy
to the SD card, select [COPY].
Operate according to the message and touch [EXIT] at the end.
is displayed on the thumbnail of the scenes saved by the Highlight Playback.
Saving the Highlight Playback
[AVCHD 1920k1080/50i]
*1
: It will be saved in high-definition image quality.
[MP4 1920k1080/25p]
*2, 3, 4
: It will be saved in high-definition image quality. The format
supports playback on a PC.
[MP4 1280k720/25p]
*4
: It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it
on the Internet in higher image quality. The format supports
playback on a PC.
[MP4 640k360/25p]: It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it
on the Internet faster. The format supports playback on a PC.
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800 V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 138 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 139 -
Manual Edit
You can join desired AVCHD scenes, scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera or parts of these
scenes in the order they were recorded to play back or save as a single scene with music added.
Touch [AVCHD] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch [1080/50p] or [1080/50i].
Touch [Enter].
Thumbnails are displayed by each scene.
3 Select the scene or part of the scene to play back, and set the music.
To select a scene (l 140)
To select part of a scene (l 140)
To set the music (l 141)
Touching [Return] after selecting a scene may cancel the selected scene.
4 Touch [Enter].
5 Touch [YES], and select the playback operation for the edited scene. (l 39)
In the following cases, the screen for selecting [PREVIEW], [SAVE] (l 142), [SELECT AGAIN],
and [EXIT] is displayed. Touch the desired item.
j Touch [NO]
j Playback finishes
j Stop playback
You can also select combinations of scenes and parts of scenes.
You can select up to 99 scenes. (Each 3 second thumbnail of part of a scene is treated as a
single scene.)
You can create a combined scene of up to about 6 hours long.
Skip Playback, Slow-motion Playback, Frame-by-frame Playback and Direct Playback are not
possible.
(For the //////)
When saving a manually edited scene, check the free space on the SD card.
(For the )
When saving a manually edited scene, check the free space on the built-in memory.
Before selecting the scene, check the table below and create sufficient free space for saving it.
: [EDIT SCENE] # [MANUAL EDIT]
MENU
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 139 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 140 -
(Approximate free space requirements for saving a manually edited scene)
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.
To select a scene
Touch the scene to be played back.
The scene selection is made as you touch it, and the indication appears on the thumbnail. To
cancel the operation, touch the scene again.
When part of a scene has been selected, the indication appears on the thumbnail. If you
touch the thumbnail, the scene will be displayed by 3 second thumbnails.
Next (previous) page is displayed by touching / .
To select part of a scene
1 Touch [3 sec].
To cancel the operation, touch it again.
2 Touch the desired scene.
The touched scene is displayed by 3 second thumbnails.
3 (To select a single thumbnail)
Touch the thumbnail of the part you want to play back.
The thumbnail selection is made as you touch it, and the indication (white) appears on the
thumbnail. To cancel the selection, touch the thumbnail again.
Next (previous) thumbnail is displayed by touching / .
Touching [Return] when the thumbnail has been selected returns you to the screen that displays
the thumbnails of scenes. The indication appears on the thumbnail of the scene
containing the selected part.
Saving format
Total time of an edited
scene
Free space required
[AVCHD 1920k1080/50i]
30 min Approx. 4 GB
1 h Approx. 8 GB
[MP4 1280k720/25p]
30 min Approx. 2 GB
1 h Approx. 4 GB
[MP4 640k360/25p]
30 min Approx. 0.4 GB
1 h Approx. 0.8 GB
3S
3S
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 140 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 141 -
4 (To select thumbnails by specifying a range)
Touch [Range].
To cancel the operation, touch it again.
You can also select multiple ranges within the same scene.
Next (previous) thumbnail is displayed by touching / .
To select other scenes, touch [Return] to return to the screen that displays the thumbnails of
scenes, and perform the following operations.
j When selecting a scene:
Touch the desired scene.
j When selecting part of a scene:
Perform the operations in Steps 1-5.
To set the music
1 Touch [Music].
2 Touch the desired sound.
[USER BGM] lets you use the music stored on your smartphone. To set [USER BGM], use the
Wi-Fi function [Remote Ctrl] and create Highlight Playback from the smartphone app “Image
App”. The music data will be saved in this unit as [USER BGM].
Only one track can be saved in this unit as music data for [USER BGM]. Each time you create
Highlight Playback using the “Image App”, music data will be replaced.
For information on the file format and playback time of music data that can be used as [USER
BGM], refer to the “Image App”.
To delete the music data saved as [USER BGM] in this unit, perform [DELETE USER BGM].
(l 48)
When [NO MUSIC] is selected, the audio recorded at the time of shooting is played back.
(To test the music audio)
Touch [START].
Touch the other music option to change the music to be tested.
When you touch [STOP], the music playback stops.
3 Touch [ENTER].
5
(To select thumbnails by specifying a range)
Touch the range (start and finish points) you want
to play back.
The range between start and finish points are selected, and the
indication (white) appears on the thumbnails.
To cancel the selected thumbnails, from among the thumbnails
with the indication (white), touch the range (start and finish
points) you want to cancel.
If you touch [Enter]/[Return]/[Music]/[Range] when a start point
has been selected, the start point thumbnail will be cancelled.
Touching [Return] when the thumbnail has been selected
returns you to the screen that displays the thumbnails of scenes.
The indication appears on the thumbnail of the scene
containing the selected part.
A Start point
B Finish point
3S
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 141 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 142 -
To save a manually-edited scene
You can save manually edited scenes as a single scene.
(For the //////)
The recorded scenes can be saved in the SD card.
(For the )
The recorded scenes can be saved in the built-in memory.
1 Stop the playback of a manually-edited scene or wait until the playback is
finished.
2 Touch [SAVE].
3 Select the format to save.
(When [AVCHD 1920k1080/50i] is selected)
Scenes recorded in 1080/50p are converted to 1080/50i (picture quality [HA] of [REC MODE])
and saved.
Scenes recorded in 1080/50i are recorded in [HA] regardless of [REC MODE] ([PH]/[HA]/[HG]/
[HE]) of a scene.
4 Touch [YES].
If you are using the battery, a message recommending that you use the AC adaptor will be
displayed. To start the saving operation, touch [START].
5 (For the //////)
Touch [EXIT].
(For the )
Touch [COPY] or [EXIT].
Scenes saved in the built-in memory can be copied to the SD card. To copy to the SD card,
select [COPY].
Operate according to the message and touch [EXIT] at the end.
You can save scenes even when using the battery, but we recommend that you use the AC
adaptor.
Manually-edited scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as normal AVCHD or
MP4 scenes.
For information on the approximate free space requirements for saving a manually edited scene,
refer to page 140.
[AVCHD 1920k1080/50i]: It will be saved in high-definition image quality.
[MP4 1280k720/25p]: It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it on
the Internet in higher image quality. The format supports playback
on a PC.
[MP4 640k360/25p]: It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it on
the Internet faster. The format supports playback on a PC.
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 142 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 143 -
Baby Calendar
When a baby’s birthday and name are registered, scenes recorded since the baby’s birthday are
displayed as thumbnails for each age in months.
You cannot select scenes recorded as 24p or Backup for Twin Camera.
Scenes recorded before the birthday are not displayed.
Scenes with no baby in them are also displayed.
You can register up to 3 babies.
1 Touch .
2 (When registering for the first time)
Enter the babys birthday.
Touch the date to be set, then set the desired value using / .
The year can be set between 2000 and 2039.
Touch [Enter].
3 (When registering for the first time)
Touch [YES], and enter the babys name.
If you touch [NO], the Baby Calendar will be displayed without the baby’s name registered.
([Baby 1] is displayed.)
Input method is same operation as for setting up the title. (l 137)
After entering the name, touch [Enter].
A maximum of 9 characters can be entered.
Except for months with no recordings, the age in months display is available for each month.
MENU
4 Check the Baby Calendar.
The name of the registered baby and its age in months are
displayed.
You can switch the age in months display by touching
/.
A Name display
B Age in months display
C Thumbnail for the
previous age in months
D Thumbnail for the next
age in months
: Changes the age in months display to that of
the previous month
If you touch this icon when the youngest age in months is
displayed, the oldest age in months will be displayed.
: Changes the age in months display to that of
the next month
If you touch this icon when the oldest age in months is
displayed, the youngest age in months will be displayed.
MENU

HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 143 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 144 -
If you touch the name display, the screen for selecting a registered baby is displayed. From
among the 3 registered babies, select the baby you want to display, and touch [ENTER].
If you touch a name with no registered birthday ([Baby 1]/[Baby 2]/[Baby 3]), you can register a
new baby. Perform step 2-3.
5 Touch the thumbnail in the centre.
The thumbnails of the scenes recorded in the same age in months are displayed. Touch the
desired scene to select the playback operation. (l 39)
The thumbnail display cannot be set to 1 scene/6 scenes display or to the Time Frame Index.
You cannot perform Highlight Playback if the number of scenes exceeds 99.
Touching returns you to the screen that lets you select the age in months.
To return to the normal thumbnail display
Touch the while the Baby Calendar is displayed.
To change/add a baby’s registered details
1 Touch the name display on the Baby Calendar (
l 143) or select the menu.
2 Touch the name of the baby whose details are to be changed.
When [Baby 1]/[Baby 2]/[Baby 3] is displayed, the birthday and name or name only are not
registered.
3 Touch the desired item.
The setting method is the same as when registering for the first time. (l 143)
4 Touch [ENTER].
The Baby Calendar of the registered baby is displayed.
To delete a baby’s registered details
1 Touch the name display on the Baby Calendar (
l 143) or select the menu.
2 Touch the name of the baby whose details are to be deleted.
3 Touch [DELETE].
To delete the registered details of other babies, repeat Steps 2 to 3.
When the Baby Calendar is displayed, the following operations are not available:
j (For the series/ series/
series)
4K Cropping
j Tagging Favorite Scene
j [SCENE PROTECT]
j [SECTION DELETE]
j [DIVIDE]
j [MANUAL EDIT]
j [SPLIT&DELETE]
j [CONVERT TO MP4]
j [Slow Speed Conversion]
(For the )
j [RELAY SCENE COMBINE]
j [RELAY INFO CANCEL]
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [Baby Calendar Setup]
Name: Register/change the name.
Birthday: Register/change the birthday.
: [VIDEO SETUP] # [Baby Calendar Setup]
MENU
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 144 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 145 -
Tagging Favorite Scene
[WXF1] series/[VXF1] series/[VX1] series
You can extract portions of a 4K MP4 scene that were recognised by this unit as clearly recorded or
that you registered as favourite scenes while recording the 4K MP4 scene, and save the extracted
portions as still pictures.
For information on the registration of favourite scenes, refer to page 37.
Touch [MP4] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Touch .
To uch [OK ] .
2 Touch the desired scene.
Scenes to which favourite scenes are registered are displayed with the indication.
Protected scenes cannot be selected.
3 Touch [SAVE ALL] or [SAVE SELECTED].
Touching [SAVE ALL] will save all the pictures to the same media as where the selected
scene is stored.
4 (When you have touched [SAVE SELECTED] in Step 3)
Touch [OK], and select the pictures to be saved.
Pictures registered as favourite scenes are displayed with
the indication.
Touch a thumbnail to select the picture. will be
displayed. To cancel the selected picture, touch the
thumbnail again.
5 (When you have touched [SAVE SELECTED] in Step 3)
Touch [Enter].
The pictures will be saved to the same media as where the selected scene is stored.
This function is not available for playback using (USB HDD).
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 145 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 146 -
Changing the playback settings and playing back the
slide show
1 Touch . (l 26)
2 (Only when you would like to change the settings)
Touch [SET] to select the item to change.
* Setting is not possible when the operation in Step 1 is performed while thumbnails in the Stop
Motion Animation Assist Mode are displayed. (l 148)
3 (When [DATE SETUP] is selected)
Touch the playback date.
(When [SLIDES INTERVAL] is selected)
Touch the interval of playback for the slide show.
(When [EFFECT SETUP] is selected)
Touch the desired effect.
Touch [ENTER].
When [EFFECT SETUP] is changed, [MUSIC SELECT] will be
set the same as [EFFECT SETUP]. (To set [EFFECT SETUP]
and [MUSIC SELECT] to different settings, change
[MUSIC SELECT] after setting [EFFECT SETUP].)
[SLIDES INTERVAL] cannot be set, when [EFFECT SETUP] is set.
ALL
[DATE SETUP]: Select the date to be played back.
[SLIDES INTERVAL]
*
: Select the interval between still pictures at playback.
[EFFECT SETUP]
*
: Select the effect for playback.
[MUSIC SELECT]: Select the music to be played on playback.
[SHORT]: Approx. 1 second
[NORMAL]: Approx. 5 seconds
[LONG]: Approx. 15 seconds
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 146 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 147 -
(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)
Touch the desired sound.
[USER BGM] lets you use the music stored on your smartphone. To set [USER BGM], use the
Wi-Fi function [Remote Ctrl] and create Highlight Playback from the smartphone app “Image
App”. The music data will be saved in this unit as [USER BGM].
Only one track can be saved in this unit as music data for [USER BGM]. Each time you create
Highlight Playback using the “Image App”, music data will be replaced.
For information on the file format and playback time of music data that can be used as [USER
BGM], refer to the “Image App”.
To delete the music data saved as [USER BGM] in this unit, perform [DELETE USER BGM].
(l 48)
Touch [ENTER].
(To test the music audio)
Touch [START] and start the audio testing.
Touch the other music option to change the music to be tested.
When you touch [STOP], the music playback stops.
4 Touch [START].
5 Select the playback operation. (l 39)
When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY], [SELECT AGAIN] or
[EXIT] is displayed. Touch the desired item.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 147 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 148 -
Playing back still pictures recorded in Stop Motion
Animation Assist Mode as a slide show
For details on recording in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode, refer to page 79.
1 Touch .
The recording group created most recently in Stop Motion
Animation Assist Mode is displayed.
Touching again, returns the display to the normal thumbnail
display.
2 Touch a thumbnail to play back the slide show.
The thumbnail display cannot be set to 6 scenes display.
3 Select the playback operation. (l 39)
The display returns to the thumbnail display when playback is
finished or stopped.
To play back other recording groups:
You can play back other recording groups by touching the date select icon.
2 Touch the playback date.
Touch a date with the indication.
Recording groups in the selected date are displayed.
Touch a thumbnail to play back the slide show.
Slide shows can be played back with settings changed. (l 146)
The recording group played back as a slideshow cannot be saved as a single scene.
1 Touch the date select icon.
A Date select icon
MENU
NEW
MENU
NEW
MENU
NEW
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 148 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 149 -
¬ Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback Mode.
To delete the scene or still picture being played back
Touch while scenes or still pictures to be deleted
are being played back.
To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display
Switch to the thumbnail display of the scenes or still pictures to delete. (l 38)
1 Touch . (l 26)
When the thumbnail display is 1 scene display or Time Frame
Index, the scene or still picture being displayed is deleted.
When the thumbnails of still pictures recorded in Stop Motion
Animation Assist Mode are displayed, the still pictures cannot be
deleted. (l 148)
2 Touch [ALL SCENES], [MULTI] or [SINGLE].
All the scenes or still pictures displayed as thumbnails will be
deleted by selecting [ALL SCENES].
(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the
scenes or still pictures on the selected date will be deleted.)
Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.
3 (When [MULTI] is selected in Step 2)
Touch the scene/still picture to be deleted.
When touched, the scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail.
Touch the scene/still picture again to cancel the operation.
Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.
(When [SINGLE] is selected in Step 2)
Touch the scene/still picture to be deleted.
4 (When [MULTI] is selected in Step 2)
Touch [Delete].
To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.
Advanced (Playback)
Deleting scenes/still pictures
Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate confirmation of
the contents before proceeding with deletion.
0h01m30s0h01m30s0h01m30s
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 149 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 150 -
When you stop deleting halfway:
Touch [CANCEL] while deleting.
The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is cancelled cannot
be restored.
To complete editing:
Touch [Return].
You can also delete scenes by touching , selecting [EDIT SCENE] # [DELETE] # [ALL
SCENES], [MULTI] or [SINGLE].
You can also delete still pictures by touching , selecting [PHOTO SETUP] # [DELETE] #
[ALL SCENES], [MULTI] or [SINGLE].
When the thumbnails of still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode are
displayed, the still pictures cannot be deleted from the menu. (l 148)
Deletion is not possible in the following situations:
j (For the series/ series/ series)
During 4K Cropping preview
j During Highlight Playback
Scenes that cannot be played back (the thumbnails are displayed as ) cannot be deleted.
In case of [ALL SCENES], the deletion may take time if there are many scenes or still pictures.
If you delete scenes recorded on other products or still pictures conforming to DCF standard with
this unit, all the data related to the scenes/still pictures may be deleted.
When still pictures recorded on an SD card by other products are deleted, a still picture (other
than JPEG) that cannot be played back on this unit, may be erased.
MENU
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 150 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 151 -
Deleting part of a scene
(AVCHD/Backup for Twin Camera)
Unnecessary part of an AVCHD scene or a scene recorded as Backup for Twin Camera can be
deleted.
The deleted scenes cannot be restored.
Touch [AVCHD] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch the scene with a part to delete.
3 Set the section to delete by touching and sliding
the top and bottom section selection buttons .
It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-
frame Playback. (l 120)
4 Touch [ENTER].
5 Confirm (play back) the scene after editing by touching [YES].
A confirmation message appears when [NO] is touched. Proceed to Step 7.
6 Stop the playback.
A confirmation message appears.
7 Touch [ENTER].
Repeat Steps 2-7 to continuously delete parts from other scenes.
To complete editing
Touch [Return].
Deleting a part of a scene cannot be performed when there are 99 scenes in a single date.
It may not be possible to delete part of a scene with a short recording time.
The scene will be divided into two scenes when the middle part of a scene is deleted.
(For the )
The relay information is deleted when part of a scene that was relay recorded is deleted, making
it impossible to perform the Relay scene combining. (l 158)
: [EDIT SCENE] # [SECTION DELETE]
MENU
0h00m15s
0h00m15s
0h00m15s
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 151 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 152 -
Dividing a scene (AVCHD/Backup for Twin Camera)
It is possible to divide an AVCHD scene or a scene recorded as Backup for Twin Camera.
Any unwanted parts in the scene can be deleted after dividing.
Touch [AVCHD] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch and play back the scene you want to divide.
It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback. (l 120)
3 Touch to set the dividing point.
Touch [YES].
Touch [YES] to continue dividing the same scene. To continue
dividing other scenes, touch [NO] and repeat Steps 2-3.
4 Touch [Return] to complete dividing.
Unwanted parts can be deleted. (l 149)
To delete all the divided points
The scenes that were deleted after division cannot be recovered.
You cannot divide a scene if the number of scenes of a given date would exceed 99 scenes.
It may not be possible to divide scenes with a short recording time.
Data that has been recorded or edited on another device cannot be divided and the divided points
cannot be deleted.
: [EDIT SCENE] # [DIVIDE] # [SET]
: [EDIT SCENE] # [DIVIDE] # [CANCEL ALL]
MENU
0h00m15s0h00m15s0h00m15s
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 152 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 153 -
Dividing a scene to partially delete (4K MP4, MP4)
Divide the 4K MP4 scenes
*
or MP4 scenes, and delete unnecessary parts.
This divides the recorded scenes in two and deletes the front half or back half.
The scenes deleted by dividing cannot be restored.
* For the series/ series/ series
Touch [MP4] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch and play back the scene you want to divide.
It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback. (l 120)
3 Touch to set the dividing point.
Set the dividing point so there will be 2 seconds or more for the
part for deletion, and 3 seconds or more for the part to be kept.
4 Touch the part for deletion ([FRONT] or [BACK]).
5 Touch [YES] and confirm (play back) the part for
deletion.
A confirmation message appears when [NO] is touched. Proceed to Step 7.
6 Stop the playback.
A confirmation message appears.
7 Touch [YES].
To continue dividing and deleting other scenes, repeat Steps 2-7.
To complete editing
Touch [Return].
[SPLIT&DELETE] is not available for 24p scenes.
It may not be possible to divide scenes with a short recording time.
The actual division may slightly slip off the previously designated dividing point.
: [EDIT SCENE] # [SPLIT&DELETE]
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
MENU
0h00m15s0h00m15s0h00m15s
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 153 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 154 -
Protecting scenes/still pictures
Scenes/still pictures can be protected so that they are not deleted by mistake.
(Even if you protect some scenes/still pictures, formatting the media will delete them.)
Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback Mode.
1 Select the menu.
* [TRANSFER/PROTECT] is displayed when using the Eye-Fi card that is set as the selected
transfer setting device in advance on the computer.
2 Touch the scene/still picture to be protected.
When touched, the scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the
thumbnail. Touch the scene/still picture again to cancel the operation.
Touch [Return] to complete the settings.
When the thumbnails of still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode are
displayed, protection cannot be set on the still pictures.
: [VIDEO SETUP] or [PHOTO SETUP] # [SCENE PROTECT]
*
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 154 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 155 -
You can convert and copy AVCHD scenes, scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera, and MP4
scenes. The image quality will be converted into a format that supports playback on a PC and online
sharing (MP4 (1280k720/25p) or MP4 (640k360/25p)).
(For the series/ series/ series)
4K MP4 scenes can also be converted to high-definition picture quality (MP4 (1920k1080/25p))
scenes and copied.
Touch [AVCHD] or [MP4] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch the scene you want to convert.
The scene selection is made as you touch it, and the indication appears on the thumbnail.
To cancel the operation, touch the scene again.
You can select up to 99 scenes in succession.
3 Touch [Enter].
4 Select the quality after conversion.
MP4 scenes after conversion are saved to the same media as the scenes before conversion.
5 Touch [YES].
To continue converting scenes to MP4, repeat steps 2 to 5.
Advanced (Playback)
Convert to MP4
: [EDIT SCENE] # [CONVERT TO MP4]
[FHD(1920k1080/25p)]
*1
: Convert to MP4 (1920k1080/25p) and copy.
[HD(1280k720/25p)]
*2
: Convert to MP4 (1280k720/25p) and copy.
[VGA(640k360/25p)]: Convert to MP4 (640k360/25p) and copy.
*1 (For the series/ series/ series)
This quality is displayed only when a 4K MP4 scene is selected.
*2 You cannot convert and copy MP4 [720/25p] scenes.
VXF1
VX1
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 155 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 156 -
To stop converting to MP4 halfway
Touch [CANCEL] during format conversion.
To exit the MP4 conversion
Touch [Return].
[CONVERT TO MP4] is not available for the following scenes:
s 24p scenes
s Scenes saved in MP4 (640k360/25p)
A scene recorded over a long time may take time.
When the following scenes are converted to MP4 scenes and copied, those exceeding 4 GB
(approx.) or 30 minutes (approx.) will be automatically divided.
j Scenes recorded with [1080/50M] of [MP4]
j (For the series/ series/ series)
4K MP4 scenes
j AVCHD scenes
j Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera
If you convert protected scenes to MP4, their protection will be cleared after the conversion.
Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as normal MP4 scenes when
converted to MP4 scenes and copied.
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 156 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 157 -
You can convert the playback speed of parts recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode (l 74,
78) to 1/4 normal speed, and copy them.
Once converting scenes recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode, you can play them back on
another device at 1/4 normal speed.
Touch [MP4] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Select the menu.
2 Touch a scene recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video.
On the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, scenes recorded as FULL HD Slow Motion Video are
displayed with the indication.
The scene selection is made as you touch it, and the indication appears on the thumbnail.
To cancel the operation, touch the scene again.
Up to 99 scenes can be selected in succession.
3 Touch [Enter].
The converted scene will be saved in the same medium as the one storing the original scene.
A message asking whether to delete the original scene will be displayed. To delete the scene,
select [YES]. To keep it, select [NO].
To cancel the slow speed conversion or the deletion of the original scene
midway
During the conversion or deletion, touch [CANCEL].
To exit the slow speed conversion
Touch [Return].
When a converted scene is recorded in a medium, the scene becomes larger in size than the
original one. The converted scene may be divided depending on its size.
It may take a while to convert a long scene.
If you perform [Slow Speed Conversion] on protected scenes, their protection will be cleared after
the conversion.
Advanced (Playback)
Slow speed conversion
: [EDIT SCENE] # [Slow Speed Conversion]
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 157 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 158 -
You can combine the relayed scene (l 104) in the built-in memory and the continued scene
in the SD card to be one into the SD card.
A Built-in memory
B SD card
C Range of Relay Recording
Touch [AVCHD] in the motion picture/still picture tab (l 38)
1 Insert the SD card that was used for Relay Recording.
2 Select the menu.
3 When the confirmation message appears, touch [YES].
Scene in the built-in memory will be deleted. (Protected scenes in the built-in memory are not
deleted.)
4 Touch [EXIT] when the relay scene combining complete message is
displayed.
The thumbnail view of the SD card is indicated.
Relay Recording information will be deleted when the relay scenes are combined, and Relay
Recording will be possible again.
When the relayed scenes in the built-in memory or SD card are deleted, combining of the relayed
scenes will not be possible.
Advanced (Playback)
Relay scene combining [WXF1M]
Relay-recorded scene Relay scene combining
: [EDIT SCENE] # [RELAY SCENE COMBINE]
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 158 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 159 -
To cancel relay information
When the relay information is cancelled, combining of the relayed scenes will not be possible
anymore.
[RELAY SCENE COMBINE] is not available for scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera.
: [EDIT SCENE] # [RELAY INFO CANCEL]
Combining of the relay scene cannot be performed if the available space on the SD card is less
than the volume of the relayed scene in the built-in memory. It is recommended to combine the
relay scene using the HD Writer AE 5.4.
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 159 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 160 -
Use the HDMI micro cable (supplied).
HDMI is the interface for digital devices. If you connect this unit to an HDMI compatible high-
definition TV and then play back the recorded high-definition images, you can enjoy them in high
resolution with high quality sound.
(For the series/ series/ series)
You can enjoy finely-detailed 4K motion pictures by connecting this unit to a TV that supports 4K
motion pictures and playing back 4K MP4 scenes or scenes recorded in the recording mode
[2160/24p].
Although the output resolution will be lower, you can also play them back by connecting this unit
to a high-definition TV or other device that does not support 4K motion pictures.
1 Connect this unit to a TV.
Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.
Do not use any other HDMI micro cable except the supplied one.
2 Select the video input on the TV.
Example:
Select the [HDMI] channel with an HDMI micro cable.
(The name of the channel may differ depending on the connected TV.)
Check the input setting (input switch) and the audio input setting on the TV. (For more
information, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)
3 Change the mode to to play back.
Advanced (Playback)
Watching Video/Pictures on your TV
A HDMI micro cable (supplied)
Be sure to connect to the HDMI terminal. (Insert the connector with the arrow side facing up.)
Connecting with an HDMI micro cable (l 162)
Listening in 5.1 channel sound (AVCHD) (l 163)
Playback using VIERA Link (l 164)
Picture quality
1 To play back images recorded in 4K
*
or high definition picture quality, connect this unit to the
HDMI terminal of the TV.
* For the series/ series/ series
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 160 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 161 -
When this unit and the TV are connected with the HDMI micro cable (supplied) in any of the
following situations, no image will be displayed on the TV. Use the LCD monitor of this unit.
j When recording a motion picture or using PRE-REC in HDR Movie Mode
j When [HDMI RESOLUTION] is set to [576p] in HDR Movie Mode
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
j When recording a motion picture with [Backup for Twin Camera] set to [ON] or during
PRE-REC
j When recording a motion picture with [REC FORMAT] set to [24p] or during PRE-REC
j When saving the Highlight Playback scene or a manually edited scene
j When copying
*1
/performing [CONVERT TO MP4]/performing [Slow Speed Conversion]
(For the series/ series/ series)
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4], when recording a motion picture in 4K Photo Mode
or during PRE-REC
j When saving a scene previewed with 4K Cropping
j Slow & Quick Video Mode
If you connect this unit to the TV when this unit is set to Recording Mode, a squealing sound
*2
may be output. Before connecting this unit, set it to Playback Mode.
When connected to the TV, sound in Playback Mode is not output from this unit. Also, since the
volume cannot be adjusted with this unit, adjust the volume of the TV.
Some screens, such as the menu screen, may be displayed in reduced sizes on the TV.
Image and audio is not output from this unit while using the Wi-Fi function.
*1 (For the )
When copying between the SD card and the built-in memory, this restriction applies only if you
convert the recording format
*2 The microphone may pick up the sound from the speakers, producing an abnormal sound.
To display the on-screen information on the TV
When the menu setting is changed, the information displayed on the screen (operation icon and
time code etc.) can be displayed/not displayed on the TV.
*3 This setting is only available in Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode.
: [SETUP] # [EXT. DISPLAY] # desired setting
[SIMPLE]
*3
: Information partially displayed
[DETAIL]: Detailed information displayed
[OFF]: Not displayed
VXF1
VX1
WXF1M
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 161 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 162 -
Connecting with an HDMI micro cable
Select the desired method of HDMI output.
(For the series/ series/ series)
[AUTO] determines the output resolution automatically based on information from the connected
TV.
If the images are not output on the TV when the setting is [AUTO], switch to the method [2160p],
[1080p], [1080i] or [576p] which enables the images to be displayed on your TV. (Please read the
operating instructions for the TV.)
Images may not be displayed on the television for several seconds in some cases, such as when
changing between scenes.
Even if you select [2160p], images are output in 1080p in the following cases:
j When this unit is connected to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD] or [MP4] in Recording Mode
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p] in Recording Mode
j When a scene other than a [4K MP4] or [2160/24p] scene is played back in Playback Mode
j When you start a 4K Cropping preview in Playback Mode
j When this unit is set to Still Picture Recording Mode or when you play back a still picture
You can output 2160/24p scenes
*1
in 24 frames per second by connecting this unit to a TV that
supports 4K motion picture and setting [HDMI RESOLUTION] to [AUTO] or [2160p].
However, the scenes cannot be output in 24 frames per second in the situations below. They will
instead be output in 1080/60p, 1080/60i or 480/60p. (The setting varies depending on the
specifications of the TV and the [HDMI RESOLUTION] setting.)
j When this unit is connected to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture
j When [HDMI RESOLUTION] is set to a setting other than [AUTO] or [2160p]
1080/24p scenes
*2
cannot be output in 24 frames per second and instead they will be output in
1080/60p, 1080/60i or 480/60p. (The setting varies depending on the specifications of the TV and
the [HDMI RESOLUTION] setting.)
*1 In Recording Mode: When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [2160/24p]
In Playback Mode: When 2160/24p scenes are played back
*2 In Recording Mode: When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p]
In Playback Mode: When 1080/24p scene are played back
(For the series)
[AUTO] determines the output resolution automatically based on information from the connected
TV.
If the images are not output on the TV when the setting is [AUTO], switch to the method [1080p],
[1080i] or [576p] which enables the images to be displayed on your TV. (Please read the
operating instructions for the TV.)
Images may not be displayed on the television for several seconds in some cases, such as when
changing between scenes.
1080/24p scenes
*
cannot be output in 24 frames per second and instead they will be output in
1080/60p, 1080/60i or 480/60p. (The setting varies depending on the specifications of the TV and
the [HDMI RESOLUTION] setting.)
* In Recording Mode: When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p]
In Playback Mode: When 1080/24p scene are played back
: [SETUP] # [HDMI RESOLUTION] # [AUTO]/[2160p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/[576p]
: [SETUP] # [HDMI RESOLUTION] # [AUTO]/[1080p]/[1080i]/[576p]
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
MENU
V800
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 162 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 163 -
Listening in 5.1 channel sound (AVCHD)
You still can listen to the 5.1 channel sound recorded from the internal microphones when this unit is
connected to the 5.1 channel compatible AV amplifier or TV using the HDMI micro cable.
Please read the AV amplifier and TV operating instructions for how to connect this unit to the AV
amplifier and TV.
If you connect this unit to a Panasonic AV amplifier that are compatible with VIERA Link, linked
operations (VIERA Link) become possible. (l 164)
Audio recorded with [5.1ch/2ch] set to [2ch] or audio recorded from a connected external
microphone or audio device
*
is recorded in stereo (2 ch).
* You can connect audio equipment when using the series/ series.
WXF1
VXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 163 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 164 -
¬ Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback Mode.
1 Select the menu.
If you are not using VIERA Link, set to [OFF].
2 Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with an
HDMI micro cable. (
l 160)
It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2 or
more HDMI input terminals on the TV.
VIERA Link must be activated on the connected TV. (Read the operating instructions of the TV for
how to set etc.)
3 Operate with the remote control for the TV.
You can select the scene or picture you want to play back by pressing the button up, down, left or
right, and then the button in the centre.
Advanced (Playback)
Playback using VIERA Link
What is the VIERA Link (HDAVI Control
)?
This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations
when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI micro
cable (supplied) for automatic linked operations. (Not all operations are possible.)
VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the
standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification. Linked operations with
HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not guaranteed.
When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with VIERA Link, refer to
the operating instructions for the respective devices.
This unit supports “VIERA Link Ver.5” function. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional VIERA Link equipment.
: [SETUP] # [VIERA Link] # [ON]
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 164 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 165 -
The following operations are available by pressing the colour buttons on the remote control.
Other linked operations
Turning the unit off:
If you use the remote control for the TV to turn off the power, this unit also turns off.
Automatic input switching:
If you connect with an HDMI micro cable and then turn on this unit, the input channel on the TV
automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in standby status, it will turn on
automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on link] setting).
Depending on the HDMI terminal on the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In
this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch the input channel.
If you are unsure whether or not the TV and AV amplifier you are using are compatible with
VIERA Link, read the operating instructions for the devices.
Available linked operations between this unit and a Panasonic TV is different depending on the
types of Panasonic TVs even if they are compatible with VIERA Link. Refer to the operating
instructions of the TV for the operations that support on the TV.
Operation is not possible with a cable that is not based on the HDMI standard.
(When selecting scenes) (When playing back)
A Display/Cancel operation icons
Green Zoom in on still picture
Yellow Deleting scenes/still pictures
Red Zoom out from still picture
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 165 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 166 -
Motion pictures or still pictures recorded with this unit can be copied between an SD card inserted in
this unit and a built-in memory.
The following scenes cannot be copied from the built-in memory of this unit to an SD Memory
Card or SDHC Memory Card. Use an SDXC Memory Card instead.
j 4K MP4 scenes
j Scenes recorded with [1080/50M] of [MP4]
j 24p scenes
Check the used space of the copy destination
It is possible to check the used space of the SD card or built-in memory by [MEDIA STATUS].
(l 50)
By displaying in 1 scene or touching and holding the thumbnail in the 6 scenes display, recording
date and time can be checked when playing back motion pictures, and recording date and file
number when playing back still pictures.
Depending on the media condition, some remaining capacity of the SD card or built-in memory
may not be used.
If the remaining capacity on a single SD card is not enough, you can copy to multiple SD cards
following the instruction on the screen. In this case, the last scene copied to an SD card is
automatically divided to fit the space on the SD card. Please note that the scenes below are not
automatically divided when copied. Use an SD card with enough capacity.
j 24p scenes
j 4K MP4 scenes or MP4 scenes that are copied without recording format conversion.
If you divide the scenes (l 152), and copy by scene selection, it is possible to copy matching the
remaining capacity of the media, or only the necessary parts.
If there is little or no remaining capacity in the SD card, a confirmation message asking to copy
after deleting all data on the SD card is displayed. Be aware that deleted data cannot be restored.
Refer to page 168 for approximate time for copying.
1 Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback
Mode.
Use a sufficiently charged battery or the AC adaptor.
2 Select the menu.
Copy/Dubbing
Copying between SD card and
Built-in Memory
[WXF1M]
Copying
: [COPY]
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 166 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 167 -
When [ ] is selected, the recording format will be converted.
If there is no need to convert the recording format, touch [NO].
If there is need to convert the recording format, touch [YES] and select the copying method.
When there are relay-recorded scenes in the built-in memory, a message appears on the screen.
Touch [YES] and copy after combining relay-recorded scenes to the SD card. (l 158)
3 Touch desired items following the screen display.
It will return to the previous step by touching .
(When [SELECT SCENES] is selected)
When touched, the scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the
thumbnail. Touch the scene/still picture again to cancel the operation.
(When [SELECT DATE] is selected)
When touched, the date is selected and surrounded by red. Touch the date again to cancel the
operation.
Up to 99 scenes/still pictures or 99 dates can be set in succession.
If 2 or more SD cards are necessary to copy, change the card following the instructions on the
screen.
4 Touch [EXIT] when the copy complete message is displayed.
The thumbnail view of the copy destination is indicated.
Depending on the type of the copied scene, the thumbnail view of the copy destination may not
be displayed.
When you stop copying halfway
Touch [CANCEL] while copying.
[]: When copying from the SD card to the built-in memory
[]
*
: When copying from the SD card to the USB HDD
[]: When copying from the built-in memory to the SD card
[]
*
: When copying from the built-in memory to the USB HDD
* Displayed only when connecting a USB HDD. (l 169)
[]:This will convert the scene recorded in AVCHD on the built-in memory to
MP4 (1280k720/25p or 640k360/25p) and copy to the SD card.
[]:This will convert the scene recorded in MP4 on built-in memory
*1
to an
MP4 (1280k720/25p or 640k360/25p) scene, and copy it to SD card.
[]:This will convert the scene recorded in 4K MP4 on the built-in memory to
an MP4 (1920k1080/25p, 1280k720/25p or 640k360/25p) scene, and
copy it to the SD card.
[]:This will convert the scene recorded as Backup for Twin Camera
*2
to an
MP4 (1280k720/25p or 640k360/25p) scene, and copy it to the SD
card.
[]:This will convert the scene recorded in 1080/50p on the built-in memory
to 1080/50i and copy to the SD card.
*1 Scenes saved in MP4 (640k360/25p) are not converted and copied.
*2 A scene recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as a normal MP4 scene when
converted and copied.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 167 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 168 -
Depending on the following conditions, the time it takes for copying may be longer.
j The number of recorded scenes is large.
j The temperature of the unit is high.
If some motion pictures or still pictures have already been recorded to the copy destination, then
the same date may be assigned or images may not display by date when the list by date is
selected.
[SELECT SCENES] and [SELECT DATE] cannot be selected for 24p scenes. In addition, 24p
scenes cannot be converted and copied.
When the following types of scenes are converted to MP4 scenes and copied, scenes exceeding
4 GB (approx.) or 30 minutes (approx.) will be automatically divided:
j 4K MP4 scenes
j Scenes recorded with [1080/50M] of [MP4]
j AVCHD scenes
j Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera
Motion pictures that have been recorded on another device may not be copied. Data recorded on
a PC with HD Writer AE 5.4, etc. cannot be copied.
The settings for the copied motion pictures and still pictures will be cleared if the protected motion
pictures or still pictures are copied.
The order in which the scenes or still pictures were copied cannot be changed.
Approximate time for copying
When copying a recorded motion picture of full 4 GB size:
Approx. 5 minutes to 15 minutes
When performing [ ] on a recorded 1080/50p motion picture of full 4 GB
size:
Approx. 10 minutes to 20 minutes
When performing [ ] on a recorded AVCHD (HA) motion picture of full 4 GB
size:
Approx. 15 minutes to 30 minutes
When performing [ ] on a recorded 4K MP4 (2160) motion picture of full 4 GB
size:
Approx. 9 minutes to 14 minutes
When performing [ ] on a recorded MP4 (1080/50M) motion picture of full 4 GB
size:
Approx. 5 minutes to 10 minutes
To copy approx. 600 MB still pictures (Picture size ):
Approx. 5 minutes to 15 minutes
If you will delete the motion pictures or still pictures after copying is complete, be sure to
play back the motion pictures or still pictures to check that they have been copied to
correctly before deleting.
25.9M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 168 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 169 -
In these Operating Instructions, “USB hard disk drive” is indicated as “USB HDD”.
If you connect a USB HDD (commercially-available) to this unit by using a USB Connection Cable
(commercially-available), you can copy motion pictures and still pictures recorded on this unit to a
USB HDD.
It can also play back the scenes and still pictures copied to the USB HDD.
You can copy scenes and still pictures recorded with this unit while maintaining the image quality.
Please read the operating instructions of the USB HDD for how to use it.
Preparing for copying/playing back
In the following cases, a USB HDD cannot be used by connecting it to this unit:
j A USB HDD with a capacity of below 160 GB or above 2 TB
j When a USB HDD has two or more partitions
j If a USB HDD is in a format other than FAT32/exFAT
*
j When connected by using a USB hub
* FAT32 is a format used for SDHC Memory Cards.
exFAT is a format used for the built-in memory of this unit ( only) and SDXC Memory
Cards.
Following scenes are not copied from the built-in memory of this unit ( only) or an SD
card to a USB HDD in FAT32 format.
j (For the series/ series/ series)
4K MP4 scenes
j 24p scenes
j Scenes recorded with [1080/50M] of [MP4]
Copy/Dubbing
Copying/playing back with a USB HDD
Refer to the following support site for information about USB HDD.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This Site is English only)
When the USB HDD that requires formatting is connected, a message is displayed. Follow the
instructions on the screen to format it.
Once the USB HDD has been formatted, all data stored on it will be deleted. The data cannot be
recovered.
This unit formats the USB HDD in exFAT.
*
WXF1M
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 169 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 170 -
A USB Connection Cable (commercially-available)
B USB HDD (commercially-available)
C Turn the side with the symbol down to connect the micro A end of the USB Connection Cable to
the USB terminal of this unit.
Connect this unit to the AC adaptor
1 (When using a desktop HDD)
Connect the AC adaptor (supplied with USB HDD) to the USB HDD.
If you are using a bus-powered or portable USB HDD, this unit can supply power to the USB HDD
by USB Connection Cable (commercially-available).
2 Connect the AC adaptor and a sufficiently charged battery to this unit.
If the AC adaptor is not connected to this unit, the USB HDD cannot be used.
3 Turn on this unit, and press the recording/playback button to switch this unit
to the Playback Mode.
4 Connect this unit to the USB HDD with the USB Connection Cable
(commercially-available).
Use a USB Connection Cable (commercially-available) compatible with the USB terminals of this
unit and the USB HDD. Connect the micro A end of the USB Connection Cable to the USB
terminal of this unit.
For information on the USB terminal of the USB HDD, refer to the operating instructions of the
USB HDD.
It may take several minutes until the connection is completed.
5 Touch the desired item.
Following can be performed by connecting the USB HDD with the scenes and still pictures copied
from this unit to other devices.
j Save on a PC or rewrite on USB HDD using HD Writer AE 5.4
[Simple copy]: Copies all scenes and still pictures recorded with this unit that
have not been copied yet. (l 172)
[Copy selected files]: Allows you to select desired scenes/still pictures, and then
copy. (l 172)
[Playback HDD]: Plays back scenes and still pictures stored in a USB HDD on
this unit. (l 173)
[Safe Removal]: Allows you to safely remove this unit and a USB HDD.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 170 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 171 -
When using an Eye-Fi card (commercially-available), set [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] to [OFF]. (l 177)
When the item is set to [ON], even if you connect the USB HDD to this unit, it will not recognise
the USB HDD.
Points to check before copying
When using a USB HDD for the first time, or using a USB HDD that has been used with
other devices, first run [FORMAT MEDIA].
Before copying, go to [MEDIA STATUS] to check the amount of free space on the USB HDD.
In the following cases, copying may take longer:
j There are lots of scenes
j The temperature of this unit is high
If you copy protected scenes or still pictures, the protection setting of the copied scenes or still
pictures are cancelled.
The order in which the scenes were copied cannot be changed.
Formatting
This is for initialising the USB HDD.
Please be aware that if a media is formatted then all the data recorded on the media is
erased and cannot be recovered. Back up important data on a PC etc.
Connect this unit to the USB HDD and touch [Playback HDD].
When formatting is complete, touch [EXIT] to exit the message screen.
Connect this unit and the USB HDD to format.
You may no longer be able to use the USB HDD if you format them on another device such as a
PC etc.
This unit formats the USB HDD in exFAT.
Displaying media information
The used space of the USB HDD can be checked.
Connect this unit to the USB HDD and touch [Playback HDD].
(For the //////)
If you touch [CHANGE MEDIA], you can switch the display between the SD card and USB HDD.
(For the )
If you touch [CHANGE MEDIA], you can switch the display between the SD card, built-in memory,
and USB HDD.
When the USB HDD is connected to other devices such as Blu-ray disc recorder, a
message prompting to format the USB HDD may display. All the scenes and still pictures
recorded on the USB HDD will be erased if formatted. Do not format as important data will
get erased and it will be impossible to restore.
Before you delete the data on the media after copying is complete, be sure to play back
the USB HDD to check that they have been copied to correctly. (l 173)
: [SETUP] # [FORMAT MEDIA] # [HDD]
: [SETUP] # [MEDIA STATUS]
MENU
MENU
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 171 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 172 -
Simple copy
1 Connect this unit to the USB HDD to prepare for copying. (l 169)
2 Touch [Simple copy].
When [Copy selected files] or [Playback HDD] is selected, terminate the connection with the USB
HDD (l 173), and then perform the operation of Step 1.
3 (For the )
Touch the media you want to copy.
4 Touch [YES].
5 Touch [EXIT] when the copy complete message is displayed.
The thumbnail view of the copy destination is indicated.
When you stop copying halfway:
Touch [CANCEL] while copying.
Copy selected files
1 Connect this unit to the USB HDD to prepare for copying. (l 169)
2 Touch [Copy selected files].
You can also copy scenes or still pictures by touching , selecting [COPY].
3 (For the //////)
Touch [NEXT].
(For the )
Touch the media you want to copy.
Please refer to page 166 for information on copying files between the SD card/built-in memory.
4 Touch the desired items following the instructions on the screen.
It will return to the previous step by touching .
(When [SELECT SCENES] is selected)
When touched, the scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the
thumbnail. Touch the scene/still picture again to cancel the operation.
(When [SELECT DATE] is selected)
When touched, the date is selected and surrounded by red. Touch the date again to cancel the
operation.
Up to 99 scenes/ 99 dates can be selected continuously.
5 Touch [EXIT] when the copy complete message is displayed.
The thumbnail view of the copy destination is indicated.
When you stop copying halfway:
Touch [CANCEL] while copying.
[SELECT SCENES] and [SELECT DATE] cannot be selected for 24p scenes.
[]:When copying from the SD card to the USB HDD.
[]:When copying from the built-in memory to the USB HDD.
WXF1M
MENU
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800 V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 172 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 173 -
Playing back the USB HDD
Only motion picture/still picture that have been copied by connecting this unit to the USB
HDD or copied with HD Writer AE 5.4 can be played back.
A USB Connection Cable (commercially-available)
B USB HDD (commercially-available)
C Turn the side with the symbol down to connect the micro A end of the USB Connection Cable to
the USB terminal of this unit.
1 Connect this unit to the USB HDD to prepare for playback. (l 169)
When playing back on a TV, connect this unit to the TV. (l 160)
2 Touch [Playback HDD].
3 Touch the scene or still picture to be played back and then play it back.
The playback operation is performed the same as when playing back motion pictures or still
pictures. (l 38, 120)
To terminate the connection between this unit and the USB HDD
Touch on the Touch Menu.
Disconnect the USB Connection Cable from this unit.
It is also possible to switch the media to play back by touching the playback media icon.
[HDD] can be selected when a USB HDD is connected. (l 38)
(For the //////)
The scenes you have saved in Highlight Playback or 4K Cropping
*
during playback of the USB
HDD are saved in the SD card.
(For the )
The scenes you have saved in Highlight Playback or 4K Cropping during playback of the USB
HDD are saved in the built-in memory. If you touch [COPY] after saving, you can copy them to the
SD card.
Deleting scenes and still pictures on the USB HDD may take time.
ALL
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 173 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後4時1分
- 174 -
You cannot set the following items during playback of (USB HDD).
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Tagging Favorite Scene
j [SCENE PROTECT]
j [SECTION DELETE]
j [DIVIDE]
j [MANUAL EDIT]
j [SPLIT&DELETE]
j [CONVERT TO MP4]
j [Slow Speed Conversion]
(For the )
j [RELAY SCENE COMBINE]
j [RELAY INFO CANCEL]
* For the series/ series/
Check before dubbing
Check the equipment used for dubbing.
* (For the series/ series/ series)
Some equipment may not be compatible with 4K MP4, MP4, 24p or high-definition (AVCHD).
* (For the series)
Some equipment may not be compatible with MP4, 24p or high-definition (AVCHD).
For the positions of the SD card slot or USB terminal, refer to the operating instructions of the
equipment used.
Copy/Dubbing
Dubbing with a Blu-ray disc recorder,
etc.
Equipment used
for dubbing
Dubbing picture quality To dub
Equipment with
SD card slot
4K picture quality/
High-definition picture
quality
*
Insert the SD card directly
(l 175)
Equipment with
USB terminal
4K picture quality/
High-definition picture
quality
*
Connect with supplied
USB cable (l 175)
You can dub scenes recorded with this unit to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder that supports the recording format or recording mode you want to use.
Note that the equipment described may not be available in certain countries and
regions.
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1M
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 174 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 175 -
To dub using equipment with an SD card slot
You can dub by directly inserting an SD card.
(For the )
To copy scenes or still pictures from the built-in memory to an
SD card, see page 166.
To dub using equipment with a USB terminal
You can dub by connecting a USB cable.
Use the AC adaptor to free you from worrying about the battery running down.
Turn on the unit.
A USB cable (supplied)
B Turn the side with the symbol down to connect the micro B end of the USB Cable to the USB
terminal of this unit.
Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
1 Connect the unit to the Blu-ray disc recorder or high-definition (AVCHD)
compatible DVD recorder.
The USB function selection screen will appear on the screen of the unit.
2 Touch [RECORDER] on the screen of this unit.
When you select an option other than [RECORDER], reconnect the USB cable.
(For the //////)
When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn
the LCD monitor on.
3 (For the )
Touch the media you wish to dub.
When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn
the LCD monitor on.
Dubbing in high-definition picture quality
WXF1M
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 175 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 176 -
4 Dubbing through operations on the Blu-ray disc recorder or high-definition
(AVCHD) compatible DVD recorder.
(For the )
Do not touch [CHANGE MEDIA] on the screen of the unit during dubbing.
Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any
other USB cables.)
Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as normal AVCHD scenes when
dubbed on a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or a DVD recorder.
When this unit is connected to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or a DVD recorder using a USB
cable while the unit is turned on, power is also supplied from the connected equipment to this
unit.
For details on dubbing and playback methods, read the operating instructions of the Blu-ray disc
recorder or DVD recorder.
When you connect the unit to a Blu-ray disc recorder, a dubbing operations screen may appear
on the television connected to the Blu-ray disc recorder. In this case as well, perform the
operations of Steps 1 to 4.
You cannot switch the Recording Mode/Playback Mode by pressing the recording/playback
button on this unit while the Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD recorder is connected. Disconnect the
USB cable before performing either of these operations.
If the battery runs down during dubbing, a message will appear. Operate the Blu-ray disc recorder
to cancel the dubbing.
(For the )
If you convert the recording format of the scenes recorded in 1080/50p to 1080/50i, you can dub
them to devices that do not support AVCHD Progressive. (l 167)
About the screen indication of the unit
When the unit is accessing the SD card, card access icon ( ) appears on the unit screen
or the access lamp is on.
(For the )
When the unit is accessing the built-in memory, built-in memory access icon ( ) appears
on the unit screen or the access lamp is on.
Be careful not to disconnect the USB cable, AC adaptor or battery while the unit is accessing
the media, as this may result in the loss of recorded content.
WXF1M
WXF1M
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 176 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 177 -
By using an Eye-Fi card (commercially-available), you can record motion pictures and still pictures
on the card, and save them on a PC or upload them on a file-sharing website via a wireless
network.
Insert an Eye-Fi card (commercially available) to the unit.
(For the )
(When using in the Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode)
Set the card to be used as the recording media. (l 32)
(When using in the Playback Mode)
Select the media selection icon from the thumbnail screen, and set the media to
(card). (l 38)
Select the menu.
When [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON], the transferable files will be transferred automatically.
To cancel the transferring of a file, turn off the unit or set [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] to [OFF].
The setting at the time of purchase is [OFF]. Every time the Eye-Fi card is removed from the unit,
this setting is set to [OFF].
Eye-Fi transfers are not available during motion picture recording.
You can check the file transfer status on the thumbnail screen.
Copy/Dubbing
Using the Eye-Fi
card
The functions of the Eye-Fi card (including wireless transmission) are not guaranteed to work
on this product. In the case of a malfunction of the card, please contact the card
manufacturer.
To use the Eye-Fi transfer feature, a broadband wireless LAN environment is required.
To use the Eye-Fi card, permission from the national or regional government is required. Do
not use if you have not obtained permission. If you are unsure as to whether use is permitted,
please check with the card manufacturer.
To prevent the interception of communications, misuses, identity thefts, etc., we strongly
recommend you configure the appropriate security settings (encryption settings). For details,
refer to the manuals of your Eye-Fi card and access point.
Install the software supplied with the Eye-Fi card in advance on your PC, and configure
the Eye-Fi settings. (For settings methods etc., please read the card operating
instructions or consult the card manufacturer)
: [SETUP] # [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] # [ON]
File has been transferred
File waiting for transfer
File cannot be transferred
WXF1M
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 177 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 178 -
Using Eye-Fi direct mode
The files can be transferred directly from the Eye-Fi card to a smartphone without going through the
wireless access point when necessary setting is performed in a PC in advance.
Install the software supplied with the Eye-Fi card on your PC, and configure the
Eye-Fi direct mode settings.
Insert an Eye-Fi card (commercially available) to the unit.
Select the menu.
This mode is displayed only when [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON].
The mode will be cancelled using the following steps.
j When the unit is turned off
j If you start recording motion picture
In addition to the steps above, the mode may also be cancelled by the Eye-Fi card.
When connected via Eye-Fi direct mode, [ECONOMY (BATT)]/[ECONOMY (AC)] are disabled.
Selecting files to transfer
If you perform the required settings in advance on your PC, you can transfer selected files alone.
For settings methods etc., please read the card operating instructions or consult the card
manufacturer.
Install the software supplied with the Eye-Fi card on your PC, and configure the selection
transfer settings.
Insert an Eye-Fi card (commercially available) to the unit.
1 Press the recording/playback button to switch to the Playback Mode.
2
(For the )
Touch the media selection icon, then select [SD CARD]. (l 38)
3 Touch the motion picture/still picture you want to transfer. (
l 38)
AVCHD scenes or scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera cannot be used as the selected
transfer setting.
4 Select the menu.
The setting method is the same as that for the scene protect settings. (l 154)
If the selected transfer setting is not configured on the computer, [SCENE PROTECT] is
displayed and the selected transfer setting cannot be configured.
When the write protect switch on the Eye-Fi card is on the LOCK side, [SCENE PROTECT] is
displayed and selected transfer setting is disabled. Please unlock the write protect switch.
The protect setting is also applied to the files for which [TRANSFER/PROTECT] is set. To delete
a file, first cancel [TRANSFER/PROTECT] and then perform the operation.
: [SETUP] # [Eye-Fi DIRECT]
: [VIDEO SETUP] or [PHOTO SETUP] # [TRANSFER/PROTECT]
MENU
WXF1M
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 178 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 179 -
The Eye-Fi menu only appears when an Eye-Fi card is used.
The Eye-Fi transfer feature cannot be guaranteed to continue to operate in the future due to
changes to the card specification etc.
Update the firmware of the Eye-Fi card to the latest one using the software supplied with the
Eye-Fi card before use.
When the endless memory function of the Eye-Fi card is set to on, the files transferred from the
card may be deleted automatically.
The Eye-Fi card may heat up as a result of the files being transferred. Note that the use of an
Eye-Fi card accelerates the battery drain, so we recommend you use the card in Playback Mode.
The Eye-Fi setting can be checked while pausing the recording.
If the Eye-Fi card is removed and then reinserted into the unit, set functions related to Eye-Fi
again from the menu.
When using the Eye-Fi card, please be sure to unlock the write-protect switch. (l 17)
Before deleting the files, please confirm they have been transferred to your PC and uploaded to
the sharing site.
Do not use the Eye-Fi card in locations where the use of wireless devices is forbidden, such as
inside aircraft etc.
Depending on network conditions, the transfer may take some time. Also, if network conditions
deteriorate, the transfer may be suspended.
Files over 2 GB in size cannot be transferred. Such files should first be split to reduce the file size.
(l 152)
[Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON]
(Transferring in Eye-Fi direct mode)
[Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON]
[Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [OFF]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 179 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 180 -
Use this unit as a wireless LAN device
When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than wireless LAN
devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs and defects for the
systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using this
unit for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Use of the Wi-Fi function of this unit is presumed to be in countries
where this unit is sold
There is the risk that this unit violates the radiowave regulations if used in countries other than those
where this unit is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any violations.
There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted by
a third party.
Do not use this unit in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or
interference
Do not use this unit in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as near
microwave ovens. Radio waves may not reach this unit.
Using this unit near devices such as cordless telephones or any other wireless LAN device that
use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices.
Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to
use
When this unit utilises its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched automatically. When
this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorised to use (SSID
*
) may be displayed,
however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be considered as unauthorised access.
* SSID refers to the name of device that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN
connection. If the SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.
Before use
To use a Wi-Fi function with this unit, you need a wireless access point or destination device
equipped with a wireless LAN function.
For the operations and settings of your device such as the smartphone, please read the
operating instructions of the device.
This unit is WPS-compatible
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup
) is a function that allows you to easily set up a connection with a
wireless LAN device and make security-related settings.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
®
function
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 180 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 181 -
The Wi-Fi button ( series/ series)
If the settings are in the condition at the time of purchase, press the Wi-Fi button (Fn1 button) to turn
on the Wi-Fi function.
You can also change the [FN BUTTON SETTING] so you can use the desired Fn button as a
Wi-Fi button. (l 116)
If you have not set [ (Wi-Fi)] in an Fn button, the Wi-Fi function will not be available.
This unit cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless
access point.
This unit uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band. You cannot establish a wireless LAN connection
using the 5 GHz frequency band.
When using a wireless access point, we strongly recommend that you set a encryption to
maintain information security.
When sending scenes or still pictures, we recommend you use the AC adaptor. If you are using
the battery, we recommend you use the fully charged one.
When sending motion pictures or still pictures on a mobile network or tethering, high packet
communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract.
This unit may not connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio wave condition.
When motion picture or still picture transmission is not successful, point the Wi-Fi transmitter
(l 8) at the wireless device (smartphone, etc.).
When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or
the connection may be disrupted.
The Wi-Fi transmitter may become warm when using the Wi-Fi function; however this is not a sign
of a malfunction. (l 8)
: [SETUP] # [FN BUTTON SETTING] # [Fn1] to [Fn4] # [ ]
WXF1
VXF1
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 181 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 182 -
Using a smartphone, you can perform record/playback operations from a remote location or upload
motion pictures and still pictures recorded in this unit on SNS (Social Networking Service).
A When connecting directly to a smartphone
B When connecting to a wireless access point
Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about how to operate.
Wi-Fi
[Remote Ctrl]
You need to turn on the Wi-Fi function of your smartphone.
Do not remove the SD card during remote operations.
Caution:
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject when you use
this function. Use at your own risk.
Image App
Image App
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 182 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 183 -
Preparations before using [Remote Ctrl]
Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l 209)
Operate this unit and the smartphone to set up a direct connection.
Check the [Direct Connection Password] setting in [Wi-Fi Setup]. (
l 221)
The default setting for [Direct Connection Password] is [OFF].
Select [ON] as needed, for example when the setting seems necessary for your Wi-Fi
environment.
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]
j Proceed to “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]” in “Using [Remote Ctrl] with a
direct connection”. (l 184)
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]
j [Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 216)
j Connecting with QR code (l 216)
j Connecting by entering an SSID and Password (l 217)
When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, proceed to “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to
[ON]” in “Using [Remote Ctrl] with a direct connection”. (l 185)
1 Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.
2 Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.
[Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 212)
Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l 213)
Setting up a connection manually (l 214)
3 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Using
[Remote Ctrl] with a wireless access point connection”. (
l 185)
Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the
smartphone application “Image App”. (l 211)
Setting up a direct Wi-Fi connection between this unit and a
smartphone
Setting up a Wi-Fi connection via a wireless access point
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 183 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 184 -
Using [Remote Ctrl] with a direct connection
5 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the
smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi
Setup].
2 Touch [Direct Connection].
This unit will go into connection standby with the smartphone.
The SSID of this unit is displayed on the screen of this unit.
3 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s
setup menu.
A [Wi-Fi Setup]
B [EXIT]
4 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select
the SSID displayed on this unit.
It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j is displayed on the screen
6 (If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this
unit)
Confirm the message “Connect this
smartphone?”, and touch [YES] on the screen of
this unit.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the image from
this unit is displayed on the smartphone screen.
Control this unit remotely with the smartphone.
C [Device Name]
D [YES]
E Message
2/2
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 184 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 185 -
Proceed to Step 5 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Direct Connection] in [Wi-Fi
Setup] (l 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Remote Ctrl].
(If you have touched [Remote Ctrl] for the first time)
A message will be displayed asking whether to connect to a wireless access point. Touch [NO].
If a wireless access point is already registered in [Set Wireless Access Point] in [Wi-Fi Setup],
priority will be given to a connection using the wireless access point. A connection using the
wireless access point will be established for remote operations.
2 Touch [Wi-Fi].
It will go into connection standby for remote operation.
3 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.
4 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this
unit.
If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password
displayed on this unit’s screen into the smartphone.
It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.
5 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the
smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the image from this unit is displayed on the
smartphone screen. Control this unit remotely with the smartphone.
Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.
The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.
The following operations allow you to register up to ten smartphones. If the number exceeds ten,
smartphone information with the oldest registration date and time will be deleted.
j Setting [Direct Connection Password] to [OFF] and connecting this unit and a smartphone
directly.
Using [Remote Ctrl] with a wireless access point
connection
Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Set Wireless Access Point] in
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 212 to 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Remote Ctrl] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.
It will go into connection standby for remote operation.
3 Connect the smartphone to a wireless access point.
4 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the image from this unit is displayed on the
smartphone screen.
Control this unit remotely with the smartphone.
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]
To exit [Remote Ctrl]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 185 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 186 -
To exit [Remote Ctrl]:
Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.
The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.
About [Remote Ctrl]
Smartphone screen shots are example displayed in Motion Picture Recording Mode and Playback
Mode.
Depending on your OS or the version of the smartphone application “Image App”, the screens
may differ from the ones above.
Screen display during remote operations
Recording screen
1 Recording media/remaining recordable
time
2 Remaining battery power of this unit
3 Zoom
4 Photoshot button
5 Menu display
6 Playback mode button
7 Remote control button
8 Recording start/stop button
9 Motion Picture Recording Mode/Still
Picture Recording Mode toggle button
: Name of the connected device
Playback screen
1 Camera function button
2 Number of scenes
3 Remaining battery power of this unit
4 Delete
5 Upload
6 Copy
7 Name of the connected device
8 Scene information display
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
R 1h 20min
XXXXXXXXX
1/16
AVCHD_0001
2018/12/15 15:30:50
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 186 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 187 -
In Recording Mode
Recording motion pictures/still pictures
Selecting a mode
Selecting a media to record
*1
Using the zoom (Available in the medium or fast speed)
Switching between the Recording Mode:
Registering your favourite scenes
Twin Camera
*3
Changing and adjusting the Sub Window settings
*3
Backup for Twin Camera
Recording format
j You cannot change the [REC FORMAT] setting or switch to Still Picture Recording Mode when
[REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] in Recording Mode.
j You cannot change the [REC FORMAT] setting from a setting other than [24p] to [24p].
Recording mode
Picture size
White Balance
Manual shutter speed/iris adjustment (4K Photo Mode only)
*2
Backlight Compensation
Night Mode
Self-timer
Aspect ratio
Turning the unit off
In Playback Mode
Playback
Selecting a media to playback (SD card/Built-in memory)
*1
Switching between thumbnails (MP4, AVCHD, 24p, JPEG (Still picture))
j You cannot switch the recording format from [24p]
*4
to an option other than [24p].
j You cannot switch the recording format from an option other than [24p]
*5
to [24p].
Delete
Save (Copy)
j AVCHD scenes or scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera cannot be copied.
j Depending on your smartphone, scenes recorded in MP4 format or scenes exceeding 4 GB
may not be copied.
Smart Home Network
j It is possible to post to SNS or perform playback operation when this unit is connected to the
DLNA (DMR)-compatible TV via wireless access point using a smartphone.
Creating and saving scenes with Highlight Playback
Functions available for remote operations
j Intelligent Auto Mode
j Manual Mode
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
([Always])
j Slow Zoom Mode
*2
j 4K Photo Mode
*2
j Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 187 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 188 -
Highlight Photo Collage
j Parts that were recognised as clearly recorded are automatically extracted from multiple
scenes and saved as still pictures.
(Highlight Photo Collage is not available for 4K MP4 scenes
*2
, MP4 scenes, 24p scenes and
scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera.)
j In addition, the multiple still pictures you have captured can be put in a frame and saved as a
single still picture.
*1
*2 For the series/ series/ series
*3 series
*4 Including when the option is changed from [24p] to JPEG (still picture).
*5 Including when the option is changed from a recording format other than [24p] to JPEG (still
picture).
Functions other than those listed above are not available for remote operation.
If you record an image when the LCD monitor of this unit is closed with the screen facing outward,
the LCD monitor turns off.
WXF1M
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 188 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 189 -
You can use your smartphone to check on your baby being monitored by this unit when you are in
another room. The smartphone and this unit can be used like radio transceivers, allowing the users
to have a conversation by taking turns. This unit can also send a notification to the smartphone
whenever the baby cries.
Preparations before using [Baby Monitor]
1 Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.
2 Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (
l 209)
3 Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.
[Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 212)
Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l 213)
Setting up a connection manually (l 214)
4 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Using [Baby
Monitor]”.
Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the
smartphone application “Image App”. (l 211)
[Baby Monitor] is not available in the following cases:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]
j While motion picture/still picture tab [24p] is selected in the Playback Mode (l 38)
Wi-Fi
[Baby Monitor]
You need to turn on the Wi-Fi function of your smartphone.
If [CLOCK SET] (l 28) is not set correctly, the sound detection function will not work
(l 190).
Notifications cannot be sent to more than one smartphone.
Check your contract details carefully, as smartphone and internet contract details may
result in high communication charges being incurred, or a limit placed on
communication traffic.
Caution:
It is the responsibility of parents or guardians to check on their child. Use [Baby Monitor]
only as an aid.
Place this unit so that it will be out of the reach of the baby.
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 189 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 190 -
Using [Baby Monitor]
Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Set Wireless Access Point] in
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 212 to 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Baby Monitor] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.
The SSID of the wireless access point to which this unit is connected is displayed.
3 Connect the smartphone to a wireless access point.
To connect it, select the SSID of the wireless access point displayed on the screen of this unit.
4 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
When this unit is connected to the Internet via the wireless access point, the notification function,
which sends notifications from this unit to the smartphone, becomes available.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the screen of this unit turns off. To turn on the
screen again, touch the screen.
To exit [Baby Monitor]:
Touch [EXIT] displayed on the screen of this unit or press the Wi-Fi button.
The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.
Checking on the baby in your house
You can check the image of the baby being monitored on your smartphone.
Images of baby-monitoring cannot be recorded.
It cannot be confirmed with multiple smartphones simultaneously.
Voice message function
The smartphone and this unit can be used like radio transceivers, allowing the users to have a
conversation by taking turns.
A voice message of up to 1 minute can be sent.
Open the LCD monitor of this unit when using the Voice message function.
Sending notifications to your smartphone
In the following cases, this unit sends a notification to the smartphone:
When baby monitoring starts
When a sound is detected
Sound detection
When this unit detects a sound, it can automatically send a notification to the connected
smartphone.
This function can be used only if this unit is connected to the Internet via the wireless access
point when [Baby Monitor] is used.
Depending on [Sound Detection Sensitivity] setting and recording conditions, sounds may not be
detected. Test the sound detection function in advance to check if sounds can be detected and
notified.
What you can do with [Baby Monitor]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 190 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 191 -
Touch [Setup] on the screen of this unit, and select the item you want to set.
[Notification Setup]
This sets whether to send a notification to the smartphone when a sound is detected.
[Notification Test]
This tests if a notification can be sent to the smartphone when a sound is detected.
[Remote Voice Level]
This sets the voice message volume.
[Sound Detection Sensitivity]
This sets the sound detection sensitivity.
[Sound Scene Select] is set to [Auto].
Changing [Baby Monitor] settings
[ON]/[OFF]
(Volume high)/ (Volume low)
[High]/[Low]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 191 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 192 -
You can confirm the recording screen of this unit from outside using a smartphone.
Preparations before using [Hom.Monitor]
1 Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.
2 Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (
l 209)
3 Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.
[Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 212)
Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l 213)
Setting up a connection manually (l 214)
4 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Using
[Hom.Monitor]”. (
l 193)
Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the
smartphone application “Image App”. (l 211)
[Hom.Monitor] is not available in the following cases:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]
j While motion picture/still picture tab [24p] is selected in the Playback Mode (l 38)
Wi-Fi
[Hom.Monitor]
Switch the Wi-Fi setting to off on your smartphone and use with mobile network such
as 3G.
If [CLOCK SET] (l 28) is not set correctly, [Hom.Monitor] cannot be used.
Check your contract details carefully, as smartphone and internet contract details may
result in high communication charges being incurred, or a limit placed on
communication traffic.
Caution:
This function is not designed for anti-theft or disaster use.
XXXXXXXXX
1
時間
20
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 192 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 193 -
Using [Hom.Monitor]
Perform the home monitoring operation on the smartphone. (l 195)
When the firewall is turned on, the Wi-Fi function may not work correctly. If this occurs, check the
network settings.
Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Set Wireless Access Point] in
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 212 to 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Hom.Monitor] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.
3 Turn off the Wi-Fi setting of the smartphone.
4 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
(If the device is Android
)
When a Wi-Fi connection guidance screen is displayed, select [No].
(If the device is iOS)
If a confirmation message for the Wi-Fi setup is displayed, select [Close].
5 Enable the home monitoring setting from the menu of the smartphone
application “Image App”.
Select [ (MENU)] # [Application function] # [Home Monitor], and enable [Use Home
Monitor].
6 Select [Set connect. dest.] of the smartphone.
7 Enter the Device ID and Password displayed on the screen of this unit into
the smartphone.
When the entry is complete, select [OK] (on your Android device) or [Complete] (on your iOS
device).
If you want to check the Device ID and Password after performing Step 8, on the screen of this
unit, touch [Setup] # [Home Monitor Connect].
8 Touch [ENTER] on the screen of this unit.
Check that the message “Connecting...” has disappeared from this unit.
9 On the smartphone, select [Start Home Monitor] to start home monitoring.
When configuring the home monitor settings using QR code
Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Set Wireless Access Point] in
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 212 to 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Hom.Monitor] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.
3 Touch [QR code].
QR code is displayed on the screen of this unit.
4 Turn off the Wi-Fi setting of the smartphone.
When using the home monitor function for the first time
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 193 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 194 -
5 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
(If the device is Android)
When a Wi-Fi connection guidance screen is displayed, select [No].
(If the device is iOS)
If a confirmation message for the Wi-Fi setup is displayed, select [Close].
6 Enable the home monitoring setting from the menu of the smartphone
application “Image App”.
Select [ (MENU)] # [Application function] # [Home Monitor], and enable [Use Home
Monitor].
7 Select [Set connect. dest.] of the smartphone.
8 On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the
screen of this unit.
The Device ID and Password will be set. Select [OK] (on your Android device) or [Complete] (on
your iOS device).
9 Touch [NEXT] on the screen of this unit.
Check that the message “Connecting...” has disappeared from this unit.
10
On the smartphone, select [Start Home Monitor] to start home monitoring.
To exit [Hom.Monitor]:
Touch [EXIT] displayed on the screen of this unit or press the Wi-Fi button.
The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Hom.Monitor].
2 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
When a Wi-Fi connection guidance screen is displayed, select [NO].
Use the smartphone to start home monitor.
To exit [Hom.Monitor]:
Touch [EXIT] displayed on the screen of this unit or press the Wi-Fi button.
The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.
The image and sound may be interrupted or the connection may be terminated depending on your
line conditions. Use the recommended optimal speed (upstream) below as a guide to make
necessary settings.
Recommended optimal speed (upstream) for the broadband line, mobile
router (tethering), etc. connected to this unit
For information on the optimal speed, contact your service provider, etc.
When using the home monitor function for the second time or later
Line quality
Recommended optimal speed
(upstream)
500 kbps or higher
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 194 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 195 -
Operation cannot be guaranteed for all devices.
Even with a broadband line, the recommended optimal speed may not be reached depending on
your environment.
Narrowband lines such as analogue modems cannot be used.
If the line for the smartphone is switched, communication may be interrupted. In that case,
connect again.
Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about how to operate.
If you have difficulty establishing a connection with [Hom.Monitor] or the connection is
disconnected, wait for a while, and connect again. If the connection still cannot be established,
check the settings from the menu of the smartphone application “Image App” below.
[ (MENU)] # [Application function] # [Home Monitor] # [Advanced Settings]
Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about the settings.
What you can operate/set with a smartphone during home monitoring
What you can operate with a smartphone
Confirm the condition inside the house
The monitoring video can be confirmed.
The monitoring image can be recorded as a video or a still picture.
It cannot be confirmed with multiple smartphones simultaneously.
Depending upon the environment in which the device is used, motion picture may be like a
frame rate is low.
Voice message
The smartphone and this unit can be used like radio transceivers, allowing the users to have a
conversation by taking turns.
You can talk up to 10 seconds in 20 second interval.
Open the LCD monitor of this unit when using the Voice message function.
What you can set with a smartphone
Moving/non-moving object detection
This unit can detect moving objects and non-moving objects in the home monitoring detection area.
Once this unit is set to home monitoring (home monitoring standby state), it cannot detect
moving objects for up to 5 minutes.
Detection of some moving and stationary subjects may not be possible due to the condition of
the subject. Check beforehand to see if detection of the moving or stationary object can be
detected.
If the movement of the subject is too fast or too slow, if the subject is too small, or if the
surroundings are too dark, detection of moving and stationary objects may be impossible.
Automatic recording
You can record a motion picture on this unit as it detects a moving or non-moving object.
Automatic recording will record for approximately 30 seconds.
Automatic recording can record a maximum of 1 hour 15 minutes per day. Check the remaining
available recording time.
When automatic recording is performed with moving object detection, automatic recording is
performed only once within the set time.
When automatic recording is performed with non-moving object detection, the set time will be
reset and non-moving object detection will start again.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 195 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 196 -
Setting cannot be performed while operating monitoring with a smartphone.
Touch [Setup] and select desired setting.
[Home Monitor Connect]
You can display the registration screen for a Device ID and Password.
If [QR code] is touched, a QR code will be displayed on the screen of this unit.
[Remote Voice Level]
You can set the initial remote voice level and speaker volume level of the remote voice function.
The mode cannot be switched to another one during home monitoring operations.
Although home monitoring can be performed with the battery, we recommend you use the AC
adaptor.
It is recommended to use this unit fixed so that it will not move since it may cause false detection.
Power of this unit will automatically turn off when monitoring condition continues for
approximately 10 days.
[REC MODE] is set to [HE].
[ZOOM MODE] is set to [Opt.Zoom 24k].
The following recording modes are not available (l 64):
j Creative Control Mode
j HDR Movie Mode
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
(For the series/ series/ series)
j 4K Photo Mode
j Cinema Like Effect Mode
Backup for Twin Camera is not available during home monitoring.
If you record an image when the LCD monitor of this unit is closed with the screen facing outward,
the LCD monitor turns off.
The password for the home monitor settings will change when [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] is
performed. Set the home monitor settings of the smartphone again and reconnect to this unit
when [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] is performed.
Changing the home monitor settings of this unit
(Volume high)/ (Volume low)
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 196 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 197 -
Connecting this unit to a DLNA (DMR) -compatible TV via Wi-Fi, you can play back scenes and still
pictures on the TV.
A DLNA (DMR)-compatible TV
Preparations before using [DLNA Play]
1 Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.
2 Check if the TV is DLNA-compatible.
3 Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.
[Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 212)
Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l 213)
Setting up a connection manually (l 214)
4 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Playing
back on a TV”. (
l 198)
Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the
smartphone application “Image App”. (l 211)
[DLNA Play] is not available in the following cases:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]
j While motion picture/still picture tab [24p] is selected in the Playback Mode (l 38)
Wi-Fi
[DLNA Play]
Please read the operating instructions for the TV about connecting TV to the wireless
access point.
Do not remove the SD card in playing back on a TV.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 197 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 198 -
Playing back on a TV
You can play back the scenes and still pictures recorded with or stored in this unit on a TV.
The following scenes can be played back:
j Scenes recorded in AVCHD
j Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera
j Scenes recorded in MP4 [720]
j Scenes saved in MP4 (1280k720/25p) or MP4 (640k360/25p)
Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Set Wireless Access Point] in
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 212 to 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [DLNA Play] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.
If you touch [Change AP], you can switch the wireless access point to another one that has been
registered to this unit.
If you touch [CANCEL], the Wi-Fi connection is cancelled.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the screen of this unit turns off. To display it again,
touch the screen.
3 Select this unit (SSID) by the TV side.
Select the media ([SD/MEM]) and select the motion picture ([AVCHD/MP4]) or still picture
([JPEG]) to play back.
4 Perform playback operations with the TV remote control.
You cannot play back the following scenes:
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Scenes recorded in 4K MP4
j Scenes recorded in 24p
j Scenes recorded with [1080/50M] or [1080/28M] of [MP4]
j Scenes saved in MP4 (1920k1080/25p)
Depending on your environment, such as the network condition, scenes may not be played back
smoothly.
Playback operations may differ depending on the TV in
use.
The following operations can be performed if a colour
button is pushed.
Blue/Red: Skip playback
Fast forward/Fast rewind playback cannot be performed.
You cannot perform playback operations with this unit.
To exit [DLNA Play]:
Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.
A message is displayed. Touch [YES] to exit.
(Examples of operations during
motion picture playback)
A Skip playback
B Stop
C Playback/Pause
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 198 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 199 -
By setting up a Wi-Fi communication between this unit and a PC, you can copy scenes and still
pictures recorded with this unit to the PC.
A PC
Preparations before using [Copy]
1 Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.
2 Check if the PC and the wireless access point are connected via Wi-Fi.
You can also use a LAN cable to connect the PC and the wireless access point.
3 Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.
[Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 212)
Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l 213)
Setting up a connection manually (l 214)
4 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Copying to
a PC”. (
l 201)
Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the
smartphone application “Image App”. (l 211)
Wi-Fi
[Copy]
If [CLOCK SET] (l 28) is not set correctly, scenes and still pictures may not be able to
be copied to a PC.
For information on the connection between a PC and a wireless access point, refer to
the operating instruction of the device in use.
If this unit and a PC are not connected to the same wireless access point, copying is
not possible.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 199 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 200 -
To copy scenes and still pictures by setting up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the PC,
complete the following preparations:
j Turn on the PC
j Create a shared folder (destination folder)
*1
*1 The name of the folder must consist of 15 or less alphanumeric characters.
When using HD Writer AE 5.4
1 Install HD Writer AE 5.4.
For information on the operating environment and installation, refer to “Operating environment”
(l 253) and “Installation” (l 255).
2 Using HD Writer AE 5.4, create a destination folder.
Select [Auto-create] or [Create manually]. The first option creates a destination folder
automatically, while the second option allows you to specify a destination folder or create a new
one. With the second option, you can also set password protection for a destination folder.
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of HD Writer AE 5.4 (PDF file). (l 259)
When not using HD Writer AE 5.4
If the workgroup setting of the connected PC has been changed from the standard one, you also
need to change the [PC Connect Setup] setting of this unit. (l 223)
The user account of the PC (both the Account Name and the Password) must consist of 32 or
less alphanumeric characters.
*2
If you use non-alphanumeric characters for the user account, a destination folder may not be set
up.
*2 If you use more than 32 characters for the user account, copying via a Wi-Fi connection is not
possible.
(For Windows)
Supported OS: Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10
Example: Windows 7
1 Select a destination folder, and right-click.
2 Select [Properties], and enable sharing of the folder.
For details on how to enable sharing, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or the help of
your OS.
(For Mac)
Supported OS: OS X v10.4 to v10.11, macOS 10.12
Example: macOS 10.12
1 Select a destination folder, and click the following items:
[File]
# [Get Info]
2 Enable sharing of the folder.
For details on how to enable sharing, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or the help of
your OS.
Creating a shared folder (destination folder) on the PC
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 200 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 201 -
Copying to a PC
Create a shared folder (destination folder) on the PC. (l 200)
Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Set Wireless Access Point] in
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 212 to 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Copy] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.
3 Touch the PC to be connected.
To search for PCs again, touch [Refresh].
(When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed)
Touch [Set Manually].
4 (When [Set Manually] is touched)
Enter the computer name of the PC (NetBIOS name for Mac computers).
Enter the computer name of your PC (NetBIOS name for Mac computers).
(A maximum of 15 characters can be entered.)
When the computer name (or NetBIOS name) contains a space (blank character), etc., it may not
be recognised correctly. If a connection attempt fails, we recommend that you change the
computer name (or NetBIOS name) to the one consisting of only alphanumeric characters, with a
maximum of 15 characters.
Input method is same operation as for setting up the title. (l 137)
After entering the computer name of the PC, touch [Enter].
5 Touch [INPUT], and enter the name of the shared folder.
If you have created a shared folder (destination folder) using HD Writer AE 5.4 (l 200), touch
[NEXT].
Enter the name of the shared folder that you have created on your PC and then touch [Enter].
(A maximum of 15 characters can be entered.)
If a screen asking you to enter a user account and password is displayed after you have entered
the name of the shared folder, enter the one you have created on your PC.
(For the //////)
When the connection to the PC is complete, copying starts.
When copying is complete, this unit turns off automatically.
6 (For the )
Select the copy source media ([Built-inMemory]/[SD CARD]).
When the connection to the PC is complete, copying starts.
When copying is complete, this unit turns off automatically.
When you stop copying halfway
Touch [CANCEL] while copying.
Copying can be performed even when the battery is used for power, but we recommend that the
AC adaptor be used.
If you intend to delete the original scenes or still pictures when the copying has finished,
always play back the duplicate scenes or still pictures on PC before deletion to confirm that
they have been copied normally.
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1 VX11
V800
V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 201 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 202 -
Once scenes or still pictures are copied to a PC, the original scenes or still pictures cannot be
copied to any PCs.
(For the )
However, if the original scenes or still pictures are copied between the SD card and the built-in
memory, the duplicate scenes or still pictures in the SD card or the built-in memory can be copied
to PCs.
If the total length of the scenes recorded on the same date on the SD card or the built-in memory
exceeds approximately 8 hours, the scenes will not be copied.
If the copy source contains scenes or still pictures recorded on other devices, copying may be
cancelled.
Depending on your environment, copying may take time or may not be available.
If the scene to be copied is long or copying fails, we recommend that the following be performed
for copying.
j Connecting this unit to the PC by USB cable (l 256, 260)
j Inserting the SD card to the built-in SD card slot of the PC or your SD card reader/writer directly
Scenes exceeding 4 GB may not be copied.
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 202 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 203 -
You can broadcast motion pictures of this unit live by setting up a link between the “LUMIX CLUB”
and USTREAM.
A You can also broadcast motion pictures live by connecting this unit and a smartphone that
supports tethering.
Wi-Fi
[Live Cast]
If [CLOCK SET] (l 28) is not set correctly, [Live Cast] cannot be used.
Check your contract details carefully, as smartphone and internet contract details may
result in high communication charges being incurred, or a limit placed on
communication traffic.
Caution:
Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject when you use
this function. Use at your own risk.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 203 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 204 -
Preparations before using [Live Cast]
1 (When connecting to a wireless access point)
Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.
(For tethering connection)
Check if your smartphone is compatible with the tethering function.
For information on how to set up the tethering function, refer to the operating instructions for your
smartphone.
Operation cannot be guaranteed on future USTREAM services and updates. The service content
and screens which can be used are subject to change without prior notice. (This service is current
as of January 2018)
3 Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID/Password.
When you connect this unit to a wireless access point (l 212), you can acquire a “LUMIX CLUB”
Login ID/Password with this unit. (l 224)
4 Use linked services with “LUMIX CLUB”.
Log in to the “LUMIX CLUB” and register/set up the USTREAM on WEB service link setup.
5 Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.
[Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 212)
Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l 213)
Setting up a connection manually (l 214)
6 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in
“Broadcasting live”. (
l 205)
Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the
smartphone application “Image App”. (l 211)
[Live Cast] is not available in the following cases:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]
j While motion picture/still picture tab [24p] is selected in the Playback Mode (l 38)
2 Acquire a USTREAM ID/Password/Programme.
Acquire a USTREAM ID/Password/Programme using a smartphone or a PC.
About the USTREAM
With this video-sharing website, you can stream and watch motion pictures this unit is recording.
Refer to the USTREAM site for details.
http://www.ustream.tv/
To use the Live Cast, access following website.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 204 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 205 -
Broadcasting live
Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Set Wireless Access Point] in
[Wi-Fi Setup] (l 212 to 215).
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Live Cast] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.
If a “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Password has not been registered to this unit yet, enter them
according to the screen.
You can register up to three wireless access points. When connecting to a wireless access point,
this unit will try to connect to wireless access points one after the other. For example, if it fails to
connect to the first one, it will try to connect to the second one. (l 220)
If you touch [Change AP], you can switch the wireless access point to another one that has been
registered to this unit.
When the connection is made correctly, the screen of this unit switches to the Live Cast Mode.
To send e-mails
You can send e-mails containing such information as the USTREAM channel name or the
scheduled broadcast date.
This unit can only set the scheduled broadcast date. (l 207) For other settings, set them on the
“LUMIX CLUB”.
On the “LUMIX CLUB”, register the destination addresses of the e-mail in advance.
To start the live broadcast
To stop the live broadcast
Touch .
When (grey) is displayed, unsent data is present. Wait until the unsent data is sent and is
displayed.
To exit the Live Cast Mode:
Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.
A message is displayed. Touch [YES] to exit.
Touch .
/ / will disappear when no touch function is
performed for a specific period of time. To display them again,
touch the screen.
A [EXIT]
R 1h20mR 1h20mR 1h20m
Touch .
If you press the start recording button, you can
simultaneously record the broadcast to this unit. The Backup
for Twin Camera function is not available.
/ / will disappear when no touch function is
performed for a specific period of time. To display them again,
touch the screen.
A [EXIT]
R 1h20mR 1h20mR 1h20m
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 205 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 206 -
About the screen indications in the Live Cast Mode
Recording is performed in Intelligent Auto Mode.
In Live Cast Mode, [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD], and [REC MODE] (l 208) is set to [PH]/
[HA]/[HG]/[HE].
If you record an image when the LCD monitor of this unit is closed with the screen facing outward,
the LCD monitor turns off.
If this unit is on the e-mail sender block list of destination devices or if their firewall setting is
enabled, the Wi-Fi function may not work correctly when you send an e-mail. If this occurs, check
the network settings.
When the live broadcast cannot be watched on a USTREAM application for TVs or smartphones,
cancel the Password for the Programme, and restart the broadcast.
Image content may be leaked to third parties depending on the USTREAM image publication
method settings. Set the publication range and Password using USTREAM if required.
/ Live broadcast indication
Line quality (l 207)
1h23m Elapsed time of the live broadcast
10fps Frame rate (l 207)
Number of people watching the live
broadcast
Up to 9999 viewers can be
indicated. The indication does not
appear when the number is 0.
E-mail delivery setting
Live broadcast microphone setting
(l 208)
The indication appears when
[Microphone On Air] is set to
[OFF].
Configuring the live broadcast settings
Touch to display the live broadcast setting
screen.
/ / will disappear when no touch function is
performed for a specific period of time. To display them again,
touch the screen.
A [EXIT]
R 1h20mR 1h20mR 1h20m
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 206 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 207 -
To configure the e-mail delivery settings
You can make the delivery setting of a broadcast notification e-mail and the setting for the
scheduled time and date of the broadcast indicated in the e-mail.
1 Touch [Send E-mail].
2 Touch [ON] or [OFF].
3
(When [ON] is selected)
To set the scheduled broadcast date.
To set the line quality
1 Touch [LINE QUALITY].
2 Touch the desired line quality.
Frame rate in parentheses are when recorded in simultaneously.
Depending on the line status of the broadband line, mobile router (tethering), etc. to which this
unit is connected, the image and sound may be interrupted or the connection may be lost. Set the
line quality on this unit by referring to the recommended optimal speeds (upstream) above.
For information on the optimal speed, contact your service provider, etc.
If the image being broadcast appears as if frames were dropped or stops when [AUTO] is set,
change [LINE QUALITY] according to your environment.
If the selected line quality has an image quality higher than the one you are using, images will
appear as if the frame rate is low.
Operation cannot be guaranteed for all devices.
Even with a broadband line, the recommended optimal speed may not be reached depending on
your environment.
Narrowband lines such as analogue modems cannot be used.
If the line for the smartphone is switched, communication may be interrupted. In that case,
connect again.
[ON]: Enables e-mailing.
[OFF]: Disables e-mailing.
[Set to Sending E-mail
Time]:
Allows you to set the date on which is touched.
[Manual Setting]: Allows you to set the desired time and date.
The setting method is the same as [CLOCK SET]. (l 28)
Line
Quality
Picture size Frame rate
Screen
indications
Recommended optimal
speed (upstream)
[High] 1280k720
5 to 25 fps
(5 to 10 fps)
3 Mbps or higher
[Medium] 640k360
5 to 25 fps
(5 to 10 fps)
1 Mbps or higher
[Low] 320k176
5 to 25 fps
(5 to 15 fps)
500 kbps or higher
[AUTO]
Use this option to check the line quality and automatically set the item.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 207 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 208 -
To save in USTREAM
1 Touch [Save in USTREAM].
2 Touch [ON] or [OFF].
To set the image quality of a motion picture you simultaneously
broadcast and record
1 Touch [REC MODE].
2 Touch desired recording mode.
To select the media
1 Touch [MEDIA SELECT].
2 Touch the media for recording motion pictures.
3 Touch [ENTER].
Broadcasting live with no sound
1 Touch [Microphone On Air].
2 Touch [OFF].
If you broadcast and record a motion picture simultaneously when this item is set to [OFF], the
sound of the broadcast will not be recorded.
[ON]: Live motion pictures are saved on USTREAM.
[OFF]: Select this option not to save on USTREAM.
[PH]/[HA]/[HG]/[HE]
[ON]: Sound is output during live broadcasts.
[OFF]: Sound is not output during live broadcasts.
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 208 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 209 -
To use the following Wi-Fi functions, you need to install the smartphone application “Image App”.
j [TWIN CAMERA]/[Multi Camera] (l 229)
j [Remote Ctrl] (l 182)
j [Baby Monitor] (l 189)
j [Hom.Monitor] (l 192)
* The supported OS version are current as of January 2018 and subject to change.
Use the latest version.
Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about function of Image App.
The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone being
used. For information on the “Image App”, check the support website below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This Site is English only.)
When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be
incurred depending on the details of your contract.
Wi-Fi
Install the “Image App”
About the “Image App”
The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic.
For Android apps For iOS apps
OS Android 4.2 or later
*
iOS 9.0 or later
*
Installation
procedure
1 Connect your Android
device to a network.
2 Select “Google Play™
Store”.
3 Enter “Panasonic Image
App” into the search
box.
4 Select “Panasonic
Image App” and install
it.
The icon will be added
to the menu.
1 Connect your iOS
device to a network.
2 Select “App Store”.
3 Enter “Panasonic Image
App” into the search
box.
4 Select “Panasonic
Image App” and install
it.
The icon will be added
to the menu.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 209 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 210 -
To use the Wi-Fi function, connect this unit to a wireless access point or smartphone via Wi-Fi.
Depending on the Wi-Fi connection method, available Wi-Fi functions differ.
If you select [History], you can set up a Wi-Fi connection that uses the connection settings of a
previously used Wi-Fi function. (l 217)
About the status indicator (l 10) and the connection status icon
when connected to Wi-Fi
For information on how to set up a Wi-Fi connection for the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function,
refer to page 229; for information on the connection status icons, refer to page 240.
Wi-Fi
Setting Up a Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi connection
methods
Connecting to a wireless access
point (l 212)
Setting up a direct connection to a
smartphone (l 215)
Available Wi-Fi
functions
[Remote Ctrl] (l 182)
[Baby Monitor] (l 189)
[Hom.Monitor] (l 192)
[DLNA Play] (l 197)
[Copy] (l 199)
[Live Cast] (l 203)
[Remote Ctrl] (l 182)
A Lit green
The status indicator is lit green while this unit is
connected to a destination device after completing a
Wi-Fi connection.
When Wi-Fi is disconnected, the status indicator is
lit red again.
B The connection status icon
When connected to wireless access point:
connected to Wi-Fi/ not connected to Wi-Fi
The display will change as follows according to the
radio wave intensity: (Weak) # # #
(Strong).
When directly connected:
connected to Wi-Fi/ not connected to Wi-Fi
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 210 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 211 -
Using the [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard] to set up a connection
With the smartphone application “Image App”, you can transfer the following information between
the smartphone and this unit.
Set [Direct Connection Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] to [ON]. (l 221)
(The default setting is [OFF].)
* Acquire a Login ID and Password for the “LUMIX CLUB” on this unit in advance.
Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l 209)
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard].
3 Touch [YES].
4 Touch [QR code] or [Wi-Fi].
When [QR code] is selected
1 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
2 On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the
screen of this unit.
The setup screen is displayed on the smartphone.
When using an iOS device, perform the following operations:
1 Select the option that allows you to install the app on the profile screen of the “Image App”, and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
2 Press the home button to close the displayed screen.
3 Touch [NEXT] on the screen of this unit to display its SSID.
4 After selecting the network name (SSID) of this unit from the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone,
start up “Image App”.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions of the smartphone to set up a connection.
When the settings is complete, the smartphone and this unit are connected directly, allowing you
to use remote operations.
Control this unit remotely with the smartphone. (l 186)
Set on the smartphone and
transfer to this unit
Clock information
Information on wireless access points (SSIDs and Passwords)
“LUMIX CLUB” Login ID, Password
*
Transfer from this unit to the
smartphone
Device ID for home monitoring
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 211 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 212 -
When [Wi-Fi] is selected
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.
2 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this
unit.
If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password
displayed on this unit’s screen into the smartphone.
It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.
3 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the
smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions of the smartphone to set up a connection.
When the settings is complete, the smartphone and this unit are connected directly, allowing you
to use remote operations.
Control this unit remotely with the smartphone. (l 186)
Connecting to a wireless access point
Check if the wireless access point you are using is compatible with WPS
j If the wireless access point is compatible with WPS:
Proceed to the following [Easy Connection (WPS)]
j If the wireless access point is not compatible with WPS:
“Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection” (l 213)
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
3 Touch [Set Wireless Access Point].
6 Set the wireless access point to waiting for WPS.
For further details, please read the operating instructions for the
wireless access point. (When using a tethering connection, please
read the operating instructions for the smartphone.)
A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch
[EXIT], and exit [Set Wireless Access Point].
A message is displayed when the connection attempt fails. Touch
[EXIT], and set the connection again.
[Easy Connection (WPS)]
4 Touch the part with no display of a wireless
access point C.
For information on how to delete wireless access points or
change the search order of wireless access points, please
refer to [Set Wireless Access Point] on page 220.
5 Touch [Easy Connection (WPS)].
A [Delete]
B [EXIT]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 212 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 213 -
Enter a PIN code to set the Wi-Fi connection
1 Touch [PIN code] in Step 6.
2 Touch the wireless access point to be connected.
If you touch [Refresh], you can search for wireless access points again.
If you touch and select a wireless access point, all characters will be displayed. In this
case, touch [OK].
3 Enter the PIN code displayed on this unit screen into the wireless access
point.
For further details, please read the operating instructions for the wireless access point. (When
using a tethering connection, please read the operating instructions for the smartphone.)
4 Touch [NEXT].
A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch [EXIT], and exit [Set Wireless
Access Point].
A message is displayed when the connection attempt fails. Touch [EXIT], and set the connection
again.
Confirm Encryption key (Password) of the selected wireless access point if the network
authentication is encrypted.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
3 Touch [Set Wireless Access Point].
If you touch and select a wireless access point, all characters will be displayed. In this
case, touch [OK].
When no wireless access points are displayed, refer to “Setting up a connection manually”.
(l 214)
If an Encryption key (Password) is not set, the connection is complete and a message is
displayed. Touch [EXIT], and exit [Set Wireless Access Point].
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j is displayed on the screen
Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection
4 Touch the part with no display of a wireless
access point C.
For information on how to delete wireless access points or
change the search order of wireless access points, please
refer to [Set Wireless Access Point] on page 220.
5 Touch [Search].
6 Touch the wireless access point to connect.
If you touch [Refresh], you can search for wireless access
points again.
A [Delete]
B [EXIT]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 213 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 214 -
7 (When there is an Encryption key (Password))
Enter the Password.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
When the entry is complete, touch [Enter].
A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch [EXIT], and exit [Set Wireless
Access Point].
When connecting by [Set Manually], confirm the SSID (Identification name), Authentication
method, Encryption type, and Encryption key (Password) of the wireless access point you are
using.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.
2 Touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
3 Touch [Set Wireless Access Point].
7 Touch the desired Network Authentication method.
When [WEP] is selected, proceed according to step 9.
8 Touch the desired Encryption method.
If you select [NONE], a message is displayed after completing the connection. Touch [EXIT], and
exit [Set Wireless Access Point].
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j is displayed on the screen
Setting up a connection manually
4 Touch the part with no display of a wireless
access point C.
For information on how to delete wireless access points or
change the search order of wireless access points, please
refer to [Set Wireless Access Point] on page 220.
5 Touch [Set Manually].
6 Touch [INPUT], then enter the SSID of the
wireless access point to be connected.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
When the entry is complete, touch [Enter].
A [Delete]
B [EXIT]
Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set
[Open] [NONE]/[WEP]
[WEP] There is no setup of an encryption types.
[WPA-PSK]/[WPA2-PSK] [TKIP]/[AES]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 214 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 215 -
9 (When selecting [WEP]/[TKIP]/[AES])
Touch [INPUT], then enter the Password.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
When the entry is complete, touch [Enter].
A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch [EXIT], and exit [Set Wireless
Access Point].
Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when a saving wireless access
point.
The Encryption methods are [AES], [TKIP] and [WEP] in descending order of strength.
We recommend you connect with the strongest possible Encryption method.
When the signal of the wireless access point is weak, a connection may not be established.
Refer to “Messages” (l 265) and “Troubleshooting” (l 267) for details.
Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is
used in.
Setting up a direct connection to a smartphone
Check the [Direct Connection Password] setting in [Wi-Fi Setup]. (l 221)
The default setting is [OFF].
Select [ON] as needed, for example when the setting seems necessary for your Wi-Fi
environment.
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]
j Proceed to the following section, “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]” in
“Using [Remote Ctrl] with a direct connection”. (l 184)
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]
If your smartphone is compatible with WPS, refer to “[Easy Connection (WPS)]”. If not, refer to
“Connecting with QR code”.
j Proceed to the following [Easy Connection (WPS)] (l 216)
j Proceed to the “Connecting with QR code” (l 216)
j Proceed to the “Connecting by entering an SSID and Password” (l 217)
When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, refer to When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]”
in “Using [Remote Ctrl] with a direct connection”. (l 185)
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j is displayed on the screen
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 215 ページ 2018年2月23日 金曜日 午前9時9分
- 216 -
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [Direct Connection].
3 Touch [Change connection type].
4 Touch [Easy Connection (WPS)].
5 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.
6 Set the smartphone to WPS Mode.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [Direct Connection].
3 Touch [Change connection type].
4 Touch [QR code].
QR code is displayed on the screen of this unit.
5 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
6 On the smartphone, select [QR code], and scan the QR code displayed on the
screen of this unit.
When using an Android device, the smartphone and this unit are connected directly, allowing you
to use remote operations.
Control this unit remotely with the smartphone. (l 186)
For information on how to exit [Remote Ctrl], refer to page 185.
When using an iOS device, perform the following operations:
1 Select the option that allows you to install the app on the profile screen of the “Image App”, and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
2 Press the home button to close the displayed screen.
3 Select the network name (SSID) of this unit from the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone.
When the QR code cannot be scanned, refer to “Connecting by entering an SSID and Password”.
[Easy Connection (WPS)]
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j is displayed on the screen
Connecting with QR code
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j is displayed on the screen
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 216 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 217 -
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [Direct Connection].
3 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.
4 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this
unit.
5 Enter the Password displayed on this unit’s screen on the smartphone.
Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is
used in.
Connecting from the history
Each use of a Wi-Fi function is stored in the Wi-Fi connection history. Connecting from the history
allows you to easily set up a connection using the previous connection settings.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [History].
2 Touch the desired item to be connected.
The history of Wi-Fi functions and connection destinations that have been used is displayed as a
list.
For periods when a smartphone, etc. and this unit were connected directly, only the list of Wi-Fi
functions is displayed.
Each item stores its [Direct Connection Password] setting (l 221). Connections without a
password are displayed with [No Password] on the history list.
To display the connection details, touch [DETAIL].
3 Touch [ENTER].
When the connection is complete, a message will be displayed and the screen will switch to the
Wi-Fi function screen selected in step 2. Perform the operation of the selected Wi-Fi function.
If you have selected [Remote Ctrl], start up the smartphone application “Image App” after
checking that “Under remote control” is displayed on the LCD monitor.
If the connection cannot be established, check the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone.
The history can store up to 8 most-recently used Wi-Fi connections.
In the following cases, the Wi-Fi connection will not be stored in the history:
j If you set up a Wi-Fi connection from [Set Wireless Access Point] in [Wi-Fi Setup]
j If you set up a Wi-Fi connection for the Wireless Multi-Camera function (l 233)
Connecting by entering an SSID and Password
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j is displayed on the screen
Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete
j The status indicator of this unit is lit green
j The following icons are displayed on the screen:
When connected to wireless access point:
When directly connected:
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 217 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 218 -
If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established
Please refer to the operating instruction of the device in use for details about the setting of the
wireless access point or smartphone.
Problem Check points
It cannot connect to the
wireless access point.
The wireless access point
is not detected.
(General)
Turn ON the wireless access point.
Approach the wireless access point and reconnect.
If it takes time to complete the connection, the Wi-Fi
connection will be aborted.
Reset the connection settings.
Check how to connect to the wireless access point and how
to set the security settings.
If the wireless access point supports both the 2.4 GHz band
and the 5 GHz band, check if the setting for the 2.4 GHz band
is enabled.
Make sure the wireless access point is registered in this unit.
(l 220)
The device may be unable to locate the wireless access point
due to problems with the signal. Refer to “Setting up a
connection manually”. (l 214)
([Easy Connection (WPS)])
Make sure the wireless access point is in the correct WPS
standby mode.
Make sure the PIN code has been correctly input.
([Search] or [Set Manually])
Make sure the SSID and password have been correctly input.
Check the Authentication method, Encryption type, and
Encryption key (Password).
Radio waves of the
wireless access point get
disconnected.
The condition may improved by moving the location or
changing the angle of the wireless access point.
If you use another 2.4 GHz band device such as a microwave
oven or cordless telephone nearby, you may interrupt the
signal. Keep a sufficient distance from these types of devices.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 218 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 219 -
The Wi-Fi connection is
not possible between this
unit and a smartphone.
(Wireless Access Point Connection)
Make sure the smartphone is properly connected to the
wireless access point by checking the Wi-Fi settings of the
smartphone.
Make sure this unit and the smartphone are connected to the
same wireless access point.
Make sure the wireless access point is registered in this unit.
(l 220)
(Direct Connection)
Check the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone to see if the SSID
of this unit is selected so that a Wi-Fi connection will be made
from the smartphone to this unit.
Make sure the SSID and password have been correctly input.
Make sure the smartphone is not connected to the wireless
access point. If it is connected to the wireless access point,
change the Wi-Fi access point using the smartphone’s Wi-Fi
set up.
It takes long time every
time to connect to a
smartphone.
It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi-Fi
connection setting of the smartphone, but it is not a
malfunction.
This unit is not displayed
in the Wi-Fi setting screen
of the smartphone.
Try switching the ON/OFF of the Wi-Fi function in the Wi-Fi
settings of the smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection is
disconnected immediately.
If there is a setting for avoiding poor connection in the Wi-Fi
setting menu of the Android device, turn it OFF.
When this unit is
connected to a wireless
access point and “Image
App” is started up, it
cannot find this unit.
Close “Image App”, and press the Wi-Fi button on this unit to
terminate the Wi-Fi connection. After that, reconnect this unit
to the wireless access point, and start up “Image App”.
Problem Check points
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 219 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 220 -
Configure various settings necessary to use the Wi-Fi function.
When connected to Wi-Fi, the settings cannot be changed.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch desired menu item.
You can add or delete wireless access points, or rearrange the display order of wireless access
points.
Up to 3 wireless access points can be set.
Please refer to page 212 for details about [Set Wireless Access Point].
To add a wireless access point
To switch the search order
1 Touch the access point you want to switch the order.
2 Switch the order by touching or .
To change the wireless access point, delete one of the registered wireless access points, and
then add one.
Please refer to page 211.
Please refer to page 215.
Wi-Fi
How to Use the [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
[Set Wireless Access
Point]
1 Touch the part where no wireless access
points are displayed D.
2 Configure the wireless access point settings.
(
l 212)
To delete a wireless access point
1 Touch the wireless access point to be
deleted.
2 Touch [Delete].
The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to delete.
A [Set Wireless Access Point]
B [Delete]
C [EXIT]
[Wi-Fi Setup Wizard]
[Direct Connection]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 220 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 221 -
This setting controls whether or not a password is required when you directly connect this unit and a
smartphone to start remote operations or to use the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function.
If you select [OFF], you can directly connect this unit and a smartphone without entering the
password for this unit’s SSID into the smartphone.
If you select [OFF], you cannot set up a connection with [Easy Connection (WPS)] or [QR code].
Set up a connection by setting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone. (l 184, 229, 233)
The default setting is [OFF]. If you perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings], the default setting will be
restored. (l 48, 222)
You can use this unit as a Wireless Sub Camera.
For the connection procedure and other details, check the website below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].
Please refer to page 224.
Please refer to page 196.
If you set [ON], the LCD monitor turns off when remotely operating this unit with a smartphone (in
Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode) so that power consumption is
reduced.
When the LCD monitor is turned off, you can display the screen by touching it.
If the Wi-Fi connection is turned off, this unit will turn off automatically approximately 15 minutes
later.
[Direct Connection
Password]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Wireless Sub Camera]
[LUMIX CLUB]
[Home Monitor Connect]
[ECONOMY (Wi-Fi)]
[ON]/[OFF]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 221 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 222 -
This will set/clear the Password to limit the startup of the Wi-Fi setting menu.
By setting the Password, it will prevent erroneous operation, prevent wrongful use of the Wi-Fi
function by third party, and protect the set personal information.
1 Touch [Setup].
2 Touch [INPUT], and enter the Password (6 characters).
After finish entering the Password, touch [Enter].
If the Password has already been set, is displayed.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
3 Touch [NEXT].
4 Touch [INPUT], and enter the same Password again.
After finish entering the Password, touch [Enter].
If the Passwords match with each other, a message is displayed.
5 Touch [EXIT].
If you set the Wi-Fi Password, you will need to enter the Password each time you touch [Wi-Fi
Setup] on the Wi-Fi home screen.
When you forget your Wi-Fi Password, perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] from the Setup menu. This
will set the Wi-Fi setting to the condition at the time of purchase, and you will be able to use the
Wi-Fi setting menu. (l 48)
You can change the Wi-Fi setting back to the default condition.
The “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Wi-Fi Password are also deleted.
Information on wireless access points, smartphones, and Wireless Sub Cameras registered to
this unit is also deleted.
You can view and change this unit’s Device name (SSID), which is used for operating this unit as a
wireless access point.
1 Touch [INPUT], and enter the desired Device name (SSID).
Input up to 20 characters are recommended. All the characters cannot be confirmed when
displaying the Device names on this unit if a long Device name is used. (l 184, 217, 229, 233)
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
Touch [Enter].
2 Touch [EXIT].
If you are going to connect directly to a smartphone after changing the Device name (SSID), set
the connection again with the changed Device name (SSID). (l 184, 217, 229, 233)
The Password entered during the setting of direct connection cannot be changed. (l 217, 229,
233)
[Wi-Fi Password]
[Setup]/[Delete]
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]
[Device Name]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 222 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 223 -
You can change or check your wireless LAN’s network settings, such as the [IP Address], [Subnet
Mask] and [MAC Address].
If you touch [AUTO], the network settings are configured automatically. If you touch [MANUAL],
you can set each item. Select the item you want to set, and set it.
[MAC Address] cannot be changed.
You can test the connection between this unit and the wireless access point. The following
connections can be verified:
j Connection to the wireless access point
j Connection to “LUMIX CLUB”
j Connection to USTREAM
j Connection to the home monitor server
1 Touch [NEXT].
The connection test starts.
2 Check the connection test result, and touch [EXIT].
If the connection is successful, “±” is displayed. If the connection is not successful, “t” is
displayed.
To test the connection to “LUMIX CLUB” or USTREAM, you need to make other settings in
advance. (l 204)
You can change the workgroup setting.
When copying scenes or still pictures to a PC using a Wi-Fi function [Copy], you need to create a
shared folder on the PC and connect this unit to the workgroup to which the PC belongs.
(The default setting is [WORKGROUP].)
For information on how to create a shared folder, refer to page 200.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
A maximum of 15 characters can be entered.
[Wireless LAN setup]
[IP Address]/[Subnet Mask]/[Gateway]/[Primary DNS]/[Secondary DNS]/[MAC Address]
[Connection Test]
[PC Connect Setup]
[Change]/[Return to default]
[Change]: Enter the name of the workgroup to which the destination PC belongs.
[Return to default]: This will set to the condition at the time of purchase.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 223 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 224 -
Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID (free).
You can upload the scenes and still pictures recorded with this unit to WEB service with [Remote
Ctrl] or use the [Live Cast] function if you register to “LUMIX CLUB”.
You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID for this unit and a smartphone.
When Login ID is acquired over the smartphone (“Image App”) only, it is possible to register the
same Login ID to this unit using the “Image App”. (l 225)
When different Login IDs are acquired for this unit and the smartphone, change one of the Login
ID and Password to the one you like to keep.
Set a wireless access point in [Set Wireless Access Point]. (l 212)
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [LUMIX CLUB].
3 Touch [Add/Change Account].
4 Touch [New account].
Connect to the network. Proceed to the next page by touching [NEXT].
5 Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms then touch [Agree].
Touch [EXIT] to cancel the process without acquiring a Login ID.
6 Touch [NEXT] and enter a Password.
Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the Password.
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
7 Check the Login ID and touch [OK].
The Login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically. When logging in to the “LUMIX
CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the numbers.
Be sure to make a note of the Login ID and Password.
Check or change the acquired Login ID/Password
To change the “LUMIX CLUB” Password on this unit, access the “LUMIX CLUB” website from
your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” Password in advance.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [LUMIX CLUB].
3 Touch [Add/Change Account].
4 Touch [
Change Account
].
The Login ID and Password are displayed.
The Password is displayed as “ ”.
5 Touch [
Login ID
] or [Password].
6 Enter the Login ID or Password, and touch [Enter].
For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 137.
Input the Password that was changed with the smartphone or the PC.
Using the “LUMIX CLUB”
Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 224 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 225 -
Register the Login ID of the smartphone (“Image App”) into this unit
It is convenient to match the Login IDs for this unit and the smartphone (“Image App”) when using
the Wi-Fi function utilising the “LUMIX CLUB”.
1 Connect this unit to the smartphone.
2 From the “Image App” menu, set the common Login ID.
Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use
Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [LUMIX CLUB].
3 Touch [Terms of use].
This unit will connect to the network and the terms of use will be displayed. Touch [EXIT] to close
the menu after checking the terms of use.
Delete your Login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”
Delete the Login ID from this unit when transferring it to another party or disposing of it. You can
also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].
2 Touch [LUMIX CLUB].
3 Touch [Delete account].
The message is displayed. Touch [NEXT].
4 Touch [YES] in the Login ID delete confirmation screen.
The message is displayed. Touch [NEXT].
5 Touch [YES] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB”
account.
The message is displayed. Touch [NEXT].
If you are not deleting the “LUMIX CLUB” account, only the Login ID will be erased when [NO] is
selected.
6 Touch [EXIT].
Changes and other actions to Login IDs can only be made to the Login ID acquired with this unit.
When sending images to WEB services, the WEB service being used must be registered with the
“LUMIX CLUB”. Registering multiple WEB services will send images to all services simultaneously.
Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible WEB services.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
Preparation:
Make sure that you have created an account on the WEB service you want to use, and have the
login information available.
1 Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.
2 Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Password and log in to the service.
3 Save your e-mail address.
4 Select the WEB service to be used and save it.
Follow the instructions on the screen to save the service.
Using WEB services
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 225 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 226 -
When this unit and one or more smartphones are connected via Wi-Fi, you can display the image
transmitted from the smartphone on this unit’s Sub Window and record it simultaneously with the
Main Camera’s image. (Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera)
* For the series
Use your Wireless Sub Camera to enjoy recording your own face or any scenery different from what
is being recorded with the Main Camera.
C Sub Window
The image transmitted from the Wireless Sub Camera is displayed on the Sub Window.
Wireless Twin Camera function
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function
In these operating instructions, a function that displays an image from one smartphone in
one Sub Window is referred to as “Wireless Twin Camera”, and a function that displays
images from up to three smartphones and the Sub Camera of this unit
*
in two Sub
Windows is referred to as “Wireless Multi-Camera”.
A Smartphone (Wireless Sub Camera)
B This unit (Main Camera)
Recording different types
of subjects in one image
Recording the same
subject from different
angles
Recording a view seen
from the subject
These operating instructions describe the procedure for connecting this unit and a
smartphone.
For information on non-smartphone devices that support the Wireless Sub Camera
function and the procedures for using them, check the support website below.
(As of January 2018)
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
WXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 226 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 227 -
Wireless Multi-Camera function
Connecting multiple smartphones to this unit via Wi-Fi allows you to simultaneously display two Sub
Windows and record images in them.
Up to three smartphones can be connected simultaneously. (l 233)
(For the series)
You can also use the Sub Camera of this unit
*
.
* When the LCD monitor is either closed or closed with the screen facing outward, the Sub Camera
does not work. Open the LCD monitor.
WXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 227 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 228 -
Notes on the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function
The performance of the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function varies depending on the surrounding
radio wave conditions. Since the human body blocks radio waves, it is also influenced by how
crowded the area is.
Recording tips
Use your Wireless Sub Camera in a position where as much of it as possible can be seen from
the position of this unit.
When the signal between this unit and the Wireless Sub Camera weakens, a warning icon
appears. In such a case, close the distance between them.
We recommend that you attach a tripod to this unit when recording.
When using a smartphone as a Wireless Sub Camera
The Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function commands the smartphone to process images and
transmit Wi-Fi signals.
Image processing performance, Wi-Fi signal transmission performance, and the antenna location
vary depending on the smartphone.
The Sub Window’s image, which is transmitted from the smartphone, is displayed with a slight
delay compared to the Main camera’s image.
Depending on the device and environment, movement in the image transmitted from the
smartphone may not look smooth or may look as if frames were missed. This is particularly the
case with vertical orientation, which increases the smartphone’s processing burden.
For information on the setup of your smartphone, refer to its operating instructions.
Please also refer to “If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established”. (l 218)
Keep the following points in mind when using a smartphone as a Wireless Twin/Multi-
Camera:
We recommend that you use an Android device with a Quad Core or higher CPU or the latest
iOS device.
We recommend that you look at the image transmitted from your smartphone in advance to
check the optimal recording distance for the smartphone, the easiest way to hold it, and other
recording conditions.
We recommend that you turn off the smartphone’s GPS and Bluetooth functions, which may
affect the Wireless Sub Camera’s image.
We recommend that you close as many other applications as possible.
Recording consumes a large amount of battery power. When recording for a long period of
time, pay attention to the remaining battery power.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 228 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 229 -
When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a
Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the
Wireless Twin Camera function)
(For the series)
Exit the Twin Camera function. (l 58)
The default setting for [Direct Connection Password] is [OFF].
The QR code is not displayed when [Direct Connection Password] (l 221) is set to [OFF].
Refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection”
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera
Using a Smartphone as a Wireless Sub
Camera
You need to turn on the Wi-Fi function of your smartphone.
Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD] or [MP4].
Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l 209)
Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection
1 (When using the Wi-Fi menu screen)
Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch
[TWIN CAMERA].
A [TWIN CAMERA]
B [EXIT]
WXF1
1/2
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 229 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 230 -
(When using the recording screen)
Touch the recording screen on this unit and
touch .
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]
Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]”. (l 231)
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]
Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]”. (l 231)
2 Touch [Smartphone] on the screen of
this unit.
3 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the
smartphone’s setup menu.
A [Wireless Twin Camera]
B [Smartphone]
C [Other Camera]
D [CANCEL]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 230 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 231 -
4 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this
unit.
It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.
5 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the
smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
6 (If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit)
Confirm the message, and touch [YES] on the screen of this unit.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the image being captured by the smartphone will be
displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.
3
4 Touch [Wi-Fi] on the screen of this unit.
5 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this
unit.
If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password
displayed on this unit’s screen on the smartphone.
It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.
6 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the
smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the image being captured by the smartphone will be
displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.
The following operations allow you to register up to ten smartphones. If the number exceeds ten,
smartphone information with the oldest registration date and time will be deleted.
j Setting [Direct Connection Password] to [OFF] and connecting this unit and a smartphone
directly.
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 231 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 232 -
Set [Direct Connection Password] to [ON]. (l 221)
(When using the recording screen)
Touch the recording screen on this unit and
touch .
5 On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the
screen of this unit.
When using an iOS device, perform the following operations:
1 Select the option that allows you to install the app on the profile screen of the “Image App”, and
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
2 Press the home button to close the displayed screen.
3 Touch [NEXT] on the screen of this unit to display its SSID.
4 After selecting the network name (SSID) of this unit from the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone,
start up “Image App”.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the image being captured by the smartphone will be
displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.
If the QR code cannot be scanned, refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set
up a connection”. (l 229)
Scanning a QR code to set up a connection
1 (When using the Wi-Fi menu screen)
Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and
touch [TWIN CAMERA].
A [TWIN CAMERA]
B [EXIT]
2 Touch [Smartphone] on the screen of
this unit.
3 Touch [QR code] on the screen of this
unit.
4 Start up the smartphone application
“Image App”.
A [Wireless Twin Camera]
B [Smartphone]
C [Other Camera]
D [CANCEL]
1/2
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 232 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 233 -
When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a
Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the
Wireless Multi-Camera function)
The default setting for [Direct Connection Password] is [OFF].
The QR code is not displayed when [Direct Connection Password] (l 221) is set to [OFF].
Refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection”.
Up to three smartphones can be connected simultaneously.
You cannot register one smartphone as multiple Wireless Sub Cameras.
3 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]
Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]”. (l 234)
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]
Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]”. (l 234)
Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch
[Multi Camera].
A [Multi Camera]
B [EXIT]
2 Touch [Unregistered] to register the
smartphone to be connected.
Touching [Unregistered] will start a Wi-Fi connection.
C [Unregistered]
D [Reset]
E [ENTER]
1/2
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 233 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 234 -
4 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this
unit.
It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.
5 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the
smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
6 (If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit)
Confirm the message “Connect this smartphone?”, and touch [YES] on the
screen of this unit.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the device name of the smartphone will be
displayed on the registration screen in Step 2.
Repeat Steps 2–6 to register and use two or more smartphones.
(For the series)
When using the Sub Camera of this unit, you can use the Wireless Multi-Camera function with
only one registered smartphone. Rotate the Sub Camera to enable it. (l 56)
7 Touch [ENTER] to complete the registration.
(For the series)
The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit or the image being captured
by the Sub Camera of this unit* will be displayed in a Sub Window of this unit.
* Displayed if you have connected one smartphone to this unit and enabled the Sub Camera of this
unit.
(For the series/ series/ series)
The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit will be displayed in a Sub
Window of this unit.
If you touch , the registration will be cancelled.
3
4 Touch [Wi-Fi] on the screen of this unit.
5 On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this
unit.
If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password
displayed on this unit’s screen on the smartphone.
It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.
6 When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the
smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the device name of the smartphone will be
displayed on the registration screen in Step 2.
Repeat Steps 2–6 to register and use two or more smartphones.
(For the series)
When using the Sub Camera of this unit, you can use the Wireless Multi-Camera function with
only one registered smartphone. Rotate the Sub Camera to enable it. (l 56)
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]
When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 234 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 235 -
7 Touch [ENTER] to complete the registration.
(For the series)
The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit or the image being captured
by the Sub Camera of this unit* will be displayed in a Sub Window of this unit.
* Displayed if you have connected one smartphone to this unit and enabled the Sub Camera of this
unit.
(For the series/ series/ series)
The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit will be displayed in a Sub
Window of this unit.
If you touch , the registration will be cancelled.
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 235 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 236 -
Set [Direct Connection Password] to [ON]. (l 221)
3 Touch [QR code] on the screen of this unit.
4 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
5 On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the
screen of this unit.
When using an iOS device, refer to page 232 in Step 5.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the device name of the smartphone will be
displayed on the registration screen in Step 2.
If the QR code cannot be scanned, refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set
up a connection”. (l 233)
Repeat Steps 2–5 to register and use two or more smartphones.
(For the series)
When using the Sub Camera of this unit, you can use the Wireless Multi-Camera function with
only one registered smartphone. Rotate the Sub Camera to enable it. (l 56)
6 Touch [ENTER] to complete the registration.
(For the series)
The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit or the image being captured
by the Sub Camera of this unit* will be displayed in a Sub Window of this unit.
* Displayed if you have connected one smartphone to this unit and enabled the Sub Camera of this
unit.
Scanning a QR code to set up a connection
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch
[Multi Camera].
A [Multi Camera]
B [EXIT]
2 Touch [Unregistered] to register the
smartphone to be connected.
Touching [Unregistered] will start a Wi-Fi connection.
C [Unregistered]
D [Reset]
E [ENTER]
1/2
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 236 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 237 -
(For the series/ series/ series)
The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit will be displayed in a Sub
Window of this unit.
If you touch , the registration will be cancelled.
You cannot connect devices other than smartphones for the Wireless Multi-Camera function.
Changing the [Direct Connection Password] setting clears registered smartphones.
When you have made a connection with [Direct Connection Password] set to [ON], connect the
second and subsequent smartphones with the same setting. The smartphones can be connected
even if different connection methods, [Wi-Fi] and [QR code], are used for them.
The following operation allows you to register up to ten smartphones. If the number exceeds ten,
smartphone information with the oldest registration date and time will be deleted. (Smartphones
may become unregistered when you use the Wireless Multi-Camera function.)
j Setting [Direct Connection Password] to [OFF] and connecting this unit and a smartphone
directly.
You can also switch the image in the Sub Window. Refer to “Switching the image in the Sub
Window” on page 244.
When connecting for the second time or later
1 Touch the recording screen on this unit and
touch .
2 Start up the smartphone application “Image
App”.
This unit and the smartphone will be connected via Wi-Fi.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the image being
captured by the smartphone will be displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.
If the connection cannot be established or no image appears on the Sub Window, follow the steps
below to set up the connection again:
1 Close the smartphone application “Image App”.
2 Touch the recording screen of this unit again and touch .
3 Touch [Change Device] on the screen of this unit.
After completing the steps above, follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting this unit’s
SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection” in “When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a
Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the Wireless Twin Camera function)”. (l 229)
[History] allows you to set up a Wi-Fi connection with the Wi-Fi function settings you have used
before. (l 217)
To use the Wireless Twin Camera function
VX1
V800
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 237 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 238 -
To use the last connected smartphones
3 Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.
This unit and the smartphone will be connected via Wi-Fi. When the connection to this unit is
complete, the image being captured by the smartphone will be displayed on the Sub Window of
this unit.
If the connection cannot be established or no image appears on the Sub Window, follow the steps
below to set up the connection again:
1 Touch the screen of this unit and touch .
2 Touch [Change Device] on the screen of this unit.
3 Close the smartphone application “Image App”, and then touch [Reset] on the device
registration screen.
4 Touch [YES].
After completing the steps above, follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting this unit’s
SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection” in “When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a
Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the Wireless Multi-Camera function)”. (l 233)
To replace the registered smartphones
To use the Wireless Multi-Camera function
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch
[Multi Camera].
2 Touch [ENTER].
A [Multi Camera]
B [EXIT]
1 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch
[Multi Camera].
2 Touch the name of the registered device you
want to replace.
Close the smartphone application “Image App”, and then
follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 233.
To set up a connection by scanning a QR code, follow
the procedure from Step 3 on page 236.
When the connection to this unit is complete, the device
name will be changed to that of the newly-registered
device.
C [Reset]
D [ENTER]
1/2
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 238 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 239 -
To clear all of the registered smartphones
Close the smartphone application “Image App”, and then touch [Reset] on the device
registration screen.
A message will be displayed. Touching [YES] will clear all the registered information, and device
names will be indicated as [Unregistered].
Wi-Fi connections made with the Wireless Multi-Camera function are not saved as records in
[History].
Terminating the connection
1 Touch the recording screen on this unit and
touch .
2 Touch [EXIT] on the screen of this unit.
The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated.
Close the “Image App” on the smartphone.
You can also terminate the connection by pressing the Wi-Fi button on this unit.
If you press the Wi-Fi button during recording pause, a message will be displayed. To terminate
the connection, touch [YES].
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 239 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 240 -
1 Connect a smartphone to this unit as a Wireless Sub Camera. (l 229, 233)
2 Start recording.
Recording and Sub Window operations cannot be performed until all of the Sub Windows are
displayed.
Screen display when using a Wireless Sub Camera
Connection status icons for a Wireless Sub Camera
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera
Recording with a Wireless Sub Camera
(Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera)
(For the series)
The Sub Camera of this unit is not available for the Wireless Twin Camera function.
An image recorded with the Main Camera and the Wireless Sub Camera’s image
displayed on the Sub Window are recorded as a single scene or still picture*. When you
play back such a scene or still picture, it is not possible to delete only the Sub Window
image or hide it.
If you set [Backup for Twin Camera] to [ON], when recording images with the Wireless
Twin/Multi-Camera function, you can also record the Main Camera’s image without the
Sub Window image as a separate scene. (l 62)
* When the Wireless Multi-Camera function is in use, still pictures cannot be recorded.
A Lit green
The status indicator (l 10) is lit green when the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function is
activated.
When Wi-Fi is disconnected, the status indicator is lit red again.
When a Wireless Sub Camera is connected :
B When using the Wireless Twin Camera function
The display will change as follows according to the radio wave intensity: (Weak) #
# # (Strong).
C When using the Wireless Multi-Camera function (example: Wireless Sub Camera 1)
The display will change as follows according to the radio wave intensity: (Weak) #
# # (Strong).
The number for the icon varies depending on the selected Wireless Sub Camera. (1–3)
WXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 240 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 241 -
When the Wi-Fi signal weakens
If the signal weakens when the Sub Window is displayed, the connection status icon changes to
/ (Weak) and / flashes on the Sub Window.
If the signal weakens further, the connection status icon changes to / and the Sub
Window image disappears.
You cannot perform the following operation of the Sub Window:
j Changing the display position of the Sub Window (Only for Wireless Twin Camera)
j Changing the colour of the Sub Window frame
When using the Wireless Twin Camera function
When using the Wireless Multi-Camera function
(When the signal condition for Wireless Sub Camera 1 weakens)
You can operate the Sub Window again when the signal becomes stronger.
Your Wi-Fi connection may be terminated depending on the smartphone.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 241 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 242 -
Displaying or hiding the Sub Window
Touch .
Each time you touch the icon, you can display or hide the
Sub Window.
When the Sub Window is hidden, the Sub Window will not be
recorded.
Sub Window size when using a Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera
The size of the image displayed on the Sub Window varies depending on the smartphone camera
and the orientation of the smartphone.
Example: Sub Window display when the Main Camera’s aspect ratio is set to 16:9
(The yellow frames correspond to the size of the image be displayed on the Sub Window.)
* Depending on the smartphone, it may not be possible to use horizontal orientation.
Smartphone orientation Vertical Horizontal
*
Sub Window display
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 242 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 243 -
Changing the Wireless Twin Camera settings
1 Touch Sub Window.
2 Touch the display position you want to change.
Depending on the display position of the Sub Window, the
positions of the icons displayed on the screen may change.
1 Touch Sub Window.
2 Touch .
3 Touch , and select the desired frame.
Changing the display position of the Sub Window
Changing the colour of the Sub Window frame
1 : Pink
A [FRAMING]
2 : Green
3 : Orange
4 : Grey
5 : Drop shadow
*
6 : No frame
* This adds a drop shadow on the right and bottom sides.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 243 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 244 -
Changing the Wireless Multi-Camera settings
1 Touch Sub Window to be changed.
The selected Sub Window will be highlighted in yellow.
2 Touch the display position you want to change.
Depending on the display position of the Sub Window, the
positions of the icons displayed on the screen may change.
You cannot move a Sub Window to the display positions for
the other Sub Window.
1 Touch Sub Window to be changed.
2 Touch .
3 Touch , and select the desired frame.
1 Touch Sub Window to be switched.
The selected Sub Window will be highlighted in yellow.
The Sub Camera select icons will be displayed and the selected icon will be highlighted in yellow.
2 Touch the desired icon to switch the image in the Sub Window.
Changing the display position of the Sub Window
Changing the colour of the Sub Window frame
1 : Pink
A [FRAMING]
2 : Green
3 : Orange
4 : Grey
5 : Drop shadow
*
6 : No frame
* This adds a drop shadow on the right and bottom sides.
Switching the image in the Sub Window
: Displays the image from the Sub Camera of this unit
( series).
A Sub Camera select icons
: Displays the image from Wireless Sub Camera 1.
: Displays the image from Wireless Sub Camera 2.
: Displays the image from Wireless Sub Camera 3.
: OFF
WXF1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 244 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 245 -
(For the series)
If you have touched (Sub Camera of this unit), rotate the Sub Camera of this unit to enable
it.
*
* When the LCD monitor is closed with the screen facing outward, the Sub Camera does not work.
Open the LCD monitor.
If you have touched / / (Wireless Sub Camera 1/2/3), connect the registered
smartphone to this unit and start up “Image App”.
In the following cases, the Sub Window frame will be displayed on the LCD monitor of this unit,
but it will not be recorded. After the Sub Camera select icons disappear, the Sub Window is
displayed in semi-transparent grey.
j When you leave the Sub Camera of this unit closed even after touching (Sub Camera of
this unit)
j When the registered smartphone that you have selected by touching //
(Wireless Sub Camera 1/2/3) is not connected to this unit, or when the Wi-Fi signal between
the smartphone and this unit is weak.
j When you have touched (OFF)
(For the series)
When the image for a Sub Window is set to (Sub Camera of this unit), the following Sub
Window settings can be changed:
j Changing the size of the Sub Window (l 59)
j Zooming in/out the Sub Window (l 59)
j Setting and adjusting the Sub Camera and the Sub Window (WB/Brightness/Focus/Narration
Mode) (l 60)
1 Touch Sub Window to be swapped.
The selected Sub Window will be highlighted in yellow.
The Sub Camera select icons will be displayed and the
selected icon will be highlighted in yellow.
2 Touch the icon selected for the other Sub
Window.
The Sub Window images will be swapped.
It takes some time until the Sub Window appears.
You cannot set this unit to Playback Mode when it is connected to a Wireless Sub Camera.
The following button icons may not be displayed when the Sub Window is displayed. To display
them, touch the Main Camera’s image on the screen.
j (Touch Menu)
j / (Zoom button icons)
j (Recording button icon)
j Recording Mode button icon (l 64)
The following functions do not work:
j Creative Control Mode
j HDR Movie Mode
j FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
j Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode
j Setup menu items
j Eye-Fi transfer feature
Swapping the images between the Sub Windows
T
W
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 245 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 246 -
j Switching to other Wi-Fi functions
j Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
j Recording format [24p]
(For the series/ series/ series)
j 4K Photo Mode
j Recording format [4K MP4]
j Cinema Like Effect Mode
The following functions do not work when the Sub Window is displayed:
j Touch Shutter
j [FACE FRAMING]
j AF/AE tracking
j Optical Image Stabilizer Lock
The following settings are disabled when a Wireless Sub Camera’s image is displayed in a Sub
Window:
j Sub Window settings (WB/Brightness/Focus/Narration)
j Magnification level and size of the Sub Window
Depending on recording conditions, the colour balance, brightness and other settings may differ
between the Main Camera and the Wireless Sub Camera.
Recording menu items, operation icons, and functions such as Image Stabilizer, Level Shot
Function and [QUICK POWER ON] work only for the Main Camera.
The Fade function’s image effects do not affect the Sub Window.
When the “Image App” screen disappears, image transmission to the Sub Window stops. (The
Wi-Fi connection stays connected.) This may occur when, for example, the smartphone receives
a call or you press the home button.
If you start up “Image App” on the smartphone again, image transmission to the Main Camera will
restart and the Sub Window will be displayed automatically.
You cannot record Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera images on the smartphone.
(While using the Wireless Twin Camera function)
When you record still pictures, it may take longer than usual to achieve focus. (l 35)
Simultaneous recording of still pictures is not possible while recording a motion picture or using
PRE-REC.
If an image is not received from the Wireless Sub Camera selected for a Sub Window for
4 minutes (approx.) or more, the Wi-Fi connection will be terminated. (It will not be terminated
while motion picture is being recorded.)
(While using the Wireless Multi-Camera function)
This function is available only in Motion Picture Recording Mode. You cannot switch to Still
Picture Recording Mode or take still pictures.
If an image is not received from the Wireless Sub Camera selected for a Sub Window for
4 minutes (approx.) or more, the Wi-Fi connection will be terminated. (It will not be terminated
while motion picture is being recorded or an image is being received from either of the Sub
Windows.)
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 246 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 247 -
For information on the setup of your smartphone, refer to its operating instructions.
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera
If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be
established (Wireless Twin/Multi-
Camera)
Problem Check points
Cannot connect this unit
to the smartphone.
No image on the Sub
Window.
Check the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone to see if the SSID
of this unit is selected so that a Wi-Fi connection will be made
from the smartphone to this unit.
If the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point or
another video camera that supports the Wireless Twin/Multi-
Camera function, after terminating the connection, select the
SSID of this unit from the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setup menu and
restart the “Image App”.
If you are unsure about the SSID of this unit, connecting to a
smartphone different from the previously connected
smartphone or changed the [Direct Connection Password]
setting after connecting to a smartphone, follow the steps
below to set up the connection again:
(While using the Wireless Twin Camera function)
1 Close the “Image App” on the smartphone.
2 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit to exit the Wireless Twin
Camera function.
3 Press Wi-Fi button again and touch [TWIN CAMERA].
4 Follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting
this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection”
in “When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a
Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the Wireless
Twin Camera function)”. (l 229)
(While using the Wireless Multi-Camera function)
1 Close the “Image App” on the smartphone.
2 Press Wi-Fi button on this unit to exit the Wireless Multi-
Camera function.
3 Press Wi-Fi button again and touch [Multi Camera].
4 Touch [Reset] on the device registration screen.
5 Touch [YES].
6 Follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting
this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection”
in “When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a
Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the Wireless
Multi-Camera function)”. (l 233)
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 247 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 248 -
Please also refer to “If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established”. (l 218)
The Sub Window image is
interrupted.
The Sub Window image
disappears.
The Sub Window image is interrupted when the Wi-Fi signal
weakens. If the signal weakens further, the Sub Window
image disappears automatically.
Depending on the orientation of this unit and the smartphone
and the distance between them, the image may be
interrupted.
If the image reception is poor, close the distance and check
the connection status icon (l 240) at the same time. You can
also point the Wi-Fi transmitter (l 8) at the smartphone.
Problem Check points
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 248 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 249 -
HD Writer AE 5.4
You can copy the motion/still picture data to the HDD of PCs or write to media like Blu-ray discs,
DVD discs or SD cards using HD Writer AE 5.4.
Refer to the operating instructions of HD Writer AE 5.4 (PDF file) for details on how to use it.
Smart Wizard
The Smart Wizard Screen is automatically displayed when you connect this unit to a PC with
HD Writer AE 5.4 installed. (l 256)
Copy to PC:
You can copy motion/still picture data to the HDD of PCs.
Copy to disc:
You can copy to disc in high-definition picture quality or conventional standard picture quality
(MPEG2 format).
Select the function you wish to use and follow the on-screen instructions for easy copying.
With a PC
What you can do with a PC
Check the website below to download/install the software.
The software is available for download until the end of March 2021.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/f_ae54.html
What can be done with the HD Writer AE 5.4 Data type
Copying data to a PC
Motion picture
and still picture
Copying in Blu-ray disc/AVCHD format:
The scenes recorded in 1080/50p can be copied as 1080/50p.
(l 250: Important Notice)
4K MP4 scenes
*
, MP4 scenes or 24p scenes cannot be copied in Blu-ray
disc or in AVCHD format.
* For the series/ series/ series
Copying in DVD-Video format:
Converted to conventional standard quality (MPEG2 format).
Motion picture
Editing:
Editing motion picture data copied on an HDD of a PC
Dividing, Trimming, Still picture, Title, Effect, Transition, BGM, Delete
partially
Converting part of motion picture into still picture
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 249 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 250 -
It is possible to play back still pictures on a PC using a image viewer standard to Windows or
commercially available image browsing software, and copy still pictures to a PC using Windows
Explorer.
Please refer to page 260 for details about using a Mac.
It is impossible to write data to this unit from a PC.
Motion pictures that have been recorded on another device cannot be written to the
HD Writer AE 5.4.
When motion picture data is written to and read from the SD card, correct operation of the unit
cannot be guaranteed if software other than HD Writer AE 5.4 is used.
Do not start HD Writer AE 5.4 and other software at the same time.
What can be done with the HD Writer AE 5.4 Data type
Online sharing:
You can upload motion pictures on the Internet and share them with your
family and friends.
Motion picture
Playing back on a PC:
Play back the motion picture and still picture data in high-definition picture
quality on a PC.
Motion picture
and still picture
Formatting discs:
Depending on the type of disc that you use, formatting is necessary.
Motion picture
Important Notice
Do not insert a disc recorded in AVCHD format with HD Writer AE 5.4 in a device that
does not support the AVCHD format. In some cases the disc may get stuck in the
device.
To play back a Blu-ray disc to which you have copied scenes recorded in 1080/50p,
equipment is required that supports AVCHD Progressive.
When inserting a disc containing recorded motion pictures into other devices, a
message prompting you to format the disc may be displayed. Do not format the disc,
since deleted data cannot be restored later.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 250 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 251 -
Before Installing HD Writer AE 5.4
Your installation or use of the Software defined below shall be conclusively deemed to constitute
your acceptance of the terms of this Agreement. If you do not accept the terms of this Agreement,
do not install, nor use the Software.
End User License Agreement
You (“Licensee”) are granted a license for the
Software defined in this End User License
Agreement (“Agreement”) on condition that you
agree to the terms and conditions of this
Agreement.
The following terms contain material
representations regarding the disclaimers of
Panasonic Corporation. Be sure to read
through, understand and confirm the following
terms.
Article 1 License
Licensee is granted the right to use the
Software (the “Software” means the software
and other information such as manuals
downloaded by Licensee through Panasonic
website), but all applicable rights to patents,
copyrights, trademarks and trade secrets in the
Software are not transferred to Licensee.
Article 2 Use by a Third Party
Licensee may not use, copy, modify, transfer,
rent, lease, lend or allow any third party,
whether free of charge or not, to use, copy or
modify the Software, except as expressly
provided for in this Agreement.
Article 3 Restrictions on Copying the Software
Licensee may make a single copy of the
Software in whole or a part solely for back-up
purpose.
Article 4 Computer
Licensee may use the Software only on one
computer, and may not use it on more than one
computer. Further, Licensee may not use the
Software for commercial software hosting
services.
Article 5 Reverse Engineering, Decompiling or
Disassembly
Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble the Software, except to the
extent either of them is permitted under law or
regulation of the country where Licensee
resides. Panasonic, or its distributors will not be
responsible for any defects in the Software or
damage to Licensee caused by Licensee’s
reverse engineering, decompiling, or
disassembly of the Software.
Article 6 Indemnification
The Software is provided “AS-IS” without
warranty of any kind, either expressed or
implied, including, but not limited to, warranties
of non-infringement, merchantability and/or
fitness for a particular purpose. Further,
Panasonic does not warrant that the operation
of the Software will be uninterrupted or error
free. Panasonic or any of its distributors will not
be liable for any damage suffered by Licensee
arising from or in connection with Licensee’s
use of the Software.
Article 7 Export Control
Licensee agrees not to export or re-export to
any country the Software in any form without
the appropriate export licenses under
regulations of the country where Licensee
resides, if necessary.
Article 8 Termination of License
The right granted to Licensee hereunder will be
automatically terminated if Licensee
contravenes any of the terms and conditions of
this Agreement. In this event, Licensee must
destroy the Software and related
documentation together with all the copies
thereof at Licensee’s own expense.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 251 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 252 -
Article 9 With regard to MICROSOFT SQL
SERVER COMPACT 3.5 produced by Microsoft
Corporation
(1) Licensee shall use the MICROSOFT SQL
SERVER COMPACT 3.5 only when included in
the Software, and shall not use the
MICROSOFT SQL SERVER COMPACT 3.5 in
any other configuration or method. Licensee
shall not publish the MICROSOFT SQL
SERVER COMPACT 3.5 or work around any
technical limitations in the MICROSOFT SQL
SERVER COMPACT 3.5.
(2) Licensee shall not use, copy, distribute,
regrant for use or otherwise handle the
Software in any way beyond the range of use
granted under Article 9 (1), and shall not
conduct operations such as reverse
engineering, decompilation, disassembling, etc.
of the MICROSOFT SQL SERVER COMPACT
3.5.
(3) All rights, including copyright, patent rights
etc. relating to the MICROSOFT SQL SERVER
COMPACT 3.5 shall belong to Microsoft
Corporation. Licensee shall not claim any rights
related to the MICROSOFT SQL SERVER
COMPACT 3.5 whatsoever.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 252 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 253 -
Even if the system requirements mentioned in these operating instructions are fulfilled, some PCs
cannot be used.
For the series/ series/ series
Even if the system requirements are fulfilled, it may take some time to edit 4K motion pictures and
it may not be possible to play them back smoothly.
A compatible Blu-ray disc/DVD writer drive and media are necessary for writing to a Blu-ray disc/
DVD.
Operation is not guaranteed in the following cases.
j When 2 or more USB devices are connected to a PC, or when devices are connected through
USB hubs or by using extension cables.
Operating environment for HD Writer AE 5.4
* For the series/ series/ series
With a PC
Operating environment
OS Windows 10 (32 bit/64 bit)
Windows 8.1 (32 bit/64 bit)
Windows 7 (32 bit/64 bit) SP1
A 64-bit version of the Windows 7/Windows 8.1/ Windows 10 OS is
required for operations involving 4K motion pictures.
*
CPU Intel Pentium 4 2.8 GHz or higher (including compatible CPU)
Intel Core 2 Duo 2.16 GHz or higher or AMD Athlon 64 X2 Dual-Core
5200+ or higher is recommended when using playback function.
Intel Core 2 Quad 2.6 GHz or higher is recommended when using
editing function.
Intel Core i7 2.8 GHz or higher is recommended when using playback or
editing function for 1080/50p.
Intel Core i7 3.5 GHz or higher is recommended when using playback or
editing function for 4K motion pictures.
*
RAM Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10:
2 GB or more (64 bit)/1 GB or more (32 bit)
8 GB or more is recommended when using playback or editing function
for 4K motion pictures.
*
Display High Colour (16 bit) or more (32 bit or more recommended)
Desktop resolution of 1024k768 pixels or more (1920k1080 pixels or
more recommended)
DirectX 9.0c compatible video card (DirectX 10 recommended)
Compatible with DirectDraw overlay
PCI Express
k16 compatible recommended
Video memory of 256 MB or more recommended
A video card compatible with hardware decoding of 4K motion pictures
is required when using playback function for 4K motion pictures.
*
(For example)
Intel HD Graphics 4000 or higher
NVIDIA GeForce 600 series or higher
A video memory of 2 GB or more is required when using playback or
editing function for 4K motion pictures.
*
A 4K-compatible monitor and video card is required for 4K resolution
playback.
*
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 253 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 254 -
HD Writer AE 5.4 is for Windows only.
Input is not supported in languages other than English, German, French, Simplified Chinese and
Russian.
Operation cannot be guaranteed on all Blu-ray disc/DVD drives.
Operation is not guaranteed on Windows 7 Enterprise, Windows 8.1 Enterprise, Windows 10
Enterprise or Windows RT.
For Windows 8.1/Windows 10, this software is available only as a desktop application.
This software is not compatible with a multi-boot environment.
This software is not compatible with a multi-monitor environment.
If using Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10, administrative account and standard account
users only can use this software. (An administrative account user should install and uninstall this
software.)
To use the HD Writer AE 5.4
You will need a high performance PC depending on the functions to be used. It may not properly
play back or properly operate depending on the environment of the PC used. Refer to the operating
environment and notes.
Operation during the playback may become slow if the CPU or memory is not fulfilling the
requirements of the operating environment.
Always use the most current driver for the video card.
Always make sure there is enough capacity on the HDD in the PC. It may become inoperable or
the operation may stop suddenly if the capacity gets low.
Operating environment for the card reader function (mass storage)
The USB equipment operates with the driver installed as standard in the OS.
Free hard disk drive
space
Ultra DMA — 100 or more
450 MB or more (for installing the software)
If the compression setting is enabled, errors will occur during recording.
Clear the check box for [Compress this drive to save disk space] in
[Properties] for the hard disk drive.
Sound DirectSound Support
Interface USB port
Other requirements Mouse or equivalent pointing device
Internet connection
OS Windows 10 (32 bit/64 bit)
Windows 8.1 (32 bit/64 bit)
Windows 7 (32 bit/64 bit) SP1
CPU 1 GHz or higher
32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor
RAM 2 GB or more (64 bit)/1 GB or more (32 bit)
Interface USB port
Other requirements Mouse or equivalent pointing device
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 254 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 255 -
When installing software, log into the PC as a user with administrator privileges for the PC.
(If you do not have authorisation to do this, consult your manager.)
Before starting the installation, close all applications that are running.
Do not perform any other operations on your PC while the software is being installed.
Explanation of operations is based on Windows 10.
Installing HD Writer AE 5.4
Uninstalling HD Writer AE 5.4
Follow the steps below to uninstall any software applications that you no longer require.
1 Select [ ] # [ (Settings)] # [System] # [Apps & features].
2 Select [HD Writer AE 5.4], then click [Uninstall].
Proceed with the uninstallation by following the on-screen instructions.
After uninstalling the software, be sure to reboot the PC.
With a PC
Installation
Check the website below to download/install the software.
The software is available for download until the end of March 2021.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/f_ae54.html
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 255 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 256 -
Connect this unit to the PC after the software applications are installed.
A USB cable (supplied)
B Turn the side with the symbol down to connect the micro B end of the USB Cable to the USB
terminal of this unit.
Insert the plugs as far as they will go.
1 Connect this unit to the AC adaptor.
Use the AC adaptor to free you from worrying about the battery running down.
2 Turn on the unit.
3 Connect this unit to a PC.
The USB function selection screen will appear.
4 Touch [PC] on the screen of this unit.
The Smart Wizard Screen is automatically displayed when HD Writer AE 5.4 is installed.
This unit is automatically recognised as an external drive of the PC. (l 258)
When you select an option other than [PC], reconnect the USB cable.
When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn
the LCD monitor on.
Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any
other USB cables.)
When this unit is connected to a PC using a USB cable while the unit is turned on, power is also
supplied from the PC to this unit.
When performing reading/writing between a PC and an SD card, be aware that some SD card
slots built into PCs and some SD card readers are not compatible with the SDHC Memory Card or
SDXC Memory Card.
With a PC
Connecting to a PC
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 256 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 257 -
To disconnect USB cable safely
Select the icon in task tray displayed on the PC, and then select the model number of
this unit to disconnect the USB cable.
Depending on your PC’s settings, this icon may not be displayed.
Charging the battery by connecting it to different devices
When using the battery, if you turn off the unit and connect it to a PC, Panasonic Blu-ray disc
recorder or Panasonic DVD recorder, the battery will charge.
When connecting this unit to a PC for the first time, make sure to connect this unit to the
PC with this unit turned on.
Insert the USB cable securely all the way. It will not operate properly if it is not inserted all the
way.
Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any
other USB cables.)
You cannot charge the battery by connecting the supplied DC cable.
Be sure to connect the unit directly to the PC, Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD recorder.
During charging, the status indicator flashes.
You cannot charge when the status indicator flashes rapidly, or when it does not light at all.
Charge using the AC adaptor. (l 13)
It will take 2 or 3 times longer to charge compared to when using the AC adaptor.
If the status indicator flashes at a particularly fast or slow rate, refer to page 275.
About the screen indication of the unit
Do not disconnect the USB cable, battery, or AC adaptor while the access lamp is on or card
access icon ( ) appears on the unit screen.
(For the )
Do not disconnect the USB cable, battery, or AC adaptor while the access lamp is on or built-
in memory access icon ( ) appears on the unit screen.
If the screen does not change when the unit is operated while connected to a PC, disconnect
the battery and/or AC adaptor, wait approximately 1 minute, reconnect the battery and/or AC
adaptor, wait approximately 1 minute again, and then turn the unit back on. (Data may be
destroyed when above operation is performed while accessing the SD card or built-in
memory
*
.)
* only
WXF1M
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 257 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 258 -
About the PC display
When the unit is connected to a PC, it is recognised as an external drive.
Removable disk (Example: ) is displayed in [This PC].
Example folder structure of an SD card:
(For the )
Example folder structure of built-in memory:
The following data will be recorded.
1 Up to 999 still pictures in JPEG format
([S1000001.JPG] etc.)
2 MP4 format motion picture files
([S1000001.MP4] etc.)
The fourth to seventh characters of each
folder name are determined by the recording
format.
100RDPHH:MP4 (2160/25p)
100RFPHH:MP4 (2160/24p)
100YBPHH:MP4 (1080/50p)
100YDPHH:MP4 (1080/25p)
100YFPHH:MP4 (1080/24p)
100XDPHH:MP4 (720/25p)
100TDPBH:MP4 (360/25p)
3 JPEG format still pictures created from
the motion picture
4 JPEG format still pictures recorded in
Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode
5 The motion picture thumbnails
6 AVCHD format motion picture files
([00000.MTS] etc.)
7 For management
Copying your still pictures to
your PC
Card reader function (mass storage)
Still pictures recorded with this unit can be
copied to the PC with Explorer or other
programmes.
1 Double-click the folder that contains the
still pictures. ([DCIM] # [100CDPFQ]
etc.)
2 Drag and drop the still pictures onto the
destination folder (on the PC’s HDD).
Do not delete the SD card’s folders. Doing so
may make the SD card unusable in this unit.
Do not delete or edit files on the SD card or
USB HDD on the PC. If you do so, this unit
may not be able to read these files or its
functions may not operate correctly.
When data not supported by this unit has
been recorded on a PC, it will not be
recognised by this unit.
Always use this unit to format SD cards.
We recommend using HD Writer AE 5.4 to copy motion picture data.
Using Windows Explorer or other programmes on the PC to copy, move or rename files and
folders recorded with this unit will result in them being unusable with HD Writer AE 5.4.
It is impossible to write data to the built-in memory or SD card on this unit from a PC.
DCIM
CAM_SD
100CDPFQ
101RDPHH
AVCHDTN
BDMV
AVCHD
PRIVATE
103CDPFT
102CDPFS
PANA_EXT
WXF1M
AVCHDTN
BDMV
PANA_EXT
DCIM
CAM_MEM
100CDPFQ
101RDPHH
AVCHD
103CDPFT
102CDPFS
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 258 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 259 -
To use the software, log on as an Administrator or as user name for standard user account.
The software cannot be used with the user name for a guest account.
(On the PC)
Select [ ] # [Panasonic] # [HD Writer AE 5.4].
For details on how to use the software applications, read the PDF operating instructions of the
software.
Reading the operating instructions of the software
applications
You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later or Adobe Reader 7.0 or later to read the PDF
operating instructions.
Select [ ] # [Panasonic] # [HD Writer AE 5.4 Operating Instructions].
With a PC
Starting HD Writer AE 5.4
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 259 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 260 -
HD Writer AE 5.4 is not available for Mac.
iMovie and Final Cut Pro X supported.
For details about iMovie and Final Cut Pro X, please contact Apple Inc.
Even if the system requirements mentioned in these operating instructions are fulfilled, some
computers cannot be used.
The USB equipment operates with the driver installed as standard in the OS.
Copying still pictures on a Mac
1 Connect this unit to a Mac via the supplied USB cable.
The USB function selection screen will appear.
2 Touch [PC] on the screen of this unit.
This unit is automatically recognised as an external drive of Mac.
When you select an option other than [PC], reconnect the USB cable.
When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn
the LCD monitor on.
3 Double-click [CAM_SD] displayed on the desktop.
For users who have , [CAM_SD] and [CAM_MEM] are displayed on the desktop.
Files are stored in [100CDPFQ] or [102CDPFT] folder etc. in the [DCIM] folder.
4 Using a drag-and-drop operation, move the pictures you want to acquire or
the folder storing those pictures to any different folder on the Mac.
To disconnect USB cable safely
Drag [CAM_SD] disk icon to the [Trash], and then disconnect the USB cable.
For users who have , [CAM_SD] and [CAM_MEM] are displayed on the desktop.
With a PC
If using Mac
Operating environment for iMovie and Final Cut Pro X
OS macOS 10.13
Operating environment for the card reader function (mass storage)
PC Mac
OS macOS 10.12
CPU Intel Core 2 Duo or better
RAM 2GB or more
Interface USB port
Other requirements Mouse or equivalent pointing device
WXF1M
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 260 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 261 -
Recording indications
Others
Indications
*1 For the series/ series/ series *2 For the series only
*3 For the only *4 For the series only
*5 For the series/ series *6 For the series/ series
Motion Picture Recording Mode Still Picture Recording Mode
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
WXF1M
WXF1
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
V800
R 3000
+1
1
/
100
OPEN
MF
0dB
+1
MEGA
0h00m00s
1h30m
R 1h20m
1h30m
25.9M
PRE-REC
A
///////
Intelligent Auto Mode (l 66)
///////
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (l 68)
///
Creative Control Mode (l 68)
HDR Movie Mode (l 54, 71)
/////////
/
Scene Mode (l 72, 100)
If you set [SCENE MODE] in the menu when
using Time Lapse Recording, these icons
are displayed in area B.
Manual Mode (l 80)
///
Cinema Like Effect Mode
*1
FULL HD Slow Motion Video
Mode (l 78)
*2
4K Photo Mode (l 78)
*1
Stop Motion Animation Assist
Mode (l 79)
MINI
8mm
SILN
INTV
MNL
¥/; (Red) Recording
; (Green) Recording pause
0h00m00s Elapsed recording time (l 33)
(“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute
and “s” for second.)
/ / Eye-Fi transfer (l 179)
Remaining battery power
(l 16)
1h30m Remaining battery time (l 16)
Built-in memory recording
possible status
*3
(White) Card recording possible status
(Green) Recognising the card
*1
/////
////
*1
/
Motion Picture Recording Mode (l 103)
Backup for Twin Camera
(l 62)
R1h20m Remaining time for motion
picture recording (l 33)
(White) Still picture recording icon
(Red) Recording still picture
ヮヱフ
ビヒプパ
ヮヱフ
ヒパベパ
ブパヮ
ヮヱフ
ヒパベパ
ビベヮ
ヮヱフ
ヘビパ
50p
ビヒプパバビフㄑ
ヒパベパバビフㄑ
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 261 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 262 -
R3000 Remaining number of still
pictures (l 36)
/////
Number of recording pixels for still pictures
(l 36, 113 , 121)
In Playback Mode, the picture size is not
displayed for still pictures recorded with other
products that have different picture sizes from
the sizes shown above.
Æ10/Æ2 Self-timer Recording (l 96)
MEGA OIS (l 35)
B
PRE-REC (l 95)
Time Lapse Recording (l 71)
/ Wind Noise Canceller (l 107)
Lowcut (l 108)
Zoom Microphone (l 110)
Focus Microphone (l 110)
Stereo Microphone (l 110)
Relay Recording (l 104)
*3
/ Power LCD (l 47)
// / //
Image Stabilizer (l 91)/
Optical Image Stabilizer Lock (l 93)
Sound Scene Select (l 108)
Picture Adjustment (l 112)
Active Contrast (l 102)
Brightness Adjustment
(Miniature Effect/8mm movie/
Silent movie) (l 69, 70)
Vividness Adjustment
(Miniature Effect) (l 69)
Colour balance Adjustment
(8mm movie) (l 70)
/ HDR Effect (l 54, 98)
AF/AE tracking (l 92)
/ Level Shot Function (l 98)
Touch Shutter (l 93)
25.9M
14M
2.1M
20.4M
10.9M
0.3M
MEGA
PRE-REC
LOW
CUT
+1
-
1
ZOOM/ FOCUS/ IRIS
Manual ring setting (l 80)
*5
MF Manual Focus (l 86)
/// /
White Balance (l 82)
1/100 Shutter Speed (l 84)
OPEN/F2.0 Iris value (l 85)
0dB Gain value (l 85)
± (White)/
¥ (Green)
Focus indication (l 35)
C
Display Touch Menu (l 26)
Backlight Compensation
(l 96)
Digital Cinema Colour (l 106)
Intelligent Contrast Control
(l 95)
/ Audio Level
*5
/Microphone
Level
*6
(l 111)
Sound recording disabled
(l 74, 75, 77)
/ Fade (White), Fade (Black)
(l 95)
Night Mode (l 97)
Infrared light (l 97)
*5
Intelligent Exposure (l 96)
Favourite scene icon (l 37)
R9 Remaining number of favourite
scenes (l 37)
World Time setting (l 42)
Sub Window icon (l 56, 58,
242)
Sub Camera setting icon
(l 60, 243)
Narration Mode is enabled
(l 61)
*4
Auto Focus Single (l 60)
*4
/
Recording mode switching icon
(l 23)
ンリワヨ
ンリワヨ
ンリワヨ
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 262 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 263 -
Playback indications
15. 11. 2018 Date indication (l 28)
12:34 Time indication (l 28)
1/;/5//6//7/8/9/:/
D/E/;1/2;
Display during playback (l 39, 120)
0h00m00s Playback Time (l 39)
No.10 Scene Number
Repeat Playback (l 123)
Resume Playback (l 123)
100-0001 Still picture folder/file name
Transfer/Protected motion
pictures/still pictures (l 154,
178)
*1
/ (Red)/ (Red)/
(Red)/ (Red)///
*1
(Red)/ (Red)/
Recording mode icon (l 122)
(Blue) MP4 [1080/50p (50M)] scene
(l 38)
MP4 [2160/25p] scene/
MP4 [2160/24p] scene
(l 38)
*1
MP4 [1080/50p (28M)] scene/
MP4 [1080/25p] scene/
MP4 [1080/24p] scene (l 38)
MP4 [720/25p] scene (l 38)
MP4 [360/25p] scene (l 38)
AVCHD [1080/50p] scene
(l 38)
AVCHD [PH] scene (l 38)
AVCHD [HA] scene (l 38)
AVCHD [HG] scene (l 38)
AVCHD [HE] scene (l 38)
Scenes recorded with the
Backup for Twin Camera
function (l 38)
Scenes recorded with Slow &
Quick Video Mode (l 73)
*1
50p
Scenes recorded with FULL
HD Slow Motion Video Mode
(l 74, 78)
*2
Scenes recorded with Slow
Zoom Mode (l 75)
*1
Scenes recorded with Dolly
Zoom Mode (l 76)
*1
Scene(s) recorded with 4K
Photo mode (l 78)
*1
Relay-recorded scene
(l 104)
*3
Miniature-recorded scene
(l 69)
Time lapse-recorded scene
(l 71)
Scenes saved with Highlight
Playback (l 138)
// Eye-Fi transfer status (l 177)
Changes the cropping frame
size (when [Manual Tracking
Crop]/[Fixed Crop]/[Zooming
Crop] is selected for the 4K
Cropping function) (l 129,
130, 131)
*1
Sets the start point (when
[Manual Tracking Crop]/
[Zooming Crop] is selected for
the 4K Cropping function)
(l 129, 131)
*1
Sta rts a preview (when [Manual
Tracking Crop]/[Zooming Crop]
is selected for the 4K Cropping
function) (l 129, 131)
*1
Starts a preview (when [Auto
Tracking Crop]/[Fixed Crop]/
[Stabilizing Crop] is selected for
the 4K Cropping function)
(l 128, 130, 132)
*1
Image stabilizer button (when
[Auto Tracking Crop] is
selected for the 4K Cropping
function) (l 128)
*1
MINI
ONON
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 263 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 264 -
Indication of connection to
Wi-Fi
Indication of connection to
USB HDD
Indication of connection to
other devices
Confirmatory indications
Indication of Wireless Twin/
Multi-Camera
Indication of Sub Window
*7 The number for the icon varies depending
on the selected Wireless Sub Camera.
(1–3)
/ Wi-Fi connection status (wireless
access point) (l 210)
/ Wi-Fi connection status (Direct
connection) (l 210)
USB HDD Playback (l 173)
Accessing the card (l 176, 257)
Accessing the built-in memory
(l 176, 257)
*3
–– (Time
display)
The built-in battery is low. (l 28)
Warning for recording of yourself
(l 29)
SD card is not inserted or is
incompatible.
Startup icon for Wireless Twin
Camera/disconnect icon for
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera
(l 229)
/ Wi-Fi connection status (Wireless
Twin Camera) (l 240)
/
*7
Wi-Fi connection status (Wireless
Multi-Camera) (l 240)
/
For changing the Sub Window
size (l 59)
*4
/
For zooming in/out the Sub
Window (l 59)
*4
/
Wi-Fi connection warnings for the
Wireless Sub Camera function
(Wireless Twin Camera) (l 241)
/
*7
Wi-Fi connection warnings for the
Wireless Sub Camera function
(Wireless Multi-Camera) (l 241)
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 264 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 265 -
Major confirmation/error messages to be indicated on the screen in text.
* only
Others
Messages
PERIODICALLY MAKE BACK UP OF DATA IN BUILT-IN MEMORY.
*
We recommend backing up important recorded motion pictures and still pictures periodically to
a PC, DVD disc etc. to protect it. (l 249) This message does not indicate that there is a
problem with this unit.
CHECK CARD.
This card is not compatible or it cannot be recognised by the unit.
If this message appears even though motion pictures and still pictures are recorded on an SD
card, the card may be unstable. Reinsert the SD card, then turn the unit off and then on again.
THIS BATTERY CANNOT BE USED.
Use a battery that is compatible with this unit. (l 12)
If using a Panasonic battery compatible with this unit, remove the battery and then insert it
again. If the message appears even after repeating this several times, this unit needs repair.
Detach the power and consult the dealer who you purchased this unit from. Do not attempt to
repair it by yourself.
You are attempting to connect an AC adaptor not compatible with this unit. Use the supplied
AC adaptor. (l 13)
THIS EXTERNAL DRIVE CANNOTBE USED./
PLEASE CHECK THE EXTERNAL DRIVE.
The external drive that this unit cannot recognise is connected. Check if the USB HDD can be
connected and used with this unit and try to reconnect. (l 169)
Failed to connect wireless access point/
No wireless access point found
Check the Wi-Fi set up of your wireless access point and smartphone.
[Easy Connection (WPS)] can establish a connection only between two devices: this unit and
a device that will connect to this unit. Check if multiple devices are trying to establish a
connection in the WPS waiting state simultaneously.
Read page 218 if the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Connection failed. Please check network settings of connected device.
It may be impossible to connect from some Web services such as “LUMIX CLUB” and
USTREAM. Try to reconnect after waiting a short while.
Read page 218 if the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Network disconnected.
When using [DLNA Play], if you do not operate the DLNA-compatible device you are
connected to for a while, it will be displayed. Check the status of the DLNA device you are
connected to.
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 265 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 266 -
About recovery
If faulty management information is found, the messages may appear and a repair is performed.
(Repairing may take time depending on the error.)
is displayed when abnormal management information is detected when the scenes are
displayed in thumbnail.
Use a sufficiently charged battery or the AC adaptor.
Depending on the condition of the data, it may not be possible to completely repair the data.
If recovery fails, it will not be possible to play back scenes recorded before the unit turned off.
When data recorded on another device is recovered, it may not be possible to play back the data
on this unit or the other device.
If recovery fails, turn the unit off and on again after waiting a while. If recovery fails repeatedly,
format a media on the unit. Please be aware that if a media is formatted, then all the data
recorded on the media will be erased.
If the thumbnail information is recovered, displaying the thumbnails may become slower.
You cannot recover scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera and information on Highlight
Playback scenes in MP4 format.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 266 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 267 -
It is not a malfunction in following cases
Others
Troubleshooting
A clicking sound is heard
when the unit is shaken.
This is the sound of the lens moving and is not a defect.
This sound will no longer be heard when the unit is turned on
and set this unit to the Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still
Picture Recording Mode.
Object seems to be
warped.
Object seems to be warped slightly when the object moves
across the image very fast, but this is because the unit is
using MOS for the image sensor. This is not a malfunction.
The lens, the viewfinder or
LCD monitor fog up.
This is due to condensation. It is not a malfunction.
Please refer to page 3.
Power
Problem Check points
This unit cannot be turned
on.
This unit does not stay on
long enough.
Battery runs down quickly.
Charge the battery again to ensure it is sufficiently charged.
(l 13)
In cold places, the battery using time becomes shorter.
The battery has a limited life. If the operating time is still too
short even after the battery is fully charged, the battery has
worn out and needs to be replaced.
This unit is turned off
automatically.
If the unit turns off when you turn off the power to the TV
using the TV remote control, the VIERA Link is at work. If you
are not using the VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] to [OFF].
(l 164)
This unit cannot be
operated though it is
turned on.
This unit does not operate
normally.
Remove the battery or AC adaptor, wait about 1 minute and
then reconnect the battery or AC adaptor. Then about
1 minute later, turn on the unit again. (Conducting the above
operation while the media is being accessed may damage the
data on the media.)
If normal operation is still not restored, detach the power
connected, and consult the dealer who you purchased this
unit from.
“ERROR OCCURRED.
PLEASE TURN UNIT OFF,
THEN TURN ON AGAIN.”
is displayed.
The unit has automatically detected an error. Restart the unit
by turning the unit off and on.
The unit will be turned off in about 1 minute if the unit is not
turned off and on.
Repair is needed if it is repeatedly displayed even if it is
restarted. Detach the power connected, and consult the
dealer who you purchased this unit from. Do not attempt to
repair the unit by yourself.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 267 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 268 -
Indication
Problem Check points
Remaining battery
indication is not displayed
properly.
The remaining battery capacity indication is an
approximation.
If the remaining battery capacity indication is not displayed
correctly, fully charge the battery, discharge it and then
charge it again.
Recording
Problem Check points
The unit arbitrarily stops
recording.
Use an SD card that can be used for motion picture recording.
(l 17)
The recordable time may have shortened due to the
deterioration of the data writing speed or repeated recording
and deletion. Using the unit, format the SD card or built-in
memory. (l 49)
If [AGS] is [ON], record in the normal horizontal position or set
[AGS] to [OFF]. (l 105)
Auto Focus function does
not work.
Switch to Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
If you are trying to record a scene which is hard to bring into
focus in Auto Focus Mode, use the Manual Focus Mode to
adjust the focus. (l 67, 86)
Colour balance of images
is strange when recording
in a place such as a
gymnasium.
In a place with multiple light sources, such as a gymnasium or
a hall, set the White Balance setting to (Indoor mode 2).
If you cannot record clearly with the (Indoor mode 2), set
it to (Manual adjustment mode). (l 82)
Colour or brightness of
the image changes, or you
may see horizontal bars in
the image.
The LCD monitor flickers
indoors.
Colour or brightness of the image may change, or you may
see horizontal bars in the image when the object is recorded
under fluorescent light, mercury light or sodium light, etc., but
this is not a malfunction.
In Motion Picture Recording Mode, record in Intelligent Auto
Mode/Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or set the shutter speed as
follows:
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]:
Set to 1/50 seconds in areas where the power supply
frequency is 50 Hz, or 1/60 seconds in areas where the
frequency is 60 Hz.
j When [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [24p]:
Set to 1/100 seconds in areas where the power supply
frequency is 50 Hz, or 1/125 seconds in areas where the
frequency is 60 Hz.
In Still Picture Recording Mode, this will not affect the
recorded image.
In the following cases, setting the shutter speed to 1/100 seconds
reduces the intensity of the problem:
j In FULL HD Slow Motion Mode
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Slow & Quick Video Mode
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 268 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 269 -
Playback
Problem Check points
Scenes/still pictures
cannot be played back.
Any scenes/still pictures where the thumbnails are displayed
as cannot be played back.
Scenes cannot be deleted. Release the protect setting. (l 154)
Any scenes/still pictures where the thumbnails are displayed
as cannot be deleted. If the scenes/still pictures are
unnecessary, format the media to erase the data. (l 49)
Please be aware that if a media is formatted then all the data
recorded on the media is erased and cannot be recovered.
Back up important data on a PC, disc etc.
With other products
Problem Check points
Even when this unit is
correctly connected to a
TV, images or sounds are
not output.
The images are squeezed
horizontally.
Please read the operating instructions of your TV and select
the channel that matches the input used for the connection.
The audio during playback mode is not output from this unit
when connected to a TV. Sound levels cannot be adjusted
using this unit, so adjust the sound on the TV.
Even when this unit is
connected to the TV by the
HDMI micro cable, images
or sounds are not output.
Check if the HDMI micro cable is connected correctly.
Insert the HDMI micro cable all the way in.
If the SD card is inserted in
another device, it is not
recognised.
Check that the device is compatible with the capacity or type
of SD card (SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card/SDXC
Memory Card) that you inserted. Refer to the operating
instructions of the device for details.
When connected by the
USB cable, this unit is not
detected by the other
devices.
When connected to other devices using only the battery,
reconnect using the AC adaptor.
VIERA Link does not work. (Setting on this unit)
Connect with an HDMI micro cable (supplied). (l 160)
Touch , then touch [SETUP] # [VIERA Link] # [ON].
(l 164)
Turn the unit off and then back on again.
(Setting on other devices)
If the TV input does not switch automatically, switch the input
using the TV remote control.
Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.
Please refer to the operating instructions of the connected
device.
MENU
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 269 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 270 -
Cannot copy scenes on
the SD card by connecting
to other equipment with
the USB cable.
Other equipment might have not recognised the SD card.
Unplug the USB cable once, and reconnect it.
With a PC
Problem Check points
When connected by the
USB cable, this unit is not
detected by the PC.
After re-inserting the SD card into the unit, reconnect the
supplied USB cable.
Select another USB terminal on the PC.
Check the operating environment. (l 253, 260)
Connect the supplied USB cable again after restarting the PC
and turning on this unit again.
When the USB cable is
disconnected, an error
message will appear on
the PC.
To disconnect the USB cable safely, select the icon in
task tray displayed on the PC, and then select the model
number of this unit to disconnect the USB cable.
Cannot see the PDF
operating instructions for
HD Writer AE 5.4.
You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later or Adobe
Reader 7.0 or later to read the PDF operating instructions for
HD Writer AE 5.4.
About the Wi-Fi function
Problem Check points
Cannot connect to
wireless access point or
smartphone.
Read page 218 if the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Cannot operate from
smartphone using
[Remote Ctrl].
Install the smartphone app “Image App” on your smartphone.
(l 209)
When I look at the
recording screen with the
smartphone, mosaic-like
noise appears on the
screen and the image
movement does not look
smooth.
When this unit is set to any of the following recording formats
or recording modes, mosaic-like noise may appear on the
screen and the image movement may not look smooth.
(Recorded images will not be affected.)
j (For the series/ series/ series)
Recording format [4K MP4]
j Recording mode [1080/50M] or [1080/28M] for the
recording format [MP4]
j Recording mode [1080/50p] for the recording format
[AVCHD]
j Recording format [24p]
With other products
Problem Check points
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 270 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 271 -
Cannot use [DLNA Play]. Make sure the television is compatible with DLNA. Read the
instructions for the television you are using.
Make sure the wireless access point and this device are
properly connected.
Approach the wireless access point and reconnect.
If a connection cannot be made between this device and a
DLNA-compatible device, try to reconnect and make sure
they connect properly.
The live broadcast screen
will not be displayed.
Make sure the “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Password have
been input correctly.
Use a PC or smartphone to make sure the USTREAM
account registration is complete.
Use a PC or smartphone to register and set up USTREAM
from a “LUMIX CLUB” linked service. (l 204)
“LUMIX CLUB” or USTREAM lines may be congested. Retry
the live broadcast after waiting a short while.
[Hom.Monitor] cannot be
used.
Make sure the wireless access point is connected to the
Internet.
Make sure the wireless access point and this unit are properly
connected. (l 212)
I have forgotten the
password for the Wi-Fi.
Perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] from the Setup menu (l 48).
This will set the Wi-Fi setting to the condition at the time of
purchase, and you will be able to use the Wi-Fi setting menu.
When performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings], all Wi-Fi settings
including the “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and registered wireless
access points will be deleted.
I have forgotten the Login
ID or Password for the
“LUMIX CLUB”.
Check the information in the login screen of “LUMIX CLUB”.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
Others
Problem Check points
If the SD card is inserted in
this unit, it is not
recognised.
If the SD card is formatted on a PC, it may not be recognised
by this unit. Use this unit to format SD cards. (l 49)
About the Wi-Fi function
Problem Check points
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 271 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 272 -
If AVCHD scenes do not change smoothly when played back on
another device
The images may be still for several seconds at the joins between the scenes if the following
operations are performed when multiple scenes have been continuously played back using another
unit.
Just how smoothly the scenes will be played back depends on the playback unit. Depending on
the unit used, the images may stop moving and become still for a moment even when none of the
following conditions are applicable.
A continuous recording of motion picture data that exceeds 4 GB may momentarily stop at every
4 GB of data when played back with another device.
It may not play back smoothly when the editing of scenes was done with the HD Writer AE 5.4,
but it will play back smoothly if you set the seamless settings in the HD Writer AE 5.4. Refer to the
operating instructions for the HD Writer AE 5.4.
Principal reasons for not playing back smoothly
When the scenes were recorded on different dates
When scenes lasting under 3 seconds have been recorded
When PRE-REC was used for recording
When the Miniature Effect recording is used
When the Time Lapse Recording is used
When deleting scenes
(For the )
When selected scenes are copied between an SD card and the built-in memory
When scenes recorded more than 99 scenes on the same date
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 272 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 273 -
Keep this unit as far away as possible from
electromagnetic equipment (such as
microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the
pictures and/or sound on this unit may be
disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
Do not use this unit near cell phones because
doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and/or sound.
Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures
may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields
created by speakers or large motors.
Electromagnetic wave radiation generated by
microprocessors may adversely affect this
unit, disturbing the pictures and/or sound.
If this unit is adversely affected by
electromagnetic equipment and stops
functioning properly, turn this unit off and
remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor.
Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC
adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters
or high-voltage lines.
If you record near radio transmitters or
high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/
or sound may be adversely affected.
Make sure to use the supplied cords and
cables. If you use optional accessories, use
the cords and the cables supplied with
them.
Do not extend the cords and the cables.
Do not spray insecticides or volatile
chemicals onto the unit.
If the unit is sprayed with such chemicals, its
body may be marred and the surface finish
may peel off.
Do not leave rubber or plastic products in
contact with the unit for a long time.
When you use the unit in a sandy or dusty
place such as a beach, do not let sand or
fine dust get into the body and terminals of
the unit.
Also, keep the unit away from sea water.
Sand or dust may damage the unit. (Care
should be taken when inserting and removing
a card.)
If sea water splashes onto the unit, wipe off
the water with a well wrung cloth. Then wipe
the unit again with a dry cloth.
When carrying the unit, do not drop or bump
it.
A strong impact can break the unit’s casing,
causing it to malfunction.
Cleaning
Before cleaning, detach the battery or pull the
AC adaptor from the AC outlet, and then wipe
the unit with a soft, dry cloth.
If the unit is very dirty, dip a cloth in water and
squeeze firmly, and then wipe the unit with
the damp cloth. Next, dry the unit with a dry
cloth.
Use of benzine, paint thinner, alcohol, or
dishwashing liquid may alter the camera body
or peel the surface finish. Do not use these
solvents.
When using a chemical dust cloth, follow the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Do not use the unit for surveillance
purposes or other business uses.
This unit was designed for consumer
intermittent use. It was not intended for
continuous use, or for any industrial or
commercial application resulting in prolonged
use.
In certain situations, continuous use could
cause the unit to overheat and cause a
malfunction. Such use is strongly
discouraged.
Others
Cautions for use
About this unit
The unit and the SD card become warm
during use. This is not a malfunction.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 273 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 274 -
When you are not going to use the unit for
an extended time
When storing the unit in a cupboard or
cabinet, it is recommended that you place a
desiccant (silica gel) in with it.
(For the )
When disposing of or giving away this unit,
note that:
Formatting and deletion simply change the
file management information and cannot be
used to completely erase the data in built-in
memory of this unit. The data can be
recovered using commercially available
software or the like.
We recommend that you physically format
the built-in memory before disposing of or
giving away this unit.
To physically format the built-in memory,
connect the unit via the AC adaptor, select
[SETUP] # [FORMAT MEDIA] # [Built-
inMemory] from the menu, and then press
and hold the recording start/stop button on
the screen below for about 3 seconds. When
the built-in memory data deletion screen
appears, select [YES], and then follow the
on-screen instructions.
Please look after the data in your built-in
memory carefully. Panasonic will not be held
responsible in the unlikely case that private
data is divulged.
The battery used in this unit is a rechargeable
lithium-ion battery. It is susceptible to humidity
and temperature and the effect increases the
more the temperature rises or falls. In cold
areas, the full charge indication may not appear
or the low battery indication may appear about
5 minutes after starting use. At high
temperatures, the protection function may be
triggered, making it impossible to use the unit.
Be sure to detach the battery after use.
If the battery is left attached, a minute amount
of current continues to flow even if the unit is
off. Keeping the unit in this state may result in
over discharge of the battery. This may result
in you not being able to use the battery even
after it is charged.
The battery should be stored in the vinyl bag
so metal does not come into contact with the
terminals.
The battery should be stored in a cool place
free from humidity, with as constant
temperature as possible. (Recommended
temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC, Recommended
humidity: 40%RH to 60%RH)
Extremely high temperatures or low
temperatures will shorten the life of the
battery.
If the battery is kept in high-temperature,
high-humidity, or oily-smoky places, the
terminals may rust and cause malfunctions.
To store the battery for a long period of time,
we recommend you charge it once every year
and store it again after you have completely
used up the charged capacity.
Dust and other matter attached to the battery
terminals should be removed.
Prepare spare batteries when going out for
recording.
Prepare batteries enough to last for 3 to 4
times the period you are planning to record
for. Cold places such as a ski resort can
shorten recording time.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to
see if the terminals are damaged.
Inserting a battery with damaged terminals
can damage the unit.
Do not throw an old battery into fire.
Heating a battery or throwing it into a fire may
result in an explosion.
If the operating time is very short even after
the battery has been recharged, the battery
has worn out. Please purchase a new
battery.
About the battery
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 274 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 275 -
If the temperature of the battery is extremely
high or extremely low, charging may take time
or the battery may not be charged.
If you use the AC adaptor near a radio, radio
reception may be disturbed. Keep the AC
adaptor 1 m or more away from the radio.
When using the AC adaptor, it may generate
whirring sounds. However, this is normal.
After use, be sure to disconnect the AC
adaptor. (If it is left connected, a minute
amount of current is consumed.)
Always keep the electrodes of the AC
adaptor and battery clean.
When the status indicator is flashing at a
particularly fast or slow rate, the following
should be considered.
Flashing with approx. 4 second period (off
for approx. 2 seconds, on for approx.
2 seconds):
When the battery is over discharged or the
temperature of the battery is too high or low.
It can be charged, but it may take a few hours
to complete the charging normally.
It will flash in approx. 2 second intervals
when normal charging resumes. Even in such
cases, it may start flashing in approx.
4 second intervals until charging is completed
depending on the conditions of use.
Flashing with approx. 0.5 second period (off
for approx. 0.25 second, on for approx.
0.25 second):
The battery is not charged. Remove the
battery from the unit, and try charging again.
Check that the terminals of the unit or battery
are not dirty or covered with a foreign object,
and connect the battery correctly once again.
If a foreign object or dirt is present, turn off
the unit before removing.
The battery or environment is at an extremely
high or low temperature. Wait until the
temperature has returned to an appropriate
level and try charging again. If you are still
unable to charge, there may be a fault in the
unit, battery or AC adaptor.
Off:
Charging has finished.
If the status indicator stays off despite the
charging being unfinished, there may be a
fault in the unit, battery or AC adaptor. Refer
to page 274 for details on the battery.
When disposing of or giving away the SD
card, note that:
Formatting and deletion of data on this unit or
computer only changes the file management
information and does not completely delete
the data in the SD card.
It is recommended that the SD card is
physically destroyed or the SD card is
physically formatted using this unit when
disposing of or giving away the SD card.
(For the ////
//)
To physically format the SD card, connect the
unit via the AC adaptor, select [SETUP] #
[FORMAT MEDIA] # [YES] from the menu,
and then press and hold the recording start/
stop button on the screen below for about
3 seconds. When the SD card data deletion
screen appears, select [YES], and then follow
the on-screen instructions.
(For the )
To physically format the SD card, connect the
unit via the AC adaptor, select [SETUP] #
[FORMAT MEDIA] # [SD CARD] from the
menu, and then press and hold the recording
start/stop button on the screen below for
about 3 seconds. When the SD card data
deletion screen appears, select [YES], and
then follow the on-screen instructions.
The customer is responsible for the
management of the data in the SD card.
About the AC adaptor
About status indicator during
charging
About the SD card
WXF1
VXF1
VXF11
VX1
VX11
V800 V808
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 275 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 276 -
When the LCD screen is dirty or
condensation has occurred, please wipe it
using a soft cloth such as eyeglass cleaner.
Do not touch the LCD monitor with your
fingernails, or rub or press with strong force.
It may become hard to see or hard to
recognise the touch when the LCD protection
sheet is affixed.
When the unit has become very cold, for
example due to storage in a cold area, its
LCD monitor will be slightly darker than usual
immediately after the unit is turned on. The
normal brightness will be restored when the
unit’s internal temperature rises.
When a name or birthday is set by Baby
Calendar, personal information will be included
in this unit.
When the Wi-Fi function is used, the SSID,
Password, and other personal information will
be included in this unit.
Setting a Wi-Fi password is recommended to
protect personal information. (l 222)
Disclaimer
Information including personal information
may be altered or vanish due to erroneous
operation, effect of static electricity, accident,
malfunction, repair, or other handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not
liable in any way for any direct or indirect
damage from the alteration or vanishing of
information or personal information.
When requesting a repair, transferring to
another party, or disposing.
After making a copy of personal information,
always delete information such as personal
information and wireless LAN connection
settings that you have saved within this unit
with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/[Delete account].
(l 48, 225)
To protect personal information, delete the
registered details of Baby Calendar unless
they are necessary for the repair. (l 144)
Remove the Memory Card from this unit
when requesting a repair.
Settings may return to factory default when
this unit is repaired.
Please contact the dealer where you
purchased this unit or Panasonic if above
operations are not possible due to
malfunction.
When transferring to another party, or
disposing of the Memory Card, please refer
to “When disposing of or giving away the
SD card, note that:”. (l 275)
When uploading images on web services
Images may contain information that can be
used for identifying individuals such as titles
and recording dates. When uploading images
on web services, check carefully, and then
upload.
LCD monitor/viewfinder
Extremely high precision technology is
employed to produce the LCD Monitor
screen. The result is more than 99.99%
effective dots with a mere 0.01% of the dots
inactive or always lit. However, this is not a
malfunction and does not affect the recorded
picture.
Extremely high precision technology is
employed to produce the viewfinder screen.
The result is more than 99.99% effective
dots with a mere 0.01% of the dots inactive
or always lit. However, this is not a
malfunction and does not affect the recorded
picture.
About personal information
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 276 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 277 -
Carefully observe copyright laws
Recording of pre-recorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material for
purposes other than your own private use may infringe copyright laws. Even for the purpose
of private use, recording of certain material may be restricted.
Licenses
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
HDAVI Control
is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
x.v.Colour
is a trademark.
LEICA is a registered trademark of Leica Microsystems IR GmbH and DICOMAR is a registered
trademark of Leica Camera AG.
Microsoft
®
and Windows
®
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Intel
®
, Pentium
®
and Intel
®
Core
are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
AMD Athlon
is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
iMovie, Final Cut Pro, Mac, OS X and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
“Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
“Wi-Fi Protected Setup
”, “WPA
”, and “WPA2
” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or certification
marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
Other names of systems and products mentioned in these instructions are usually the registered
trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers who developed the system or product concerned.
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a consumer
or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in compliance with the
AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer
engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC
Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be
obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
Others
About copyright
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 277 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 278 -
SD cards are only mentioned with their main memory size. The stated times are the approximate
recordable times for continuous recording.
A Favours image quality
B Favours Recording time
* only
“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.
Others
Recording modes/approximate
recordable time
Recording format [AVCHD]
Recording mode [1080/50p]
[1080/50i]
[PH] [HA] [HG] [HE]
Picture size/Frame rate
1920
k
1080/
50p
1920
k
1080/
50i
1920
k
1080/
50i
1920
k
1080/
50i
1920
k
1080/
50i
SD card
4GB 19 min 21 min 30 min 40 min 1 h 30 min
16 GB 1h20min 1h30min 2h 2h40min 6h40min
64 GB 5h20min 6h 8h30min 11h 27h30min
Built-in memory
*
64 GB 5h20min 6h 8h30min 11h 27h30min
Recording format [4K MP4] [MP4]
Recording mode [2160] [1080/50M] [1080/28M] [720]
Picture size/Frame rate
3840
k
2160/
25p
1920
k
1080/
50p
1920
k
1080/
50p
1280
k
720/
25p
SD card
4GB 7 min 11 min 19 min 1 h
16 GB 28min 45min 1h20min 4h10min
64 GB 1h50min 3h 5h20min 16h50min
Built-in memory
*
64 GB 1h50min 3h 5h20min 16h50min
Recording format [24p]
Recording mode [2160/24p] [1080/24p]
Picture size/Frame rate
3840
k
2160/
24p
1920
k
1080/
24p
SD card
4GB 7min 11min
16 GB 28 min 45 min
64 GB 1h50min 3h
Built-in memory
*
64 GB 1h50min 3h
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 278 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 279 -
If recording for long periods, prepare batteries for 3 or 4 times the period you wish to record for.
(l 14)
(For the series/ series/ series)
The default setting for [REC FORMAT] is [4K MP4].
(For the series)
The default setting for [REC FORMAT] is [AVCHD].
Maximum continuously recordable time for one scene: 6 hours
The recording is paused once when the recording time for one scene exceeds 6 hours, and the
recording will automatically resume after a few seconds.
The recordable time may be reduced when lot of action scenes are recorded or recording of short
scene is repeated.
Use time in the row of 4 GB in above table as a guideline for the time that can be copied onto one
DVD disc (4.7 GB).
Recordable times will be approximately half the times in the above table when Backup for Twin
Camera is in operation.
The maximum remaining recordable time that can be displayed for motion picture recording is
99 hours and 59 minutes. Any remaining recordable time exceeding 99 hours and 59 minutes will
be displayed as “R99h59m+”. This display remains unchanged until the remaining recordable
time drops to 99 hours and 59 minutes or less.
SD cards are only mentioned with their main memory size. The stated number is the approximate
number of recordable pictures.
(Still picture recording mode)
Others
Approximate number of recordable
pictures
Picture size
6784k3816 4992k2808 1920k1080
Aspect ratio [16:9]
SD card
4GB 250 450 3200
16 GB 1000 1900 12500
64 GB 4300 7500 52000
Built-in memory
*
64 GB 4300 7500 52000
Picture size
5216k3912 3808k2856 640k480
Aspect ratio [4:3]
SD card
4GB 300 550 14000
16 GB 1300 2400 58000
64 GB 5000 9500 237000
Built-in memory
*
64 GB 5000 9500 237000
VXF1
VX1
V800
25.9M
14M
2.1M
20.4M
10.9M
0.3M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 279 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 280 -
(Motion picture recording mode)
* only
The number of recordable pictures depends on the subject being recorded.
Maximum number of recordable pictures that can be displayed is 9999. If the number of
recordable pictures exceeds 9999, R 9999+ is displayed. The number will not change when the
picture is taken until the number of recordable pictures is 9999 or less.
The memory capacity indicated on the label of an SD card is the total of the capacity for copyright
protection and management and the capacity which can be used on the unit, a PC etc.
Recording fromat:
Recording mode
[4K MP4]: [2160]
[24p]: [2160/24p]
[MP4], [AVCHD]: All
[24p]: [1080/24p]
Picture size
6016k3384 3840k2160 4992k2808 1920k1080
Aspect ratio [16:9]
SD card
4GB 300 750 450 3200
16 GB 1300 3000 1900 12500
64 GB 5000 12000 7500 52000
Built-in memory
*
64 GB 5000 12000 7500 52000
20.4M
8.3M
14M
2.1M
WXF1M
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 280 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 281 -
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
About the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
If you connect this unit to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle VW-CTR1 (optional) by USB cable, this unit
can automatically track the movement of the subject being recorded. This unit zooms in/out the
image automatically, and the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle pans and tilts this unit.
1 Attach this unit to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.
For details on attachment method, refer to the operating instructions of Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.
2 Connect the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit using the USB cable
(supplied with this unit).
A Turn the side with the symbol down to connect the micro B end of the USB Cable to the USB
terminal of this unit.
Others
Optional accessories
Using Wi-Fi functions in combination with the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle can also be used by the following Wi-Fi functions. Make the Wi-Fi
connection after connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit.
j [Remote Ctrl] (l 182)
j [Baby Monitor] (l 189)
j [Hom.Monitor] (l 192)
When [Party Scene]/[Moving Object] is in operation, moving object detection with
[Hom.Monitor] will not work. (l 195, 283)
When [Baby Monitor] is being used, [Party Scene] and [Moving Object] cannot be used.
(l 283)
Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about operation methods on smartphones.
Connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 281 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 282 -
5 Touch [Remote Pan Tilt Cradle].
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode selection screen is displayed.
If you have touched an item other than [Remote Pan Tilt Cradle] or if the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
is not recognised correctly, reconnect the USB cable.
If you turn off and on this unit with the USB cable connected, this unit may operate in the previous
Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode.
Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any
other USB cables.)
As shown in the illustration, connect the USB cable or DC cable so that it
will not be caught in objects such as the moving part of the Remote Pan
Tilt Cradle and other cables. If the cable is caught in the moving part of
the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, it may cause the recording position to
change or cause a malfunction.
Install the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle in a location that meets the following
requirements:
j A location out of the reach of children and pets
j A level location with no obstacles
j A location approximately 2 to 3 m away from subjects
Before mounting this unit on the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, insert the SD card and the battery.
When this unit is mounted on the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, make sure to hold the Remote Pan Tilt
Cradle to carry them. Carrying them by holding this unit may cause malfunction.
Do not use the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle for surveillance purposes.
Do not force the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to stop moving during panning/tilting operation.
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is not capable of supplying power to this unit.
When the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle detects a problem, its status indicator flashes, and both this
unit and the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle turn off.
In the following cases, this unit will be set to Intelligent Auto Mode when connected to the Remote
Pan Tilt Cradle:
j When using [Interval] in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode
j In HDR Movie Mode
In Cinema Like Effect Mode (except for when [Always] is selected for FULL HD Slow Motion
Video Mode)
3 Press the power button of the Remote Pan Tilt
Cradle to turn it on.
The status indicator B lights on.
4 Turn on this unit.
Power button
6 Install the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle so that its
home position will face the front of the subject.
The home position runs through the centre of the power
button.
Home position
j (For the series/ series/ series)
WXF1
VXF1
VX1
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 282 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 283 -
The following restrictions apply when this unit is connected to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle:
j Only [Always] is available for [SLOW MOTION SETUP].
j HDR Movie Mode is not available.
j The Focus Expand function is not available.
Connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit. (l 281)
Set [Panning Angle]/[Tilt Angle]/[Tilt Speed] in advance. (l 286)
1 Touch the desired Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode.
If you touch [Preset Positions], the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will rotate and return to its home
position.
If you touch [SETUP], the Setup menu will be displayed. (l 286)
2 (When [Manual] is selected)
Touch , and operate the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle with / / / .
When you finish the operation, touch [ENTER].
(When [Preset Positions] is selected)
Touch the position button.
The position buttons will disappear when no touch operation is performed for a specific period of
time. To display them again, touch the screen.
Using the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
Mode
Operation of the
Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
Description
[Party Scene]
The operation is
automatic.
The Remote Pan Tilt
Cradle works within the
recording range set in
[Panning Angle]/[Tilt
Angle].
At an event such as a party, recording will be
performed while the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
automatically controls the recording direction
within the recording range.
When a person or a moving object is
detected, recording of the person or the
object takes priority for a specific period of
time.
[Moving Object]
When a moving object is detected within the
recording range, the object will be tracked and
recorded automatically.
[Manual]
The operation is manual. This mode lets you manually operate the
Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.
[Preset Positions]
The operation is
automatic.
The Remote Pan Tilt
Cradle moves to
recording angles
registered to the
position buttons.
This mode lets you perform recording from
preset recording angles. You can switch
between different angles with the touch of a
button.
You can also set the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to
automatically cycle through recording angles
registered to the position buttons.
For information on how to register them or
use this mode, refer to page 284.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 283 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 284 -
When is not highlighted in yellow, even if you touch the screen, the position buttons will not
be displayed. To display them, touch , and touch the screen while is highlighted in
yellow.
If you have not registered positions to the position buttons yet, touch to register them.
(l 284)
3 Press the recording start/stop button.
(When [Party Scene]/[Moving Object] is selected)
Before recording starts, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle rotates and returns to its home position. It
takes time until recording starts.
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle operates within the range set in advance.
(When [Manual]/[Preset Positions] is selected)
Performing the operation of Step 2 during recording may cause the recording screen to shake or
the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to move from its original location.
To switch the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode
Tou c h .
The selection screen of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode is displayed. Touch the desired mode.
To exit the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
Tou c h [EXI T].
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle rotates and returns to its home position.
After the operation, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle turns off. Before removing this unit, disconnect
the USB cable.
Registering positions to the position buttons
1 Touch .
2 Touch the position button to which you want to register a position.
You can register positions to [POS1]/[POS2]/[POS3]/[POS4]/[POS5]
The position buttons without a registered position are indicated as [Not set].
3 Determine a position with ///
You can also operate the zoom with the zoom lever.
4 Touch [ENTER].
To register positions to other position buttons, repeat Steps 2–4.
To adjust a position that has already been registered to a position button, touch the position
button to which the position you want to adjust is registered, and follow Steps 3–4.
Moving the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to a registered position
1 Touch .
Check that is highlighted in yellow.
The position buttons ([POS1]/[POS2]/[POS3]/[POS4]/[POS5]/[HOME]) will be displayed.
These buttons will disappear when no touch operation is performed for approximately 5 seconds.
To display them again, touch the screen.
2 Touch the desired position button.
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will move to the registered position of the selected position button.
You cannot select position buttons without a registered position.
If you touch [CANCEL], the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will stop in a midway position.
To return to the home position, touch [HOME].
Setting up [Preset Positions]
POS
POS
POS
POS
POS
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 284 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 285 -
Using Cycle Mode
In this mode, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle cycles through positions registered to the position buttons
in the desired sequence.
The default sequence is as follows: [HOME] # [POS1] # [POS2] # [POS3] # [POS4] # [POS5]
Touch .
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle moves to the next position at approximately 5 second intervals.
If you touch [Stop] while the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is moving, it will stop midway. Cyclic Mode
will be deactivated.
If you touch [Pause] and touch another position button, Cyclic Mode will be deactivated. The
Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will move to the position of the position button you have touched.
In Cyclic Mode, turns of the position buttons without a registered position will be skipped. The
Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will move to the position of the next position button.
Rearranging the Cycle Mode sequence
1 Touch .
2 Touch .
3 Touch the desired turn.
If you touch [Reset], the sequence will return to the default setting.
4 Touch the desired position button.
If you touch [SKIP], the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will skip to the position of the next turn in Cyclic
Mode.
5 Touch [ENTER].
Deleting positions registered to the position buttons
1 Touch .
2 Touch .
3 Touch the position button you want to delete.
To delete all positions registered to the position buttons, touch [Delete all].
4 Touch [YES].
When this unit is connected to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, this unit is set to Motion Picture
Recording Mode. You cannot switch this unit to Still Picture Recording Mode.
We recommend that you make a test recording in advance to check if the image and sound are
recorded correctly.
The sound of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle in operation will be recorded.
If you start recording after making changes to the setup of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, such as
switching the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode or changing the location of the Remote Pan Tilt
Cradle, it may rotate and return to its home position.
Once the operation starts, do not disconnect the USB cable or move the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle
and this unit until the operation is finished. This may cause a malfunction or the motion picture not
to be recorded correctly.
When you press the power button or when [ECONOMY (BATT)] (l 45) or [ECONOMY (AC)]
(l 45) works, this unit and the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will turn off after the Remote Pan Tilt
Cradle rotates and returns to its home position.
When the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is in operation, neither [ECONOMY (BATT)] nor [ECONOMY
(AC)] will work.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 285 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 286 -
The following functions will be set to [OFF]:
j Level Shot Function
j Optical Image Stabilizer
j [SHOOTING GUIDE]
If you experience fatigue, a feeling of discomfort or other symptoms when playing back a scene
recorded with the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, stop the playback.
(About [Party Scene]/[Moving Object])
Still pictures cannot be recorded during Motion picture recording.
Depending on recording conditions, the colour tone of the image being recorded may change or
subjects may not be recorded automatically in cases such as the following:
j The subject is too large or too small
j The background and the subject are similar in colour
j The recording location is dark
j Bright light is detected (sky, TV, lamp, etc.)
j The subject is moving too fast, or not moving
j The area being recorded is close to a window
Depending on recording conditions, scenes may not be recorded as intended. In such cases, we
recommend setting the mode to [Manual].
(About [Party Scene])
[Sound Scene Select] is set to [Auto].
(About [Moving Object])
When recording starts, a moving subject will be detected. Before recording, point the camera at
the subject.
This unit cannot track more than one subject simultaneously.
Certain types of subjects, such as a fast moving subject, may not be tracked.
(About [Preset Positions])
Some screen indications disappear when the position buttons are displayed or the Remote Pan
Tilt Cradle is moving to a position.
When the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is connected to this unit, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle setup menu
can be set.
Connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit (l 281)
1 Touch [SETUP] in the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode screen.
2 Touch desired menu item.
Set the left/right pan range of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle for [Party Scene]/[Moving Object].
Remote Pan Tilt Cradle settings
[Panning Angle]
[d180o]/[d90o]/[d45o]/[Stationary]
[d180o]: Pans to the left/right up to approx. 180 o.
[d90o]: Pans to the left/right up to approx. 90 o.
[d45o]: Pans to the left/right up to approx. 45 o.
[Stationary]: Panning to the left/right is off.
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 286 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
- 287 -
Set the up/down tilt range of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle for [Party Scene]/[Moving Object].
Set the up/down operation speed of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.
You can confirm the operating range of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle set for [Party Scene]/[Moving
Object].
The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle moves in the ranges set at [Panning Angle] and [Tilt Angle].
When the confirmation operation is finished, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle returns to its home
position.
The firmware version of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is displayed.
You can update the firmware version of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.
Before updating this unit, update the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.
If you update this unit first, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle may become unusable.
You can watch the demonstration of how the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will operate when [Party
Scene] is set.
Touch [Party Scene Demo], the demonstration automatically starts.
When you touch [EXIT], the demonstration will be cancelled.
You can watch the demonstration of how the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will operate when [Moving
Object] is set.
Touch [Moving Object Demo], the demonstration automatically starts.
When you touch [EXIT], the demonstration will be cancelled.
[Tilt Angle]
[d15o]/[Stationary]
[d15o]: Tilts up/down up to approx. 15 o.
[Stationary]: Tilting up/down is off.
[Tilt Speed]
[High]/[Normal]
[Pan/Tilt Check]
[Version Disp.]
[Version Up]
For the latest update information, check the support website below. (As of January 2018)
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam
(This Site is English only)
[Party Scene Demo]
[Moving Object Demo]
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 287 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
Panasonic Corporation
Web site: http://www.panasonic.com
HC-WXF1-VXF1-VX1-V800EBEP-DVQP1585_eng.book 288 ページ 2018年2月22日 木曜日 午後12時30分
282

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Panasonic HC-V808 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Panasonic HC-V808 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 14,21 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Panasonic HC-V808

Panasonic HC-V808 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 288 pagina's

Panasonic HC-V808 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 288 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info